General detection and isolation of specific cells by binding of labeled molecules

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to detection molecules comprising at least one binding molecule, at least one linker and at least one label, and detection methods making use of same. The invention provides a high-throughput method for detection, isolation and/or identification of specific entities or cells.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/316,587, filed 6 Dec. 2016, which is the U.S. national phase of PCT/DK2015/050169, filed 15 Jun. 2015, which claims priority of Danish applications PA 2014 00311, filed 13 Jun. 2014, PA 2014 00322, filed 18 Jun. 2014, and PA 2014 00453 filed 16 Aug. 2014. Each of the aforementioned applications is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIELD OF INVENTION

The present invention relates to detection molecules comprising at least one binding molecule, at least one linker and at least one label, and detection methods making use of same. The invention provides a high-throughput method for detection, isolation and/or identification of specific entities or cells.

BACKGROUND

The adaptive immune system is directed through specific interactions between immune cells and antigen-presenting cells (e.g. dendritic cells, B-cells, monocytes and macrophages) or target cells (e.g. virus infected cells, bacteria infected cells or cancer cells). In important field in immunology relates to the understanding of the molecular interaction between an immune cell and the target cell.

Specifically for T-lymphocytes (T-cells), this interaction is mediated through binding between the T-cell receptor (TCR) and the Major Histocompatibility Complex (MHC) class I or class II. The MHC molecules carries a peptide cargo, and this peptide in decisive for T-cell recognition. The understanding of T-cell recognition experienced a dramatic technological breakthrough when Atman et al. (1) in 1996 discovered that multimerization of single peptide-MHC molecules into tetramers would allow sufficient binding-strength (avidity) between the peptide-MHC molecules and the TCR to determine this interaction through a fluorescence label attached to the MHC-multimer. Such fluorescent-labelled MHC multimers (of both class I and class II molecules) are now widely used for determining the T-cell specificity. The MHC multimer associated fluorescence can be determined by e.g. flow cytometry or microscopy, or T-cells can be selected based on this fluorescence label through e.g. flow cytometry or bead-based sorting. However, a limitation to this approach relates to the number of different fluorescence labels available, as each fluorescence label serve as a specific signature for the peptide-MHC in question.

Thus, this strategy is poorly matching the enormous diversity in T-cell recognition. For the most predominant subset of T-cells (the αβ TCR T-cells), the number of possible distinct αβ TCRs has been estimated at ˜1015 (2) although the number of distinct TCRs in an individual human is probably closer to 107(3). Therefore, much effort has attempted to expand the complexity of the T-cell determination, with the aim to enable detection of multiple different T-cell specificities in a single sample. A more recent invention relates to multiplex detection of antigen specific T-cells is the use of combinatorial encoded MHC multimers. This technique uses a combinatorial fluorescence labelling approach that allows for the detection of 28 different T-cell populations in a single sample when first published (4,5), but has later been extended through combination with novel instrumentation and heavy metal labels to allow detection of around 100 different T-cell populations in a single sample (6).

The requirement for new of technologies that allow a more comprehensive analysis of antigen-specific T-cell responses is underscored by the fact that several groups have tried to develop so-called MHC microarrays. In these systems, T-cell specificity is not encoded by fluorochromes, but is spatially encoded (7,8). In spite of their promise, MHC microarrays have not become widely adopted, and no documented examples for its value in the multiplexed measurement of T-cell responses, for instance epitope identification, are available.

Considering the above, there remains a need for a high-throughput method in the art of detection, isolation and/or identification of specific antigen responsive cells, such as antigen specific T-cells.

Further, there remains a need for a high-throughput method in the art of detection, isolation and/or identification of specific entities or cells, which cells can be detected via a binding molecule specific for said entity or cell.

Further, there remains a need in the art, considering the often limited amounts of sample available, for methods allowing detection, isolation and/or identification of multiple species of specific entities or cells, such as specific antigen responsive cells, such as T-cells, in a single sample.

SUMMARY

The present invention provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La). Said detection molecule can be used in various methods, such as methods comprising one or more steps of recognizing at least one entity or cell, binding at least one entity or cell, detecting at least one entity/cell-detection molecule complex, isolating at least one entity/cell-detection molecule complex and/or identifying one or more detection molecules bound to at least one entity/cell.

It is an aspect of the invention to provide a detection method comprising the steps of

-   1. Combining a sample with at least one detection molecule; wherein     the detection molecule comprises a binding molecule (BM), a linker     (Li), and a label (La); and wherein said sample comprises at least     one cell and/or entity, -   2. Incubating the at least one detection molecule and the sample; -   3. Isolating and/or detecting the at least one detection molecule of     step b), and -   4. Optionally determining the identity of the at least one detection     molecule of step c).

A binding molecule is a molecule that specifically associates covalently or non-covalently with a structure belonging to or associated with an entity in a sample. The defined structure in sample bound by a binding molecule is also called the target structure or target of the binding molecule.

The label comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is any molecule, atom or signal the identity of which can be found or determined by any means. The label is unique and specific for a certain detection molecule, or set of detection molecules, and enables the isolation, detection and/or identification of the identity of said detection molecules (or cell-detection molecule complexes). In a particular embodiment the label is a nucleic acid label, such as a DNA label,

The linker comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is a molecular entity and/or bond that connect the binding molecule and the label of the detection molecule.

The present invention describes the use of labels, preferably nucleic acid labels (comprising a barcode sequence) as specific labels for binding molecules such as MHC multimers to determine e.g. the antigen responsiveness in biological samples. After cellular selection the barcode sequence of the label can be revealed by e.g. sequencing. This technology allows for detection of multiple (potentially>1000) different antigen-specific cells in a single sample.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1. Structure of detection molecules. (Detection Molecule A) Structure of a detection molecule, in which the “binding molecule” comprises n pMHC complexes, where n can be any integer between 1 and 1000. (Detection Molecule B) Structure of a detection molecule, comprising “binding molecule”, label and the linker connecting the binding molecule and the label. The lower half of the figure shows the symbols representing the DNA tag (also called the oligonucleotide or oligonucleotide tag), the linker connecting binding molecule and label, MHC (major histocompatibility complex), peptide or other molecule (that binds to the MHC complex), pMHC (peptide-major histocompatibility complex), and the binding molecule (BM).

FIG. 2. Isolation and detection of detection molecules capable of binding to cells. The different steps of the method is outlined. In the depicted method the label of the detection molecule is an oligonucleotide. In Step 1 cells and “molecule library” (2-1015 detection molecules) is mixed. In Step 2 the cells and detection molecules are incubated, allowing none, some or all of the detection molecules to bind cells, and vice versa, allowing none, some or all of the cells to bind detection molecules. In step 3 the cell-detection molecule complexes are isolated, enriched for or detected. In the depicted approach, cells are spun down, having the effect of spinning detection molecules bound to the cells down as well. In Step 4 the detection molecules that bound to cells in step 3 (and therefore were co-precipitated with the cells) are identified. In the example the label consists of an oligonucleotide. Therefore, by PCR amplification of the oligonucleotide labels, followed by e.g. polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis to distinguish labels with different migration in the gel, the labels may be identified and thereby the detection molecules (and the identity of the corresponding binding molecules) can be identified. Alternatively, the oligonucleotide labels are identified by sequencing, directly from the precipitate of step 3, or following amplification of the oligonucleotides in the precipitate by e.g. PCR.

FIG. 3. Generation of barcode-labeled MHC multimers. FIG. 3 describes how peptide-MHC molecules, nucleic acid (DNA)-barcodes and (optional) fluorescent labels are assembled to form a library of MHC multimers each holding a DNA-barcode specific for the given peptide-MHC molecule involved. Structure A: The barcode is designed to have a unique sequence that can be determined through DNA sequencing. Also the barcode have shared amplification ends, enabling amplification of all DNA-barcodes simultaneously in a PCR reaction. DNA-barcodes are attached to the MHC-multimerization backbone (e.g. via a biotin linker binding to streptavidin on the multimer backbone). Structure B: Represents the multimer backbone. This may be any backbone that allow multimerization of macro-molecules. The backbone may (optionally) hold a fluorescence label (illustrated by the asterisk) to track the total pool of MHC multimer binding cells irrespectively of the peptide-MHC multimer specificity. Structure C: Represents the peptide-MHC molecule of interest, carrying a specific peptide cargo (horizontal line). Structure D: Represents the assembled peptide-MHC mulitimers carrying the DNA barcode.

FIG. 4. Generation of a library of barcode labelled MHC multimers (Composition). FIG. 4 illustrates the generation of a full barcode library. Library components (A): This library is composed of multiple, potentially more than 1000 different peptide-MHC multimers, each with a specific DNA-barcode. Such that barcode #1 codes for peptide-MHC complex #1, barcode #2 codes for peptide-MHC complex #2, barcode #3 codes for peptide-MHC complex #3, and so on until the possible mixture of thousands different specificities each with a specific barcode. Completed library (B): Represents the final reagent, which is a mixture of numerous different MHC-multimers each carrying a specific DNA barcode as a label for each peptide-MHC specificity.

FIG. 5. Detection of antigen responsive cells in a single sample. Method for detecting antigen responsive cells in a sample. In FIG. 5 it is illustrated how this library can be used for staining of antigen responsive cells in a single sample. Step A: Cells in single cell suspension (may e.g., but not exclusive, originate from peripheral blood, tissue biopsies or other body fluids) are mixed with the peptide-library represented in Step B. Step B: After staining, cells are sequentially washed and spun to remove residual MHC multimers that are not bound to a cellular surface. Specific cell populations, e.g. T-cells (CD8 or CD4 restricted), other immune cells or specifically MHC multimer binding T-cells may be sorted by flow cytometry or others means of cell sorting/selection. Step C: The DNA-barcode oligonucleotide sequences isolated from the cell population is amplified by PCR. Step D: This amplification product is sequenced by deep sequencing (providing 10-100.000s of reads). The sequencing will reveal the specific barcode sequence of DNA barcodes attached to cells in the specimen after selection, as these will appear more frequent than sequences associated to the background of non-specific attachment of MHC multimers. The “signal-to-noise” is counteracted by the fact that any unspecific MHC multimer event will have a random association of 1/1000 different barcodes (dependent of the size of the library), making it even more sensitive than normal multimer staining.

FIG. 6. Describes the possibility of linking the antigen specificity (tracked by the barcode) to other properties. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex. In FIG. 6, it is illustrated how this technology can be used to link different properties to the antigen specificity of a cell population.

Functional Readout (A): Illustrates how cells after binding to a barcode labeled MHC multimer library may be exposed to a certain stimuli. Cell populations can be selected based on the functional response to this stimuli (e.g., but not exclusive, cytokine secretion, phosphorylation, calcium release or numerous other measures). After selecting the responsive or non-responsive population (following the steps of FIG. 5), the DNA barcodes can be sequenced to decode the antigen responsiveness, and thereby determining the antigen-specificities involved in a given response.

Phenotype Readout (B): Illustrates how cells can be selected based on phenotype, to link a certain set of phenotypic characteristics to the antigen-responsiveness. Cell Sorting and Sequencing (C): Represents the possibility for single-cell sorting of MHC-multimer binding cells based on the co-attached fluorescence label on the MHC multimer. Through single-cell sorting the antigen-specificity of the given cell can be determined on a single cell level through sequencing of the associated barcode label. This can be linked to the TCR that can also be sequenced on a single cell level, as recently described (10). Hereby, this invention will provide a link between the TCR sequence, or other single-cell properties and the antigen specificity, and may through the use of barcode labeled MHC multimer libraries enable definition of antigen-specific TCRs in a mixture of thousands different specificities.

Quantitative Assessment (D): Illustrates the use of barcode labeled MHC multimer libraries for the quantitative assessment of MHC multimer binding to a given T-cell clone or TCR transduced/transfected cells. Since sequencing of the barcode label allow several different labels to be determined simultaneously on the same cell population, this strategy can be used to determine the avidity of a given TCR relative to a library of related peptide-MHC multimers. The relative contribution of the different DNA-barcode sequences in the final readout is determined based on the quantitative contribution of the TCR binding for each of the different peptide-MHC multimers in the library. Via titration based analyses it is possible to determine the quantitative binding properties of a TCR in relation to a large library of peptide-MHC multimers. All merged into a single sample. For this particular purpose the MHC multimer library may specifically hold related peptide sequences or alanine-substitution peptide libraries.

FIGS. 7A and 7B. Experimental data for attaching a DNA-barcode to a MHC multimer and amplify the specific sequences following T-cell staining. FIG. 7A: Shows the staining of cytomegalovirus (CMV) specific T-cells in a peripheral blood samples. The specific CMV-derived peptide-MHC multimers was labeled with a barcode (barcode #1) and mixed with an irrelevant/non-specific peptide-MHC multimer (HIV) labeled with barcode (barcode #2) and mixed with 998 other non-barcode labeled non-specific MHC multimers. Data here shows the feasibility for staining of CMV-specific T-cells in a mixture of 1000 other MHC multimers. Data is shown for three different staining protocols (A, B, C). FIG. 7B: Shows the readout of the specific barcode sequences by quantative PCR. Barcode #1 (CMV) determining the CMV specific T-cell in detected for all three staining protocols, whereas the irrelevant/non-specific barcode signal, barcode #2 (HIV) is undetectable.

FIG. 8: Stability of single-stranded and double-stranded oligonucleotides in blood preparations, cf. Example A.

FIGS. 9A-9C: A schematic presentation of the Label systems applied; the 1OS and 2OS DNA-barcode systems. FIG. 9A. The 1OS system comprised of single stranded oligonucleotides which were applied as a DNA barcodes. 1OS structure: A ˜80 nucleotide sequence. Biotin is attached at the 5′end where it accommodates easy attachment via a streptavidin binding site. The nucleotide sequence consists of a 20-25 nt forward primer followed by a random incorporation of 6 nt (N6), a short 3 nt linker and 25 nt that comprise the diverse barcode-identity. This is followed by 20-25 nt reverse primer region. FIG. 9B. The 2OS system are generated from annealing and elongation of two partially complementary oligonucleotides-nucleotide sequences, Oligo A and Oligo B, producing a fully double-stranded unique DNA sequences, which are used as DNA-barcodes. Oligo A corresponds largely to the 1OS DNA-barcodes, i.e. biotin is coupled to the 5′-end which begins with a forward primer region that is followed by a N6 segment and the unique oligonucleotide-sequence that will constitute one half of the barcode identity. After the unique sequence the reverse primer region of the 1OS system is replaced by a 16 nt sequence that is complementary to the 3′-end of Oligo B. Oligo B is described from the 3′-end where it anneals with Oligo A with a 16 nt complementary binding region followed by the unique oligonucleotide-sequence that will constitute the other half of the barcode identity. Hereafter comes a N6 region, which is followed by what is actually a forward primer region (since it lies in the 5′-end) but its complementary region will constitute the reverse priming region of the 2OS-DNA barcodes. Thus the primary differences between 1OS and 2OS barcodes are revealed in a greater length of the 2OS barcode, which is required to encompass two unique barcode regions, an annealing-site and an additional N6 region nearest the 3′-end. This adds up to ˜130 nts. FIG. 9C. Through PCR amplification of enriched DNA-barcode Labels these are appointed a sample identification barcode (6-8 nt), which is part of the forward primer design. Additionally both the forward and reverse primers hold adaptors for the Ion Torrent sequencing (A-key and P1-key respectively). Primers and keys for the 1OS and the 2OS barcode were of a similar design (here showing a 2OS barcode). Asterisk=biotin, nt=nucleotide.

FIGS. 10A-10B: Detection of a CMV specificity amongst negative control Detection Molecules (cf Example 1). A unique 2OS DNA-barcode was associated with the CMV positive Detection Molecules in 1., while another unique 2OS DNA-barcode was associated with the CMV positive control Detection Molecules in 2. The spare DNA-barcode in each sample incubation was associated with the HIV negative control Detection Molecule. FIG. 10A. Representative dot plot showing the PE positive population after staining with CMV and HIV Detection Molecules carrying separate 2OS DNA-barcodes. FIG. 10B. Ct values from multiplex qPCR of the sorted PE-pMHC-dextramer positive cells. Cells were stained with 1. and 2. respectively. Detection Molecules associated with a positive control (CMV) 2OS barcode and a negative control (HIV) 2OS barcode were present during staining, but the negative control (HIV) Detection Molecule was evidently washed out. The results obtained from two individual experiments are presented in separate bars. Approximately 200 cells were applied in each PCR. QPCR was run in duplicates and Ct values are shown as mean±range of duplicates.

FIG. 11: Detection of a CMV specificity amongst negative control Detection Molecules (cf. Example 2). A unique 1OS DNA-barcode was associated with the positive control Detection Molecules in 1, while another unique barcode was associated with the positive control reagents in 2. The spare barcode in each experiment was associated with a HIV negative Detection Molecules. In addition 998× unlabeled (i.e. lacking a DNA-barcode) negative control Detection Molecules were present in both 1. and 2. FIG. 11A, Ct values from multiplex qPCR of the sorted PE-pMHC-dextramer positive cells. Cells were stained with 1. and 2. respectively. Detection Molecules associated with a positive control (CMV) 1OS barcode and a negative control (HIV) 1OS barcode were present during staining, but the negative control (HIV) Detection Molecules were evidently washed out. Approximatly 575 cells were analyzed in each qPCR. FIG. 11B. The estimated number of barcodes bound per cell relative to the obtained Ct-values (as calculated from a standard curve of 1OS barcode). It is evident that there were some differences in the Ct values shown in B, even though the same number of cells was present in all qPCRs. This is however leveled when the values are normalized in respect to their specific probes. QPCR was run in duplicates, here showing mean±range of duplicates.

FIG. 12: Schematic presentations of the number of specific 1OS DNA-barcode reads mapped to seven different samples as identified by their respective sample-ID barcodes (cf. Example 3). A BC sample containing a 5% HLA-B0702 CMV pp65 TPR T cell response (corresponding Detection Molecule encoded by barcode 88) were spiked into a HLA-B0702 negative BC in fivefold dilutions, creating seven samples with theoretic frequencies of 5%, 1%, 0.2%, 0.04%, 0.008%, 0.0016% and 0.00032% of these T cells. The BC that these cells were spiked into contained ˜0.1% HLA-A1101 EBV-EBNA4 specific T cells (corresponding Detection Molecule encoded by barcode 4). Samples were stained with the same library comprised of 110 different 1OS-labeled Detection Molecules. Each panel, named according to the theoretic frequency of the HLA-B0702 CMV response, represents the respective reads mapped to that given sample-ID barcode. The bars indicate reads mapped to a given 1OS barcode (vertical lines) after normalization in respect to the Detection Molecule-input reads mapped to that same 1OS barcode. Experiments were performed in duplicate. Here showing mean.

FIG. 13: Schematic presentations of the number of specific 2OS DNA-barcode reads mapped to seven different samples as identified by their respective sample-ID barcodes (cf. Example 4). A BC sample containing a 5% HLA-B0702 CMV pp65 TPR T cell response (corresponding Detection Molecule encoded by barcode A3B18) were spiked into a HLA-B0702 negative BC in fivefold dilutions, creating seven samples with theoretic frequencies of 5%, 1%, 0.2%, 0.04%, 0.008%, 0.0016% and 0.00032% of these T cells. The BC that these cells were spiked into contained ˜1% HLA-A1101 EBV-EBNA4 specific T cells (corresponding Detection Molecule encoded by barcode A1B4). Samples were stained with the same library comprised of 110 different 2OS-labeled Detection Molecules. Each panel, named according to the theoretic frequency of the HLA-B0702 CMV response, represents the respective reads mapped to that given sample-ID barcode. The bars indicate reads mapped to a given 2OS barcode (vertical lines) after normalization in respect to the Detection Molecule-input reads mapped to that same 2OS barcode. Experiments were performed in duplicate. Here showing mean.

FIG. 14: Schematic presentations of the number of specific 1OS barcode reads mapped to six different samples as identified by their respective sample-ID barcodes (cf. Example 5). Six BCs were stained with the same library comprised of 110 different 1OS-labeled Detection Molecules. Each panel, named according to the donor BC number, represents the respective reads mapped to that given sample-ID barcode. The bars indicate reads mapped to a given 1OS barcode (vertical lines) after normalization in respect to the Detection Molecule-input reads mapped to that same 1OS barcode.

FIG. 15: Schematic presentations of the number of specific 2OS barcode reads mapped to six different samples as identified by their respective sample-ID barcodes (cf. Example 6). Six BCs were stained with the same library comprised of 110 different 2OS-labeled Detection Molecules. Each panel, named according to the donor BC number, represents the respective reads mapped to that given sample-ID barcode. The bars indicate reads mapped to a given 2OS barcode (vertical lines) after normalization in respect to the Detection Molecule-input reads mapped to that same 2OS barcode.

FIG. 16: Schematic presentations of the number of specific 2OS barcode reads mapped to 13 different TIL samples as identified by their respective sample-ID barcodes along with the reads mapped to the Detection Molecule-input sample (lower panel) (cf. Example 7). 11 TIL samples were stained with the same library comprised of 175 different 2OS-labeled Detection Molecules. Each panel represents the respective reads mapped to that given sample-ID barcode, which corresponds to TILs from resected tumor of a given malignant melanoma patient or to the Detection Molecule-input sample. Panel 1-7 and 9-11 represents the reads obtained from a singular amplification and sequencing of enriched Detection Molecules, i.e. 2OS barcodes, with individual patient samples. Panel 10 k corresponds to the mean reads obtained from three separate amplification-rounds (with individual sample-IDs) of equivalent to 10.000 sorted cells (enriched Detection Molecule) from the same patient-sample (TIL sample 8). Panel 1K corresponds to the reads obtained from amplification of equivalent to 1000 sorted cells (enriched Detection Molecule) and panel 100 corresponds to the mean reads obtained from three separate amplification-rounds (with individual sample-IDs) of equivalent to 100 sorted cells (enriched Detection Molecule) from the same patient-sample (TIL sample 8). The bars indicate reads mapped to a given 2OS barcode (vertical lines). The reads were not normalized in respect to the input sample (here mean of triplicate PCRs with unique sample-IDs), since only a total of ˜5600 reads were obtained in the sequencing reaction (samples are being resequenced). Even so, the results are encouraging, with 2OS sequences mapping to most of the barcode identities present in the Detection Molecule library (input) and a trend showing preferential enrichment of certain, but different, 2OS barcodes across the patient samples. Furthermore, the replicates of sample 8, based on different cell numbers, shows comparable results. The number of reads of each barcode is reduced in clonality in respect to their N6 sequence.

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

As used everywhere herein, the term “a”, “an” or “the” is meant to be one or more, i. e. at least one.

‘Aff.’ is an abbreviation for affinity.

An “amino acid residue” can be a natural or non-natural amino acid residue linked peptide bonds or bonds different from peptide bonds. The amino acid residues can be in D-configuration or L-configuration. An amino acid residue comprises an amino terminal part (NH₂) and a carboxy terminal part (COOH) separated by a central part comprising a carbon atom, or a chain of carbon atoms, at least one of which comprises at least one side chain or functional group. NH₂ refers to the amino group present at the amino terminal end of an amino acid or peptide, and COOH refers to the carboxy group present at the carboxy terminal end of an amino acid or peptide. The generic term amino acid comprises both natural and non-natural amino acids. Natural amino acids of standard nomenclature as listed in J. Biol. Chem., 243:3552-59 (1969) and adopted in 37 C.F.R., section 1.822(b)(2) belong to the group of amino acids listed in the table herein below. Non-natural amino acids are those not listed in the Table below. Examples of non-natural amino acids are those listed e.g. in 37 C.F.R. section 1.822(b)(4), all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Also, non-natural amino acid residues include, but are not limited to, modified amino acid residues, L-amino acid residues, and stereoisomers of D-amino acid residues.

The terms “amino-terminal” and “carboxyl-terminal” are used herein to denote positions within polypeptides. Where the context allows, these terms are used with reference to a particular sequence or portion of a polypeptide to denote proximity or relative position. For example, a certain sequence positioned carboxyl-terminal to a reference sequence within a polypeptide is located proximal to the carboxyl terminus of the reference sequence, but is not necessarily at the carboxyl terminus of the complete polypeptide.

Adjuvant: adjuvants are drugs that have few or no pharmacological effects by themselves, but can increase the efficacy or potency of other drugs when given at the same time. In another embodiment, an adjuvant is an agent which, while not having any specific antigenic effect in itself, can stimulate the immune system, increasing the response to a vaccine.

Agonist: agonist as used herein is a substance that binds to a specific receptor and triggers a response in the cell. It mimics the action of an endogenous ligand that binds to the same receptor.

Antagonist: antagonist as used herein is a substance that binds to a specific receptor and blocks the response in the cell. It blocks the action of an endogenous ligand that binds to the same receptor.

Antibodies: As used herein, the term “antibody” means an isolated or recombinant binding agent that comprises the necessary variable region sequences to specifically bind an antigenic epitope. Therefore, an antibody is any form of antibody or fragment thereof that exhibits the desired biological activity, e.g., binding the specific target antigen. Antibodies can derive from multiple species. For example, antibodies include rodent (such as mouse and rat), rabbit, sheep, camel, and human antibodies. Antibodies can also include chimeric antibodies, which join variable regions from one species to constant regions from another species. Likewise, antibodies can be humanized, that is constructed by recombinant DNA technology to produce immunoglobulins which have human framework regions from one species combined with complementarity determining regions (CDR's) from a another species' immunoglobulin. The antibody can be monoclonal or polyclonal. Antibodies can be divided into isotypes (IgA, IgG, IgM, IgD, IgE, IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1, IgA2, IgM1, IgM2)

Antibodies: In another embodiment the term “antibody” refers to an intact antibody, or a fragment of an antibody that competes with the intact antibody for antigen binding. In certain embodiments, antibody fragments are produced by recombinant DNA techniques. In certain embodiments, antibody fragments are produced by enzymatic or chemical cleavage of intact antibodies. Exemplary antibody fragments include, but are not limited to, Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)2, Fv, and scFv. Exemplary antibody fragments also include, but are not limited to, domain antibodies, nanobodies, minibodies ((scFv-C.sub.H3).sub.2), maxibodies ((scFv-C.sub.H2-C.sub.H3).sub.2), diabodies (noncovalent dimer of scFv).

Antigen presenting cell: An antigen-presenting cell (APC) as used herein is a cell that displays foreign antigen complexed with MHC on its surface.

Antigenic peptide: Used interchangeably with binding peptide. Any peptide molecule that is bound or able to bind into the binding groove of either MHC class 1 or MHC class 2 molecules.

Antigenic polypeptide: Polypeptide that contains one or more antigenic peptide sequences.

APC: Antigen Presenting Cell

Aptamer: the term aptamer as used herein is defined as oligonucleic acid or peptide molecules that bind a specific target molecule. Aptamers are usually created by selecting them from a large random sequence pool, but natural aptamers also exist. Aptamers can be divided into DNA aptamers, RNA aptamers and peptide aptamers.

Avidin: Avidin as used herein is a glycoprotein found in the egg white and tissues of birds, reptiles and amphibians. It contains four identical subunits having a combined mass of 67,000-68,000 daltons. Each subunit consists of 128 amino acids and binds one molecule of biotin.

Binding molecule (BM): The binding molecule comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is any molecule that can specifically associate with, recognize and/or bind to a cell or any other entity, such as another molecule, a surface or a biological cell or other type of cellular entity (e.g. micelle). Example binding molecules are antibodies, MHC- and MHC-peptide complexes, peptides, small organic molecules, oligonucleotides, any kind of aptamer, proteins, multicomponent complexes comprising 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more subunits, and supramolecular structures.

Biologically active molecule: A biologically active molecule is a molecule having itself a biological activity/effect or is able to induce a biological activity/effect when administered to a biological system. Biologically active molecules include adjuvants, immune targets (e.g. antigens), enzymes, regulators of receptor activity, receptor ligands, immune potentiators, drugs, toxins, cytotoxic molecules, co-receptors, proteins and peptides in general, sugar moieties, lipid groups, nucleic acids including siRNA, nanoparticles, small molecules.

Bioluminescent: Bioluminescence, as used herein, is the production and emission of light by a living organism as the result of a chemical reaction during which chemical energy is converted to light energy.

Biotin: Biotin, as used herein, is also known as vitamin H or B7. Niotin has the chemical formula C₁₀H₁₆N₂O₃S.

Bispecific antibodies: The term bispecific antibodies as used herein is defined as antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. The antibody can also be trispecific or multispecific.

Bispecific capture molecule: Molecule that have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. The molecule can also be trispecific or multispecific.

Carrier/linker (Li): Carrier and linker may be used interchangeably herein, whereby a carrier is one type of a linker according to the present invention. A carrier as used herein can be any type of molecule that is directly or indirectly associated with the binding molecule such as a MHC peptide complex. In this invention, a carrier will typically refer to a functionalized polymer (e.g. dextran) that is capable of reacting with a binding molecule such as MHC-peptide complexes, thus covalently attaching the binding molecule to the carrier, or that is capable of reacting with scaffold molecules (e.g. streptavidin), thus covalently attaching streptavidin to the carrier; the streptavidin then may bind MHC-peptide complexes. Carrier and scaffold may also be used interchangeably herein where scaffold typically refers to smaller molecules of a linker or multimerization domain and carrier typically refers to larger molecule and/or cell like structures.

Cell-detection molecule complex: A complex comprising at least one detection molecule according to the invention and at least one cell.

Chelating chemical compound: Chelating chemical compound, as used herein, is the process of reversible bindingof a ligand to a metal ion, forming a metal complex.

Chemiluminescent: Chemiluminescence, as used herein, is the emission of light (luminescence) without emission of heat as the result of a chemical reaction.

Chromophore: A chromophore, as used herein, is the part of a visibly coloured molecule responsible for light absorption over a range of wavelengths thus giving rise to the colour. By extension the term can be applied to uv or it absorbing parts of molecules.

Coiled-coil polypeptide: Used interchangeably with coiled-coil peptide and coiled-coil structure. The term coiled-coil polypeptide as used herein is a structural motif in proteins, in which 2-7 alpha-helices are coiled together like the strands of a rope

Complement protein: Protein of the complement system.

Counting beads: Beads or particles countable in a flow cytometry experiment. They can be used as internal control beads enabling absolute cell count in a sample.

Covalent binding: The term covalent binding is used herein to describe a form of chemical bonding that is characterized by the sharing of pairs of electrons between atoms. Attraction-to-repulsion stability that forms between atoms when they share electrons is known as covalent bonding.

Crosslinking is the process of chemically joining two or more molecules by a covalent bond. Crosslinking reagents contain reactive ends to specific functional groups (primary amines, sulfhydryls, etc.) on proteins or other molecules.

Detection molecule: A molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a label (La) and a linker (Li), wherein ‘a’ is meant to comprise at least one, or one or more.

Diagnosis: The act or process of identifying or determining the nature and cause of a disease or injury through evaluation

Diabodies: The term “diabodies” refers to small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, which fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light-chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain (VH-VL). By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites.

Dendritic cell: The term dendritic cell as used herein is a type of immune cells. Their main function is to process antigen material and present it on the surface to other cells of the immune system, thus functioning as antigen-presenting cells.

Detection: In this invention detection means any method capable of measuring, or determining the presence of, one molecule alone or bound to another molecule.

Dextran: the term dextran as used herein is a complex, branched polysaccharide made of many glucose molecules joined into chains of varying lengths. The straight chain consists of α1→6 glycosidic linkages between glucose molecules, while branches begin from α1→3 linkages (and in some cases, α1→2 and α1→4 linkages as well).

Diabodies: The term “diabodies” refers to small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, which fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light-chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain (VH-VL). By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites.

Direct detection of T cells: Direct detection of T cells is used herein interchangeably with direct detection of TCR and direct detection of T cell receptor. As used herein direct detection of T cells is detection directly of the binding interaction between a specific T cell receptor and a MHC multimer.

DNA: The term DNA (Deoxyribonucleic acid) duplex as used herein is a polymer of simple units called nucleotides, with a backbone made of sugars and phosphate atoms joined by ester bonds. Attached to each sugar is one of four types of molecules called bases.

DNA duplex: In living organisms, DNA does not usually exist as a single molecule, but instead as a tightly-associated pair of molecules. These two long strands entwine like vines, in the shape of a double helix.

Electrophilic: electrophile, as used herein, is a reagent attracted to electrons that participates in a chemical reaction by accepting an electron pair in order to bond to a nucleophile.

Entity-detection molecule complexes: A complex comprising at least one detection molecule according to the invention and at least one entity.

Enzyme label: enzyme labelling, as used herein, involves a detection method comprising a reaction catalysed by an enzyme.

Entity: An entity according to the present invention is capable of being recognized and/or bound by a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule as defined herein, to form a complex comprising the entity and the detection molecule.

Epitope-focused antibody: Antibodies also include epitope-focused antibodies, which have at least one minimal essential binding specificity determinant from a heavy chain or light chain CDR3 from a reference antibody, methods for making such epitope-focused antibodies are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/040,159, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Flow cytometry: The analysis and/or sorting of single cells using a flow cytometer.

Flow cytometer: Instrument that measures cell size, granularity and flourescence due to bound fluorescent molecules as single cells pass in a stream past photodectors. A flow cytometer carry out the measurements and/or sorting of individual cells.

Fluorescent: the term fluorescent as used herein is to have the ability to emit light of a certain wavelength when activated by light of another wavelength.

Fluorochromes: Fluorochrome, as used herein, is any fluorescent compound used as a dye to mark e.g. protein with a fluorescent label.

Fluorophore: A fluorophore, as used herein, is a component of a molecule which causes a molecule to be fluorescent.

Folding: In this invention folding means in vitro or in vivo folding of proteins in a tertiery structure.

Fusion antibody: As used herein, the term “fusion antibody” refers to a molecule in which an antibody is fused to a non-antibody polypeptide at the N- or C-terminus of the antibody polypeptide.

Glycosylated: Glycosylation, as used herein, is the process or result of addition of saccharides to proteins and lipids.

Hapten: A residue on a molecule for which there is a specific molecule that can bind, e.g. an antibody.

Heteroconjugate antibodies are composed of two covalently joined antibodies. Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells.

IgG: IgG as used herein is a monomeric immunoglobulin, built of two heavy chains and two light chains. Each molecule has two antigen binding sites.

Isolated antibody: The term “isolated” antibody as used herein is an antibody which has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment.

Immunoconjugates: The invention also pertains to immunoconjugates comprising an antibody conjugated to a cytotoxic agent such as a chemotherapeutic agent, toxin (e.g., an enzymatically active toxin of bacterial, fungal, plant, or animal origin, or fragments thereof), or a radioactive isotope (i.e., a radioconjugate). Enzymatically active toxins and fragments thereof that can be used include diphtheria A chain, nonbinding active fragments of diphtheria toxin, exotoxin A chain (from Pseudomonas aeruginosa), ricin A chain, abrin A chain, modeccin A chain, alpha-sarcin, Aleurites fordii proteins, dianthin proteins, Phytolaca americana proteins (PAPI, PAPII, and PAP-S), Momordica charantia inhibitor, curcin, crotin, Sapaonaria officinalis inhibitor, gelonin, mitogellin, restrictocin, phenomycin, enomycin, and the tricothecenes. A variety of radionuclides are available for the production of radioconjugated antibodies. Conjugates of the antibody and cytotoxic agent are made using a variety of bifunctional protein-coupling agents such as N-succinimidyl-3-(2-pyridyldithiol) propionate (SPDP), iminothiolane (IT), bifunctional derivatives of imidoesters (such as dimethyl adipimidate HCL), active esters (such as disuccinimidyl suberate), aldehydes (such as glutaraldehyde), bis-azido compounds (such as bis(p-azidobenzoyl)hexanediamine), bis-diazonium derivatives (such as bis-(p-diazoniumbenzoyl)-ethylenediamine), diisocyanates (such as tolyene 2,6-diisocyanate), and bis-active fluorine compounds (such as 1,5-difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene).

Immune monitoring: Immune monitoring of the present invention refers to testing of immune status in the diagnosis and therapy of diseases like but not limited to cancer, immunoproliferative and immunodeficiency disorders, autoimmune abnormalities, and infectious disease. It also refers to testing of immune status before, during and after vaccination and transplantation procedures.

Immune Monitoring Process: A Series of One or More Immune Monitoring Analyses

Indirect detection of T cells: Indirect detection of T cells is used interchangeably herein with indirect detection of TCR and indirect detection of T cell receptor. As used herein indirect detection of T cells is detection of the binding interaction between a specific T cell receptor and a MHC multimer by measurement of the effect of the binding interaction.

Ionophore: ionophore, as used herein, is a lipid-soluble molecule usually synthesized by microorganisms capable of transporting ions.

Label (La). The label comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is any molecule, atom or signal the identity of which can be found or determined by any means. The label of a detection molecule specifies the binding molecule that is linked to the label. Example labels are nucleic acid labels including oligonucleotides such as DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA; antibodies; any of the elements such as zinc, iron, magnesium, any of the lanthanides; peptides; proteins; and any type of organic molecules. The identity of the label can be determined by any appropriate method for the specific type of label, including but not limited to mass spectrometry, sequencing (e.g. DNA sequencing, peptide sequencing), gel electrophoresis, gel filtration, and many other methods.

Labelling: Labelling herein means attachment of a label to a molecule.

Lanthanide: lanthanide, as used herein, series comprises the 15 elements with atomic numbers 57 through 71, from lanthanum to lutetium.

LDA: Limiting Dilution Assay

A ligand is a molecule capable of binding to and forming a complex with a biomolecule to serve a biological purpose.

Linker (Li). The linker comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is a molecular entity and/or bond that connect the binding molecule and the label of the detection molecule. The linker can be of any length, such as length 1-10.000 Å (Ångstrøm), and can have any composition, including for example an oligonucleotide, peptide, organic molecule, and more. A linker according to the present invention comprises, or is identical to, a carrier molecule (or carrier), a multimerization domain, a scaffold, a connector and/or a backbone, and may equally be referred to as such herein. The linker in one embodiment comprises any linker, carrier or carrier molecule, multimerization domain or backbone, to which the binding molecule and the label are attached. The attachment may be direct or indirect, and may comprise a covalent or non-covalent binding.

Liposomes: The term liposome as used herein is defined as a spherical vesicle with a membrane composed of a phospholipid and cholesterol bilayer. Liposomes, usually but not by definition, contain a core of aqueous solution; lipid spheres that contain no aqueous material are called micelles.

Immunoliposomes: The antibodies disclosed herein can also be formulated as immunoliposomes. Liposomes comprising the antibody are prepared by methods known in the art, such as described in Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82: 3688 (1985); Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77: 4030 (1980); and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545. Particularly useful liposomes can be generated by the reverse-phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol, and PEG-derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE).

Immuno-profiling: Immuno profiling as used herein defines the profiling of an individual's antigen-specific T-cell repertoire

MHC: Major histocompatibility complex.

MHC I is used interchangeably herein with MHC class I and denotes the major histocompatibility complex class I.

MHC II is used interchangeably herein with MHC class II and denotes the major histocompatibility complex class I.

MHC molecule: a MHC molecule as used everywhere herein is defined as any MHC class I molecule or MHC class II molecule as defined herein.

A “MHC Class I molecule” as used everywhere herein is used interchangeably with MHC I molecule and is defined as a molecule which comprises 1-3 subunits, including a MHC I heavy chain, a MHC I heavy chain combined with a MHC I beta2microglobulin chain, a MHC I heavy chain combined with MHC I beta2microglobulin chain through a flexible linker, a MHC I heavy chain combined with an antigenic peptide, a MHC I heavy chain combined with an antigenic peptide through a linker, a MHC I heavy chain/MHC I beta2microglobulin dimer combined with an antigenic peptide, and a MHC I heavy chain/MHC I beta2microglobulin dimer combined with an antigenic peptide through a flexible linker to the heavy chain or beta2microglobulin. The MHC I molecule chains can be changed by substitution of single or by cohorts of native amino acids, or by inserts, or deletions to enhance or impair the functions attributed to said molecule.

MHC Class I like molecules (including non-classical MHC Class I molecules) include CD1d, HLA E, HLA G, HLA F, HLA H, MICA, MIC B, ULBP-1, ULBP-2, and ULBP-3.

A “MHC Class II molecule” as used everywhere herein is used interchangeably with MHC II molecule and is defined as a molecule which comprises 2-3 subunits including a MHC II alpha-chain and a MHC II beta-chain (i.e. a MHC II alpha/beta-dimer), an MHC II alpha/beta dimer with an antigenic peptide, and an MHC II alpha/beta dimer combined with an antigenic peptide through a flexible linker to the MHC II alpha or MHC II beta chain, a MHC II alpha/beta dimer combined through an interaction by affinity tags e.g. jun-fos, a MHC II alpha/beta dimer combined through an interaction by affinity tags e.g. jun-fos and further combined with an antigenic peptide through a flexible linker to the MHC II alpha or MHC II beta chain. The MHC II molecule chains can be changed by substitution of single or by cohorts of native amino acids, or by inserts, or deletions to enhance or impair the functions attributed to said molecule. Under circumstances where the MHC II alpha-chain and MHC II beta-chain have been fused, to form one subunit, the “MHC Class II molecule” can comprise only 1 subunit or 2 subunits if antigenic peptide is also included.

MHC Class II like molecules (including non-classical MHC Class II molecules) include HLA DM, HLA DO, I-A beta2, and I-E beta2.

“MHC complexes”, “MHC molecules” and “MHC constructs” are used interchangeably herein, and—if not further specified—comprises MHCs loaded with or bound to peptides as well as empty MHCs (not loaded with peptides).

MHC-peptide complex defines any MHC I and/or MHC II molecule combined with antigenic peptide.

A “peptide free MHC Class I molecule” is used interchangeably herein with “peptide free MHC I molecule” and as used everywhere herein is meant to be a MHC Class I molecule as defined above with no peptide.

A “peptide free MHC Class II molecule” is used interchangeably herein with “peptide free MHC II molecule” and as used everywhere herein is meant to be a MHC Class II molecule as defined above with no peptide.

Such peptide free MHC Class I and II molecules are also called “empty” MHC Class I and II molecules.

The MHC molecule may suitably be a vertebrate MHC molecule such as a human, a mouse, a rat, a porcine, a bovine or an avian MHC molecule. Such MHC complexes from different species have different names. E.g. in humans, MHC complexes are denoted HLA. The person skilled in the art will readily know the name of the MHC complexes from various species.

In general, the term “MHC molecule” is intended to include all alleles. By way of example, in humans e.g. HLA A, HLA B, HLA C, HLA D, HLA E, HLA F, HLA G, HLA H, HLA DR, HLA DQ and HLA DP alleles are of interestshall be included, and in the mouse system, H-2 alleles are of interestshall be included. Likewise, in the rat system RT1-alleles, in the porcine system SLA-alleles, in the bovine system BoLA, in the avian system e.g. chicken—B alleles, are of interestshall be included.

By the terms “MHC complexes” and “MHC multimers” as used herein are meant such complexes and multimers thereof, which are capable of performing at least one of the functions attributed to said complex or multimer. The terms include both classical and non-classical MHC complexes. The meaning of “classical” and “non-classical” in connection with MHC complexes is well known to the person skilled in the art. Non-classical MHC complexes are subgroups of MHC-like complexes. The term “MHC complex” includes MHC Class I molecules, MHC Class II molecules, as well as MHC-like molecules (both Class I and Class II), including the subgroup non-classical MHC Class I and Class II molecules.

MHC multimer: The terms MHC multimer, MHC-multimer, MHCmer and MHC′mer herein are used interchangeably, to denote a complex comprising more than one MHC-complex and/or MHC-peptide complex, held together by covalent or non-covalent bonds. In one embodiment a MHC multimer comprises 2 copies (dimer), 3 copies (trimer), 4 copies (tetramer), 5 copies, (pentamer), 6 copies (hexamer), 7 copies (heptamer), 8 copies (octamer), 9 copies (nonamer), 10 copies (decamer), 11 copies, 12 copies, 13 copies, 14 copies, 15 copies, 16 copies, 17 copies, 18 copies, 19 copies or 20 copies,

Monoclonal antibodies: Monoclonal antibodies, as used herein, are antibodies that are identical because they were produced by one type of immune cell and are all clones of a single parent cell.

Monovalent antibodies: The antibodies in the present invention can be monovalent antibodies. Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, one method involves recombinant expression of immunoglobulin light chain and modified heavy chain. The heavy chain is truncated generally at any point in the Fc region so as to prevent heavy chain crosslinking. Alternatively, the relevant cysteine residues are substituted with another amino acid residue or are deleted so as to prevent crosslinking. In vitro methods are also suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly, Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.

Multimerization domain: A multimerization domain is a type of linker according to the present invention. It may also be used as a synonym to linker. It defines a molecule, a complex of molecules, or a solid support, to which one or more binding molecules, such as MHC or MHC-peptide complexes, can be attached. A multimerization domain consist of one or more carriers and/or one or more scaffolds and may also contain one or more scaffold molecules (or connectors) connecting carrier to scaffold, carrier to carrier, scaffold to scaffold. The multimerization domain may also contain one or more scaffold molecules that can be used for attachment of binding molecules and/or other molecules to the multimerization domain. Multimerization domains thus comprises IgG, streptavidin, streptactin, micelles, cells, polymers, beads and other types of solid support, and small organic molecules carrying reactive groups or carrying chemical motifs that can bind binding molecules such as MHC complexes and other molecules.

Nanobodies: Nanobodies as used herein is a type of antibodies derived from camels, and are much smaller than traditional antibodies.

Neutralizing antibodies: neutralizing antibodies as used herein is an antibody which, on mixture with the homologous infectious agent, reduces the infectious titer.

NMR: NMR (Nuclear magnetic resonance), as used herein, is a physical phenomenon based upon the quantum mechanical magnetic properties of an atom's nucleus. NMR refers to a family of scientific methods that exploit nuclear magnetic resonance to study molecules.

Non-covalent: The term non-covalent bond as used herein is a type of chemical bond that does not involve the sharing of pairs of electrons, but rather involves more dispersed variations of electromagnetic interactions.

Nucleic acid duplex: A nucleic acid is a complex, high-molecular-weight biochemical macromolecule composed of nucleotide chains that convey genetic information. The most common nucleic acids are deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) and ribonucleic acid (RNA).

Nucleophilic: a nucleophile, as used herein, is a reagent that forms a chemical bond to its reaction partner (the electrophile) by donating both bonding electrons.

“One or more” as used everywhere herein is intended to include one and a plurality i.e. more than one.

Pegylated: pegylated, as used herein, is conjugation of Polyethylene glycol (PEG) to proteins.

Peptide or protein: Any molecule composed of at least two amino acids. Peptide normally refers to smaller molecules of up to around 30 amino acids and protein to larger molecules containing more amino acids.

Phosphorylated; phosphorylated, as used herein, is the addition of a phosphate (PO₄) group to a protein molecule or a small molecule.

PNA: PNA (Peptide nucleic acid) as used herein is a chemical similar to DNA or RNA. DNA and RNA have a deoxyribose and ribose sugar backbone, respectively, whereas PNA's backbone is composed of repeating N-(2-aminoethyl)-glycine units linked by peptide bonds. The various purine and pyrimidine bases are linked to the backbone by methylene carbonyl bonds. PNAs are depicted like peptides, with the N-terminus at the first (left) position and the C-terminus at the right.

“A plurality” as used everywhere herein should be interpreted as two or more.

This applies i.a. to the MHC complex and the binding entity. When a plurality of MHC complexes is attached to the multimerization domain, such as a scaffold or a carrier molecule, the number of MHC complexes need only be limited by the capacity of the multimerization domain.

Polyclonal antibodies: a polyclonal antibody as used herein is an antibody that is derived from different B-cell lines. They are a mixture of immunoglobulin molecules secreted against a specific antigen, each recognising a different epitope.

Polymer: the term polymer as used herein is defined as a compound composed of repeating structural units, or monomers, connected by covalent chemical bonds.

Polypeptide: Peptides are the family of short molecules formed from the linking, in a defined order, of various a-amino acids. The link between one amino acid residue and the next is an amide bond and is sometimes referred to as a peptide bond. Longer peptides are referred to as proteins or polypeptide.

Polysaccharide: The term polysaccharide as used herein is defined as polymers made up of many monosaccharides joined together by glycosidic linkages.

Radicals: radicals, as used herein, are atomic or molecular species with unpaired electrons on an otherwise open shell configuration. These unpaired electrons are usually highly reactive, so radicals are likely to take part in chemical reactions.

Radioactivity: Radioactive decay is the process in which an unstable atomic nucleus loses energy by emitting radiation in the form of particles or electromagnetic waves. RNA: RNA (Ribonucleic acid) as used herein is a nucleic acid polymer consisting of nucleotide monomers that plays several important roles in the processes that translate genetic information from deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) into protein products.

RNA: RNA (Ribonucleic acid) as used herein is a nucleic acid polymer consisting of nucleotide monomers that plays several important roles in the processes that translate genetic information from deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) into protein products

Scaffold: A scaffold is typically an organic molecule carrying reactive groups, capable of reacting with reactive groups on a MHC- or MHC-peptide complex. Particularly small organic molecules of cyclic structure (e.g. functionalized cycloalkanes or functionalized aromatic ring structures) are termed scaffolds. Scaffold and carrier are used interchangeably herein where scaffold typically refers to smaller molecules of a multimerization domain and carrier typically refers to larger molecule and/or cell like structures. Both scaffold, carrier and multimerization domain are types of linkers according to the present invention.

Sequencing. In the present aspect it is understood that sequencing encompasses all types of sequencing of a given nucleic acid sequence, including also e.g. deep-sequencing or next-generation sequencing, in which amplified barcode sequences of a nucleic acid label (the PCR product) is sequenced a large number of repetitive time (number of total reads, e.g. 100.000 s of reads). The number of reads for the individual barcode sequence will relate to their quantitative presence in the amplification product, which again represents their quantitative presence before amplification, since all DNA-barcodes have similar amplification properties. Thus, the number of reads for a specific barcode sequence compared to the total number of reads will correlate to the presence of antigen responsive cells in the test-sample.

Staining: In this invention staining means specific or unspecific labelling of cells by binding labeled molecules to defined proteins or other structures on the surface of cells or inside cells. The cells are either in suspension or part of a tissue. The labeled molecules can be MHC multimers, antibodies or similar molecules capable of binding specific structures on the surface of cells.

Streptavidin: Streptavidin as used herein is a tetrameric protein purified from the bacterium Streptomyces avidinii. Streptavidin is widely use in molecular biology through its extraordinarily strong affinity for biotin.

Sugar: Sugars as used herein include monosaccharides, disaccharides, trisaccharides and the oligosaccharides—comprising 1, 2, 3, and 4 or more monosaccharide units respectively.

TCR: T-cell receptor

Therapy: Treatment of illness or disability

Vaccine: A vaccine is an antigenic preparation used to establish immunity to a disease or illness and thereby protect or cure the body from a specific disease or illness.

Vaccines are either prophylactic and prevent disease or therapeutic and treat disease. Vaccines may contain more than one type of antigen and is then called a combined vaccine.

Vaccination: The introduction of vaccine into the body of human or animals for the purpose of inducing immunity.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The present invention provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La). Said detection molecule can be used in various methods, such as detection methods as outlined herein.

The binding molecules of the invention are capable of specifically associating with, such as recognizing and/or binding to, a target entity or cell.

The present invention provides a means for detecting detection molecules capable of binding to—and/or bound to—individual cells or to a subset of cells. Alternatively, the present invention provides a means for detecting the presence and/or abundance of cells capable of binding to detection molecules.

The present invention is in one embodiment used for epitope discovery, analytical studies, diagnosis, and therapy, and may be used in vivo (e.g. in animals) or in vitro (e.g. in any kind of cell samples such as blood, synovial fluid or bone marrow).

The present invention is in one embodiment used to characterize cells for their ability to bind certain detection molecules. The present invention is in one embodiment used to detect the presence of certain cell types, identified by their detection molecule-binding pattern.

In another embodiment, the technology is used for T-cell epitope mapping, immune-recognition discovery, or measuring immune reactivity after vaccination or immune-related therapies.

Composition

It is an aspect of the present invention to provide a detection molecule comprising

-   -   a. a binding molecule (BM),     -   b. a linker (Li), and     -   c. a label (La).

The components of the detection molecule namely binding molecule, linker and label are defined herein elsewhere. It is understood that ‘a’ in the present context include at least one, or one or more, of each of said components. A binding molecule can thus be a monomeric or a multimeric binding molecule.

The present invention thus provides a detection molecule comprising at least one binding molecule (BM), at least one linker (Li) and at least one label (La).

It is understood that each component of the detection molecule, namely the binding molecule, the linker and the label, individually can be selected from any of the binding molecules, linkers and labels disclosed herein throughout. Thus, any combination of binding molecules, linkers and labels are encompassed within the present disclosure and invention.

It is also an aspect of the present invention to provide an entity-detection molecule complex, wherein said complex comprises

-   -   a. at least one detection molecule comprising a binding molecule         (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), and     -   b. at least one entity.

It is also an aspect of the present invention to provide a cell-detection molecule complex, wherein said complex comprises

-   -   c. at least one detection molecule comprising a binding molecule         (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), and     -   d. at least one cell.

In one embodiment the cell-detection molecule complexes comprises a cell, such as an immune cell, associated with or bound to a detection molecule having a binding molecule specific for the immune cell.

In one embodiment one or more components of the detection molecule; that is one or more of the binding molecule, the linker and the label are each as described in WO 2002/072631, WO 2009/106073 or WO 2009/003492, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

In a particular embodiment the detection molecule has one or more characteristics as the detection molecules described in, and/or is prepared as described in, WO 2009/003492; European Journal of Immunology, vol. 31, pp 32-38, January 2001 (Hansen et al); or Journal of Immunological Methods, vol. 241, issues 1-2, 31 Jul. 2000 (Le Doussal et al).

In an aspect of the present invention the label will serve as a specific label for identifying a given binding molecule.

In an aspect of the present invention the label, such as a nucleic acid label, will serve as a specific label for a given binding molecule, such as a MHC molecule or peptide-MHC molecule that is multimerized to form a MHC multimer.

In one embodiment the present invention provides a detection molecule comprising

-   -   a. a monomeric or a multimeric major histocompatibility complex         (MHC) molecule, such as a monomeric or multimeric peptide MHC         complex,     -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label.

In one embodiment the present invention provides a detection molecule comprising

-   -   a. a monomeric or a multimeric major histocompatibility complex         (MHC) molecule, such as a monomeric or multimeric peptide MHC         complex,     -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a peptide label.

In one embodiment the present invention provides a detection molecule comprising

-   -   a. an anti-target molecule capable of associating with,         recognizing and/or binding to a predetermined marker molecule         (or target) on a cell type, wherein said marker molecule is         specific for a certain cell type     -   b. a linker (Li) comprising a multimerization domain and         optionally one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label.

Anti-target molecules are defined in more detail herein below.

In one embodiment the present invention provides a detection molecule comprising

-   -   a. CD1, wherein said CD1 is selected from the group consisting         of CD1 CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d and CD1e,     -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label.

In one the linker of the detection molecule comprises a multimerization domain, such as a polysaccharide such as dextran, and optionally further comprises streptavidin or avidin whereby the binding molecule and/or the label comprises biotin.

In one embodiment the invention relates to a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) comprising

-   -   a. two or more MHC molecules linked by a backbone molecule         (linker); and     -   b. at least one nucleic acid molecule (label) linked to said         backbone, wherein said nucleic acid molecule comprises a central         stretch of nucleic acids (barcode region) designed to be         amplified by e.g. PCR.

In one embodiment the invention relates to a major histocompatibility complex (MHC) comprising

-   -   a. one MHC molecule     -   b. a backbone molecule (linker); and     -   c. at least one nucleic acid molecule (label) linked to said         backbone, wherein said nucleic acid molecule comprises a central         stretch of nucleic acids (barcode region) designed to be         amplified by e.g. PCR.

The invention provides a composition comprising one detection molecule, or one set of identical detection molecules.

Also provided is a composition comprising two or more different detection molecules, or two or more sets of different detection molecules, each detection molecule comprising at least one binding molecule (BM), at least one linker (Li) and at least one label (La) as defined herein,

wherein each of the two or more detection molecules, or two or more sets of detection molecules, comprises a label which is unique to and specific for the binding molecule of each of said two or more different detection molecules.

In one embodiment said composition comprising two or more different detection molecules, or two or more sets of different detection molecules, comprises 2 to 1,000,000 different detection molecules, such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 different detection molecules; for example 1-3, 3-5, 5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-35, 35-40, 40-50, 50-60, 60-70, 70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150, 150-175, 175-200, 200-250, 250-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000-1500, 1500-2000, 2000-3000, 3000-4000, 4000-5000, 5000-7500, 7500-10,000, 10,000-20,000, 20,000-50,000, 50,000-100,000, 100,000-200,000, 200,000-500,000, 500,000-1,000,000 different detection molecules, or sets of different detection molecules.

The term ‘different detection molecules’ as used herein means that one or more of the binding molecule and/or label of each of the two or more detection molecules, or two or more sets of detection molecules, are different. Thus, the different detection molecules have different binding specificities (targets) and/or have different labels.

Another embodiment of the present invention relates to a composition comprising a subset of multimeric major histocompatibility complexes (MHC's) according to the invention, wherein each set of MHC's has a different peptide decisive for T cell recognition and a unique “barcode” region in the nucleic acid label (such as a DNA molecule).

Ratio of Binding Molecule/Label

In one embodiment there is a one-to-one relation between the label and the binding molecule, i.e. only one specific label (e.g. a specific oligonucleotide sequence) is attached to a specific binding molecule (e.g. a specific antibody). In other words, identifying the label (e.g. by sequencing an oligonucleotide label) will unambiguously identify the binding molecule attached to the label.

In another embodiment there is a one-to-one relation between the label and a group of binding molecules, i.e. only one specific label (e.g. a specific oligonucleotide sequence) is attached to a specific set of binding molecules (e.g. twenty different antibodies). In other words, identifying the label (e.g. by sequencing an oligonucleotide label) will unambiguously identify the group of binding molecule that may be attached to the label; identifying the label, however, will not identify the specific binding molecule that is attached to this particular copy of the label.

In yet another embodiment there is a one-to-one relation between a group of labels and a group of binding molecules, i.e. the label chosen for a specific detection molecule is chosen from a set of labels (e.g. twenty different oligonucleotide sequences) and the binding molecule chosen for a specific detection molecule is chosen from a set of binding molecules (e.g. twenty different antibodies). In other words, identifying the label of a detection molecule (e.g. by sequencing an oligonucleotide label) will unambiguously identify the group of binding molecule that may be attached to the label; identifying the label, however, will not identify the specific binding molecule that is attached to this particular copy of the label.

In another embodiment there is a one-to-one relation between a group of labels and a binding molecule, i.e. the label chosen for a specific detection molecule is chosen from a set of labels (e.g. twenty different oligonucleotide sequences). In other words, identifying the label of a detection molecule (e.g. by sequencing an oligonucleotide label) will unambiguously identify the binding molecule attached to the label; identifying the binding molecule, however, will not identify the specific label that is attached to this particular copy of the label. In cases where a certain label itself binds to the cells (and thus might lead to the wrong conclusion that the attached binding molecule binds to the cell), using several labels to encode the same binding molecule will allow the operator to distinguish binding of the binding molecule from binding of the label to the cell. Using several labels for the same binding molecule, or using several binding molecules for the same label can thus be used as internal controls.

Label

The label comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is any molecule, atom or signal the identity of which can be found or determined by any means. The label of a detection molecule specifies the identity of the binding molecule that is linked to the label. The identity of the label can be determined by any appropriate method for the specific type of label.

In one embodiment there is provided a detection molecule comprising one or more binding molecules, one or more linkers, and one or more labels. The one or more labels may be connected with the other components of the detection molecule in any manner. In one embodiment, one or more labels are connected to the linker (or one of the linkers, or both or all of the multiple linkers) of the detection molecule. In one embodiment one or more labels are connected to the binding molecule (or one of the binding molecules, or both or all of the multiple binding molecules) of the detection molecule.

In one embodiment each detection molecule comprises one label. In another embodiment the detection molecule comprises two or more labels, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 labels. In one embodiment the detection molecule comprises 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, 7-8, 8-9, 9-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-40, 40-50, 50-75, 75-100, 100-150, 150-200, 200-250, 250-500, 500-750, 750-1000 labels.

In one embodiment each of said labels are identical to each other. In another embodiment each of said labels are different from each other. In yet another embodiment two or more of said labels are different with respect to each other.

In one embodiment the label linked to a given detection molecule is different from the label linked to other detection molecules used in the same assay.

In another embodiment the detection molecule comprises two different types of labels, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 different types of labels.

Labeling Molecules

Labelling molecules are molecules that can be detected in a certain analysis, i.e. the labelling molecules provide a signal detectable by the used method. Label and labelling molecules are used interchangeably herein.

The labelling molecule may be any labelling molecule suitable for direct or indirect detection. By the term “direct” is meant that the labelling molecule can be detected per se without the need for a secondary molecule, i.e. is a “primary” labelling molecule. By the term “indirect” is meant that the labelling molecule can be detected by using one or more “secondary” molecules, i.e. the detection is performed by the detection of the binding of the secondary molecule(s) to the primary molecule.

In one embodiment the labelling molecule is attached to the linker

In one embodiment the labelling molecule is attached to the binding molecule.

The labelling molecule in one embodiment comprises a suitable linker or ‘connector molecule’ for attachment to the linker. Linkers suitable for attachment to labelling molecules would be readily known by the person skilled in the art and as described elsewhere herein.

A label of the present invention is in one embodiment selected from the group consisting of polymers, nucleic acids, oligonucleotides, peptides, fluorescent labels, phosphorescent labels, enzyme labels, chemiluminescent labels, bioluminescent labels, haptens, antibodies, dyes, nanoparticle labels, elements, metal particles, heavy metal labels, isotope labels, radioisotopes, stable isotopes, chains of isotopes and single atoms.

Labels may be organic or inorganic molecules or particles.

Organic molecules labels include ribonucleic acids (e.g. RNA, DNA or unnatural DNA, RNA, and XNA (e.g. PNA, LNA, GNA, TNA) and mononucleotides, peptides and other polyamides (e.g. peptides comprising p-amino acid residues), lipids, carbohydrates, amino acids, and many other molecules.

Inorganic molecule labels include the elements (e.g. Lanthanum, Cerium, Praseodymium, Neodymium, Promethium, Samarium, Europium, Gadolinium, Terbium, Dysprosium, and the rest of the elements known). The elements may coupled to the linker by way of chelates that coordinate the ions (interact non-covalently with the ions), where the chelates are then linked to the linker (in cases such as Gadolinium where the element can exist on ionic form), or the element may be contained in micelles. For some applications, rare elements are particularly favorable. For other applications heavy metals are particularly favorable.

Isotopes may also be used as labels (e.g. Carbon isotopes ¹²C, ¹³C and ¹⁴C). Furthermore, label molecules comprising combinations of different isotopes and elements may also be used.

Particle labels include quantum dots, nanoparticles, micelles (e.g. comprising different fluorophores internally or in its membrane) and other particulate structures.

A molecule label may have a molecular weight of between 1 Da and several million Da. In some instances a very low molecular weight is preferred, such as a molecular weight of 1-10 Da, 11-50 Da, 50-250 Da, or 251-500 Da. This may for example be the case when mass spectrometry is used to detect the identity of element labels (e.g. Gadolinium, Gd). In other cases a low molecular weight, e.g. 501-2000 Da, 2001-5000 Da, or 5001-10000 Da may be preferred. This may be the case when e.g. peptide labels are used, where the peptide label comprises around 10-40 amino acid residues. In yet other cases, a high molecular weight of the molecule label is practical, and the molecular weight of the molecule label may be 10001-50000 Da, 50001-200000 Da, or 200000-1000000 Da. This may be the case e.g. in cases where a ribonucleic acid label is used, where the coding region (also called the barcode region or barcode sequence) is of significant length (e.g. 10-20 nucleotides) and where it is practical to have flanking primer binding regions of each 10-20 nucleotides, plus other sequences of different practical use. The resulting oligonucleotide label may in these cases be 30-1000 nt long, corresponding to molecular weights of about 10000-600000 Da. Finally, multi-molecule structures, such as in cases where a number of different fluorescent proteins are ordered in an array by binding to specific regions in a template DNA, where the total labels thus comprises a long oligonucleotide to which is bound a number of proteins, and the total molecular weight of the label may thus be 50000-200000 Da, 200001-100000, or 1000001-10000000 Da.

In one embodiment the labels are fluorophores and other molecules that emit or absorb radiation. The fluorophores and other molecules emitting or absorbing radiation may be of organic or inorganic nature, and can be e.g. small molecules as well as large proteins. In one embodiment, it is particularly favorable if all the fluorophores and other molecules that emit or absorp radiation are within the same narrow range of emission wavelength optimum, such as having wavelength optima in the range 1-10 nm, 11-30 nm, 31-100 nm, 101-200 nm, 201-300 nm, 301-400 nm, 401-500 nm, 501-600 nm, 601-700 nm, 701-800 nm, 800-900 nm, 901-1200 nm, 1201-1500 nm, or larger than 1500 nm. As an example, if the instrument has a narrow range of wavelengths that can be detected, it is advantageous that all labels fall within this range of detection. On the other hand, if the instrument used to detect the radiation emitted by the labels has a wide span of detectable wavelengths, it is desirable that the different labels used in an experiment fall in several of the above-mentioned ranges, as this will result in little overlap between emission of different labels, and therefore more accurate detection of relative abundance of the different labels of an experiment. Emitted radiation may be phosphorescence, luminescence, fluorescence and more.

The labelling compound may suitably be selected:

from fluorescent labels such as 5-(and 6)-carboxyfluorescein, 5- or 6-carboxy-fluorescein, 6-(fluorescein)-5-(and 6)-carboxamido hexanoic acid, fluorescein isothio-cyanate (FITC), rhodamine, tetramethylrhodamine, and dyes such as Cy2, Cy3, and Cy5, optionally substituted coumarin including AMCA, PerCP, phycobiliproteins including R-phycoerythrin (RPE) and allophycoerythrin (APC), Texas Red, Princeston Red, Green fluorescent protein (GFP) and analogues thereof, and conjugates of R-phycoerythrin or allophycoerythrin and e.g. Cy5 or Texas Red, and inorganic fluorescent labels based on semiconductor nanocrystals (like quantum dot and Qdot™ nanocrystals), and time-resolved fluorescent labels based on lanthanides like Eu3+ and Sm3+,

from haptens such as DNP, biotin, and digoxiginin,

from enzymatic labels such as horse radish peroxidase (HRP), alkaline phosphatase (AP), beta-galactosidase (GAL), glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, beta-N-acetyl-glucosaminidase, β-glucuronidase, invertase, Xanthine Oxidase, firefly luciferase and glucose oxidase (GO),

from luminiscence labels such as luminol, isoluminol, acridinium esters, 1,2-dioxetanes and pyridopyridazines,

from radioactivity labels such as incorporated isotopes of iodide, cobalt, selenium, tritium, and phosphor, and

from single atoms such as zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), magnesium (Mg), any of the lanthanides (Ln) including La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb and Lu; scandium (Sc) and yttrium (Y).

Different principles of labelling and detection exist, based on the specific property of the labelling molecule. Examples of different types of labelling are emission of radioactive radiation (radionuclide, isotopes), absorption of light (e.g. dyes, chromophores), emission of light after excitation (fluorescence from fluorochromes), NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance form paramagnetic molecules) and reflection of light (scatter from e.g. such as gold-, plastic- or glass-beads/particles of various sizes and shapes).

Alternatively, the labelling molecules can have an enzymatic activity, by which they catalyze a reaction between chemicals in the near environment of the labelling molecules, producing a signal, which include production of light (chemi-luminescence), precipitation of chromophor dyes, or precipitates that can be detected by an additional layer of detection molecules. The enzymatic product can deposit at the location of the enzyme or, in a cell based analysis system, react with the membrane of the cell or diffuse into the cell to which it is attached. Examples of labelling molecules and associated detection principles are shown in the table below.

Labelling substance Effect Assay-principle Fluorochromes emission of light having a ^(¤)Photometry, Microscopy, specific spectra spectroscopy PMT, photographic film, CCD's (Color-Capture Device or Charge-coupled device). Radionuclide irradiation, α, β or gamma Scintillation counting, GM- □ rays tube, photographic film, excitation of phosphor-imager screen Enzyme; catalysis of H₂O₂ reduction ^(¤)Photometry, Microscopy, HRP, (horse reddish using luminol as Oxygen spectroscopy peroxidase), acceptor, resulting in oxidized PMT, photographic film, peroxidases in general luminal + light CCD's (Colour-Capture catalysis of H₂O₂ reduction Device or Charge-coupled using a soluble dye, or device), molecule containing a hapten, Secondary label linked such as a biotin residue as antibody Oxygen acceptor, resulting in precipitation. The habten can be recognized by a detection molecule. Particles; gold, polystyrene Change of scatter, reflection Microscopy, cytometry, beads, pollen and other and transparency of the electron microscopy particles associated entity PMT's, light detecting devices, flowcytometry scatter AP (Alkaline Phosphatase) Catalyze a chemical ^(¤)Photometry, Microscopy, conversion of a non- spectroscopy detectable to a precipitated Secondary label linked detectable molecule, such as antibody a dye or a hapten Ionophores or chelating Change in absorption and ^(¤)Photometry, Cytometry, chemical compounds binding emission spectrums when spectroscopy to specific ions, e.g. Ca²⁺ binding. Change in intensity Lanthanides Fluorescence ^(¤)photometry, cytometry, Phosphorescence spectroscopy Paramagnetic NMR (Nuclear magnetic resonance) DNA fluorescing stains Propidium iodide ^(¤)Photometry, cytometry, Hoechst stain spectroscopy DAPI AMC DraQ5 ™ Acridine orange 7-AAD Nucleic acid label Sequence, mass PCR amplification, sequening Mass spec Gel electrophoresis, PAGE QPCR Peptide label Sequence, mass Sequencing Labelling substance Effect Assay-principle Mass spec Gel electrophoresis, PAGE

Labelling molecules can be attached to a given binding molecule by covalent linkage as described for attachment of binding molecules to multimerization domains elsewhere herein. The attachment can be directly between reactive groups in the labelling molecule and reactive groups in the binding molecule or the attachment can be through a linker covalently attached to labelling molecule and binding molecule. When labelling MHC multimers the label can be attached either to the MHC complex (heavy chain, β2m or peptide) or to the multimerization domain.

In particular,

one or more labelling molecules may be attached to the carrier molecule, or one or more labelling molecules may be attached to one or more of the scaffolds, or one or more labelling compounds may be attached to one or more of the binding molecules, or one or more labelling compounds may be attached to the carrier molecule and/or one or more of the scaffolds and/or one or more of the binding molecules.

A single labelling molecule does not always generate sufficient signal intensity. The signal intensity can be improved by assembling single label molecules into large multi-labelling compounds, containing two or more label residues. Generation of multi-label compounds can be achieved by covalent or non-covalent, association of labelling molecules with a major structural molecule. Examples of such structures are synthetic or natural polymers (e.g. dextramers), proteins (e.g. streptavidin), or polymers. The labelling molecules in a multi-labelling compound can all be of the same type or can be a mixture of different labelling molecules.

Detection principles can be applied to flow cytometry, stationary cytometry, and batch-based analysis. Most batch-based approaches can use any of the labelling substances depending on the purpose of the assay. Flow cytometry primarily employs fluorescence, whereas stationary cytometry primarily employs light absorption, e.g. dyes or chromophore deposit from enzymatic activity.

In flow cytometry the typical label is detected by its fluorescence. Most often a positive detection is based on the presence of light from a single fluorochrome, but in other techniques the signal is detected by a shift in wavelength of emitted light; as in FRET based techniques, where the exited fluorochrome transfer its energy to an adjacent bound fluorochrome that emits light, or when using Ca²⁺ chelating fluorescent props, which change the emission (and absorption) spectra upon binding to calcium. Preferable labelling molecules employed in flowcytometry are illustrated in th etables and described in the following.

Simple fluorescent labels:

-   -   Fluor dyes, Pacific BIue™, Pacific Orange™, Cascade Yellow™,     -   AlexaFluor®(AF);         -   AF405, AF488, AF500, AF514, AF532, AF546, AF555, AF568,             AF594, AF610, AF633, AF635, AF647, AF680, AF700, AF710,             AF750, AF800     -   Quantum Dot based dyes, QDot® Nanocrystals (Invitrogen,         MolecularProbs)         -   Qdot®525, Qdot®565, Qdot®585, Qdot®605, Qdot®655, Qdot®705,             Qdot®800     -   DyLight™ Dyes (Pierce) (DL);         -   DL549, DL649, DL680, DL800     -   Fluorescein (Flu) or any derivate of that, ex. FITC     -   Cy-Dyes         -   Cy2, Cy3, Cy3.5, Cy5, Cy5.5, Cy7     -   Fluorescent Proteins;         -   RPE, PerCp, APC         -   Green fluorescent proteins;             -   GFP and GFP-derived mutant proteins; BFP, CFP, YFP,                 DsRed, T1, Dimer2, mRFP1, MBanana, mOrange, dTomato,                 tdTomato, mTangerine, mStrawberry, mCherry     -   Tandem dyes:         -   RPE-Cy5, RPE-Cy5.5, RPE-Cy7, RPE-AlexaFluor® tandem             conjugates; RPE-Alexa610, RPE-TxRed         -   APC-Aleca600, APC-Alexa610, APC-Alexa750, APC-Cy5, APC-Cy5.5     -   Ionophors; ion chelating fluorescent props         -   Props that change wavelength when binding a specific ion,             such as Calcium         -   Props that change intensity when binding to a specific ion,             such as Calcium     -   Combinations of fluorochromes on the same marker. Thus, the         marker is not identified by a single fluorochrome but by a code         of identification being a specific combination of fluorochromes,         as well as inter related ratio of intensities.     -   Example: Antibody Ab1 and Ab2, are conjugated to both. FITC and         BP but Ab1 have 1 FITC to 1 BP whereas Ab2 have 2 FITC to 1 BP.         Each antibodymay then be identified individually by the relative         intensity of each fluorochrome. Any such combinations of n         fluorochromes with m different ratios can be generated.

Examples of preferable fluorochromes: Excitation Emission Fluorofor/Fluorochrome nm nm 2-(4′-maleimidylanilino)naphthalene-6- 322 417 sulfonic acid, sodium salt 5-((((2-iodoacetyl)amino)ethyl)amino) 336 490 naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid Pyrene-1-butanoic acid 340 376 AlexaFluor 350 (7-amino-6-sulfonic acid-4- 346 442 methyl coumarin-3-acetic acid) AMCA (7-amino-4-methyl coumarin-3- 353 442 acetic acid) 7-hydroxy-4-methyl coumarin-3-acetic acid 360 455 Marina Blue (6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxy-4- 362 459 methyl coumarin-3-acetic acid) 7-dimethylamino-coumarin-4-acetic acid 370 459 Fluorescamin-N-butyl amine adduct 380 464 7-hydroxy-coumarine-3-carboxylic acid 386 448 CascadeBlue (pyrene-trisulphonic acid 396 410 acetyl azide) Cascade Yellow 409 558 Pacific Blue (6,8 difluoro-7-hydroxy 416 451 coumarin-3-carboxylic acid) 7-diethylamino-coumarin-3-carboxylic acid 420 468 N-(((4-azidobenzoyl)amino)ethyl)-4- 426 534 amino-3,6-disulfo-1,8-naphthalimide, dipotassium salt Alexa Fluor 430 434 539 3-perylenedodecanoic acid 440 448 8-hydroxypyrene-1,3,6-trisulfonic acid, 454 511 trisodium salt 12-(N-(7-nitrobenz-2-oxa-1,3-diazol-4- 467 536 yl)amino)dodecanoic acid N,N′-dimethyl-N-(iodoacetyl)-N′-(7- 478 541 nitrobenz-2-oxa-1,3-diazol-4- yl)ethylenediamine Oregon Green 488 (difluoro carboxy 488 518 fluorescein) 5-iodoacetamidofluorescein 492 515 Propidium iodide-DNA adduct 493 636 Carboxy fluorescein 495 519 Examples of preferable fluorochrome families: Fluorochrome family Example fluorochrome AlexaFluor ®(AF) AF ®350, AF405, AF430, AF488, AF500, AF514, AF532, AF546, AF555, AF568, AF594, AF610, AF633, AF635, AF647, AF680, AF700, AF710, AF750, AF800 Quantum Dot (Qdot ®) Qdot ®525, Qdot ®565, Qdot ®585, Qdot ®605, based dyes Qdot ®655, Qdot ®705, Qdot ®800 DyLight ™ Dyes (DL) DL549, DL649, DL680, DL800 Small fluorescing dyes FITC, Pacific Blue ™, Pacific Orange ™, Cascade Yellow ™, Marina blue ™, DSred, DSred-2, 7-AAD, TO- Pro-3, Cy-Dyes Cy2, Cy3, Cy3.5, Cy5, Cy5.5, Cy7 Phycobili Proteins: R-Phycoerythrin (RPE), PerCP, Allophycocyanin (APC), B-Phycoerythrin, C-Phycocyanin Fluorescent Proteins (E)GFP and GFP ((enhanced) green fluorescent protein) derived mutant proteins; BFP, CFP, YFP, DsRed, T1, Dimer2, mRFP1, MBanana, mOrange, dTomato, tdTomato, mTangerine, mStrawberry, mCherry Tandem dyes with RPE RPE-Cy5, RPE-Cy5.5, RPE-Cy7, RPE-AlexaFluor ® tandem conjugates; RPE-Alexa610, RPE-TxRed Tandem dyes with APC APC-Aleca600, APC-Alexa610, APC-Alexa750, APC- Cy5, APC-Cy5.5 Calcium dyes Indo-1-Ca2+ Indo-2-Ca2+

Preferable labelling molecules employed in stationary cytometry and IHC:

-   -   Enzymatic labelling:         -   Horse radish peroxidase; reduces peroxides (H₂O₂), and the             signal is generated by the Oxygen acceptor when being             oxidized.             -   Precipitating dyes; Dyes that when they arereduced they                 are soluble, and precipitate when oxidized, generating a                 coloured deposit at the site of the reaction.             -   Precipitating agent, carrying a chemical residue, a                 hapten, for second layer binding of binding molecules,                 for amplification of the primary signal.             -   Luminol reaction, generating a light signal at the site                 of reaction.         -   Other enzymes, such as Alkaline Phosphatase, capable of             converting a chemical compound from a non-detectable             molecule to a precipitated detectable molecule, which can be             coloured, or carries a hapten as described above.     -   Fluorescent labels; as those described for Flow cytometry are         likewise important for used in stationary cytometry, such as in         fluorescent microscopy.

Examples of preferable labels for stationary cytometry: Enzyme substrate, Precipitate or Oxygen acceptor Residue, hapten* for Binding Chromogen/ secondary detection partner to Label precipitating agent layer hapten HRP diaminobenzidine Colored precipitate — (DAB) HRP 3-amino-9-ethyl- Colored precipitate — carbazole (AEC+) AP Fast red dye Red precipitate — HRP biotinyl tyramide Exposed Biotin Streptavidin, residue avidine HRP fluorescein tyramide Exposed Fluorescein Anti-Fluorecein residue Antibody “Enzyme” Substrate that when Primary label; being a Secondary reacted precipitate dye, label in case chemiluminescence's, the primary or exposure of a label is a hapten hapten

In one embodiment the label comprises a connector molecule, which connector molecule is able to interact with a component on the linker and/or binding molecule of the detection molecule. In one embodiment the connector molecule is biotin or avidin. In one embodiment the linker comprises streptavidin to which the label binds via its biotin or avidin connector molecule.

Nucleic Acid Label

In one embodiment the detection molecule comprises at least one nucleic acid label, such as a nucleotide label, for example an oligonucleotide label.

In a preferred embodiment the label is an oligonucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, the label of the detection molecule is a DNA oligonucleotide (DNA label).

The terms nucleic acid label, nucleic acid molecule, nucleotide label, oligonucleotide label, DNA molecule, DNA label, DNA tag, DNA oligonucleotides and nucleic acid component may be used interchangeably herein.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises one or more of the following components:

-   -   barcode region,     -   5′ first primer region (forward)     -   3′ second primer region (reverse),     -   random nucleotide region,     -   connector molecule     -   stability-increasing components     -   short nucleotide linkers in between any of the above-mentioned         components     -   adaptors for sequencing     -   annealing region

Preferably the nucleic acid label comprises at least a barcode region (i.e. barcode sequence). A barcode region comprises a sequence of consecutive nucleic acids.

A nucleic acid label of the present invention comprises a number of consecutive nucleic acids. The nucleic acid can be any type of nucleic acid or modifications thereof, naturally occurring or synthetically made (artificial nucleic acids).

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises or consists of DNA.

In another embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises or consists of RNA.

In yet another embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises or consists of artificial nucleic acids or Xeno nucleic acid (XNA).

Artificial nucleic acid analogs have been designed and synthesized by chemists, and include peptide nucleic acid (PNA), morpholino- and locked nucleic acid (LNA), as well as glycol nucleic acid (GNA), threose nucleic acid (TNA), HNA and CeNA. Each of these is distinguished from naturally occurring DNA or RNA by changes to the backbone of the molecule.

In yet another embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises or consists of one or more of XNA, PNA, LNA, TNA, GNA, HNA and CeNA,

In a further embodiment the at least one nucleic acid molecule comprises or consists of DNA, RNA, and/or artificial nucleotides such as PLA or LNA. Preferably DNA, but other nucleotides may be included to e.g. increase stability.

In a preferred embodiment the oligonucletide used in the invention is a natural oligonucleotide such as DNA or RNA, or it may be PNA, LNA, or another type of unnatural oligonucleotide. The oligonucletides may be modified on the base entity, the sugar entity, or in the linker connecting the individual nucleotides.

The length of the nucleic acid molecule may also vary. Thus, in one embodiment the at least one nucleic acid molecule has a length in the range 20-100 nucleotides, such as 30-100, such as 30-80, such as 30-50 nucleotides.

In one embodiment the label is an oligonucleotide of length 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31-35, 36-50, 51-100, or more than 100 nucleotides.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises 1 to 1,000,000 nucleic acids, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 nucleic acids; for example 1-3, 3-5, 5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-35, 35-40, 40-50, 50-60, 60-70, 70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150, 150-175, 175-200, 200-250, 250-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000-1500, 1500-2000, 2000-3000, 3000-4000, 4000-5000, 5000-7500, 7500-10,000, 10,000-100,000, 100,000-1,000,000 nucleic acids.

A nucleic acid label of the present invention as minimum comprises a number of consecutive nucleic acids. The sequence of the nucleic acids serves as a code that can be identified, such as amplified and/or sequenced.

The identifiable consecutive nucleic acids, or the identifiable sequence, of the nucleic acid label are denoted a ‘barcode’, ‘barcode region’, ‘nucleic acid barcode’, ‘unique sequence’, ‘unique nucleotide sequence’ and ‘coding sequence’ herein (used interchangably). The barcode region comprises of a number of consecutive nucleic acids making up a nucleic acid sequence.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises a central stretch of nucleic acids (barcode region) designed to be amplified by e.g. PCR.

In one embodiment, a nucleic acid barcode is a unique oligo-nucleotide sequence ranging for 10 to more than 50 nucleotides. In this embodiment, the barcode has shared amplification sequences in the 3′ and 5′ ends, and a unique sequence in the middle. This unique sequence can be revealed by sequencing and can serve as a specific barcode for a given binding molecule.

The unique sequence, the barcode, is composed of a series of nucleotides that together forms a sequence (series of nucleotides) that can be specifically identified based on its composition. This sequence composition enables barcode #1 to be distinguishable from barcode #2, #3, #4 etc, up to more than 100.000 barcodes, based solely on the unique sequence of each barcode. The complete nucleotide barcode may also be composed of a combination of series of unique nucleotide sequences linked to each other. The series of unique sequences will together assign the barcode.

In one embodiment, each unique nucleotide sequence (barcode) holds 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31-35, 36-50, 51-100, or more than 100 nucleotides (nucleic acids).

In a preferred embodiment the label is an oligonucleotide, where the unique sequence has a length of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31-35, 36-50, 51-100, or more than 100 nucleotides. In one embodiment the unique sequence is shorter than the total length of the label.

In one embodiment the barcode region comprises or consists of 2-5, 5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-40, 40-45, 45-50, 50-60, 60-70, 70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150, 150-175, 175-200, 200-250, 250-300, 300-400, 400-500 nucleic acids.

The unique nucleotide sequence (barcode) is solely used as an identification tag for the molecular interaction between the binding molecule and its target. The unique nucleotide sequences preferably are not identical to any natural occurring DNA sequence, although sequence similarities or identities may occur.

Each nucleic acid barcode should hold sufficient difference from the additional barcodes in a given experiment to allow specific identification of a given barcode, distinguishable from the others.

The nucleic acid component (preferably DNA) has a special structure. Thus, in an embodiment the at least one nucleic acid molecule (label) is composed of at least a 5′ first primer region, a central region (barcode region), and a 3′ second primer region. In this way the central region (the barcode region) can be amplified by a primer set.

The coupling of the nucleic acid molecule to the backbone may also vary. Thus, in one embodiment the at least one nucleic acid molecule is linked to said backbone via a streptavidin-biotin binding and/or streptavidin-avidin binding. Other coupling moieties may also be used.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises a connector molecule, which connector molecule is able to interact with a component on the linker and/or binding molecule of the detection molecule. In one embodiment the connector molecule is biotin or avidin. In one embodiment the linker comprises streptavidin to which the label binds via its biotin or avidin connector molecule.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises a random nucleotide region. This random nt region is a potential tool for detecting label contaminants. A random nt region of the invention in one embodiment comprises from 3-20 nucleotides, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 nt.

In some embodiments, the different labels used in an experiment possess the same amplification properties and share common primer regions: Common primer regions together with shared amplification properties will ensure that all labels that are present after cellular interaction and sorting are amplified equally whereby no sequences will be biased due to the sequencing reaction.

With identical primer regions on differing labels there is an inherent risk of contaminating one label with another—especially following amplification reactions. To be able to trace potential contaminants a short ‘random nucleotide region’ can be included in the nucleic acid label. Since the random nucleotide region is unique for each label, it will be possible to inspect the sequencing data and see whether numerous reads of a given label is present. I.e. the random nucleotide region is a clonality control region. In one embodiment the random nucleotide region consist of 2-20 nucleic acids; such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 nucleic acids. A random nucleotide region consisting of 6 nucleotides may be denoted ‘N6’ herein, and so forth.

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises one or more stability-increasing components (such as HEG or TEG)

The label is preferably stable when mixing with cells: as this may expose the label to nuclease digestion. A measure to minimize this may be to add modifications in the form of hexaethylene glycol (HEG) or TEG at one or both ends of the oligonucleotide label.

Additionally stability can be accounted for in the buffers applied by adding constituents that exert a protective effect towards the oligo-nucleotides, e.g herring DNA and EDTA

In one embodiment the nucleic acid label comprises a sample identifying sequence. To be able to analyze more than a single sample in each sequencing reaction the nucleic acid labels may be appointed an additional recognition feature, namely a sample identifying sequence. The sample identifying sequence is not a part of the initial design of the label, but will be appointed after cellular interaction and sorting via primers in a PCR—thus all cells originating from the same sample, will have the same sample identification sequence. In one embodiment the sample identifying sequence is a short sequence, consisting of 2-20 nucleic acids; such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 nucleic acids. The sample identifying sequence may be attached to a primer, such as the forward primer.

The nucleic acid label is in one embodiment a ‘1 oligo system’ comprising a forward primer, a barcode region and a reverse primer.

The nucleic acid label is in one embodiment a ‘2 oligo system’ with two sequences, the first comprising a forward primer, a barcode region and a annealing region; and the second comprising an annealing region, a barcode region and a reverse primer.

Peptide Label

In one embodiment the label, or the coding label, is a peptide label comprising a stretch of consecutive amino acid residues. This is the ‘coding region’ the identity of which can be determined.

In one embodiment the peptide label comprises or consists of a defined number of consecutive amino acids. It follows that the nucleic acid label in one embodiment comprises 2 or more consecutive amino acids, such as 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, 7-8, 8-9, 9-10, 10-11, 11-12, 12-13, 13-14, 14-15, 15-16, 16-17, 17-18, 18-19, 19-20, 20-21, 21-22, 22-23, 23-24, 24-25, 25-26, 26-27, 27-28, 28-29, 29-30, 30-31, 31-32, 32-33, 33-34, 34-35, 35-36, 36-37, 37-38, 38-39, 39-40, 40-45, 45-50, 50-55, 55-60, 60-65, 65-70,70-75, 75-80, 80-85, 85-90, 90-95, 95-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150, 150-160, 160-170,170-180, 180-190, 190-200, 200-225, 225-250, 250-275, 275-300, 300-350, 350-400, 400-450, 450-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000-1500, 1500-2000, or more than 2000, consecutive amino acids.

In one embodiment the peptide label comprises a stretch of consecutive amino acid residues (coding region) and a protease cleavage site. The protease cleavage site is preferably located proximal to the linker that connects the label to the binding molecule.

When the detection molecule is brought into proximity of a protease, the peptide label is cleaved and the coding region released from the detection molecule. The sample cells may be precipitated and the supernatant can be analysed by mass spectrometry to determine the identity and amount of the labels that was released.

Proteases capable of cleaving the peptide labels may be coated on the surface of sample cells, for example by adding antibody-protease conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface structure.

In one embodiment the peptide label comprises natural (or standard) amino acids. In another embodiment the peptide label comprises non-naturally occurring amino acids (non-proteinogenic or non-standard). In one embodiment the peptide label comprises standard and non-standard amino acids.

A natural amino acid is a naturally occurring amino acid existing in nature and being naturally incorporated into polypeptides (proteinogenic). They consist of the 20 genetically encoded amino acids Ala, Arg, Asn, Asp, Cys, Gln, Glu, Gly, His, Ile, Leu, Lys, Met, Phe, Pro, Ser, Tyr, Thr, Trp, Val, and 2 which are incorporated into proteins by unique synthetic mechanisms: Sec (selenocysteine, or U) and Pyl (pyrrolysine, 0). These are all L-stereoisomers.

Aside from the 22 natural or standard amino acids, there are many other non-naturally occurring amino acids (non-proteinogenic or non-standard). They are either not found in proteins, or are not produced directly and in isolation by standard cellular machinery. Non-standard amino acids are usually formed through modifications to standard amino acids, such as post-translational modifications.

Any amino acids according to the present invention may be in the L- or D-configuration.

The standard and/or non-standard amino acids may be linked by peptide bonds to form a linear peptide chain.

The term peptide also embraces post-translational modifications introduced by chemical or enzyme-catalyzed reactions, as are known in the art. Also, functional equivalents may comprise chemical modifications such as ubiquitination, labeling (e.g., with radionuclides, various enzymes, etc.), pegylation (derivatization with polyethylene glycol), or by insertion (or substitution by chemical synthesis) of amino acids (amino acids) which do not normally occur in human proteins.

Protein post-translational modification (PTM) increases the functional diversity of the proteome by the covalent addition of functional groups or proteins, proteolytic cleavage of regulatory subunits or degradation of entire proteins. These modifications include phosphorylation, glycosylation, ubiquitination, nitrosylation, methylation, acetylation, lipidation (C-terminal glycosyl phosphatidylinositol (GPI) anchor, N-terminal myristoylation, S-myristoylation, S-prenylation), amidation, and proteolysis and influence almost all aspects of normal cell biology and pathogenesis.

Sterically similar compounds may be formulated to mimic the key portions of the peptide structure and that such compounds may also be used in the same manner as the peptides of the invention. This may be achieved by techniques of modelling and chemical designing known to those of skill in the art. For example, esterification and other alkylations may be employed to modify the amino terminus of e.g a di-arginine peptide backbone, to mimic a tetra peptide structure. It will be understood that all such sterically similar constructs fall within the scope of the present invention.

Peptides with N-terminal alkylations and C-terminal esterifications are also encompassed within the present invention. Functional equivalents also comprise glycosylated and covalent or aggregative conjugates formed with the same molecules, including dimers or unrelated chemical moieties. Such functional equivalents are prepared by linkage of functionalities to groups which are found in fragment including at any one or both of the N- and C-termini, by means known in the art.

Binding Molecules

A binding molecule is a molecule that specifically associates covalently or non-covalently with a structure belonging to or associated with an entity in a sample. The defined structure in sample bound by a binding molecule is also called the target structure or target of the binding molecule. A typical target for a binding molecule is a ‘marker molecule’, which marker molecule is specific for a given cell or cell type.

Example binding molecule include but is not limited to proteins, antibodies (monoclonal or polyclonal, derived from any species e.g. man, mouse, rat, rabbit, pig or camel, monkey or may be recombinant antibodies), antibody fragments, MHC multimers (including but not limited to MHC dextramers, MHC tetramers, MHC Pentamers, cells expressing MHC molecules, MHC-peptide molecules covalently or non-covalently attached to beads, streptactin or other molecule structures), scaffold molecules, ligands, small organic molecules, nulceic acids (e.g. DNA, RNA, PNA), polysaccharides, other polymers, Aptamers including nucleic acid aptamers and peptide aptamers, affimers, beads, cells, living cells, dead cells, naturally occurring cells, genetic modified cells, hybridoma cells, gene transfected cells, cell like structures (e.g. liposomes, micelles), multicomponent complexes comprising 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more binding molecule subunits, and supramolecular structures, or other molecules, cells or substances able to bind defined structure in sample.

A binding molecule is useful for detection of a given defined structure in sample if the binding molecule binds the defined structure with a certain affinity. In order to be specific the binding molecule has to have a binding affinity that is higher than the binding molecules binding affinity for other structures in sample.

When the detection molecule comprises two or more binding molecules, the binding molecule may be referred to as a binding molecule multimer. When the detection molecule comprises two or more binding molecules, wherein the binding molecules are MHC molecules or MHC complexes, the MHC complexes may be referred to as a MHC multimer.

Typical defined structures or targets to which the binding molecule associate include but is not limited to: surface receptors on cells (e.g. TCR, CD molecules, growth receptors, MHC complexes, mannose binding receptor, transporter proteins), other structures on the surface of cells (e.g. lipids, sugars, proteins), intracellular substances in cells (e.g. DNA, RNA, ribosomes, organelles, cytokines, transcription factors, cytoskeleton components, intracellular proteins, sugars), components in fluidics (e.g. antibodies, blood plates, serum proteins, sugars), structures in interstitial space in tissues ect.

A binding molecule may have a molecular weight of between 50 Da and several million Da. In some instances a very low molecular weight is preferred, such as a molecular weight of 50-250 Da, or 251-500 Da. In other cases a low molecular weight, e.g. 501-2000 Da, 2001-5000 Da, or 5001-10000 Da may be preferred. In yet other cases, a high molecular weight of the binding molecule is practical, and the molecular weight of the binding molecule may be 10001-50000 Da, 50001-200000 Da, or 200000-1000000 Da. Finally, multi-molecule structures, such as in cases where a number of different fluorescent proteins are ordered in an array by binding to specific regions in a template DNA, where the total binding molecule thus is 50000-200000 Da, 200001-100000, or 1000001-10000000 Da.

Examples of binding molecules and corresponding target molecules are given below:

-   -   I. Antibodies binding to membrane components on, or within         cells; e.g. Polysaccharides, proteins, or lipid residues.     -   II. MHC multimers (e.g. MHC dextramers, MHC tetramers, MHC         pentamers), optionally complexed with a specific peptide, binds         to the T-cell receptor (TCR) on T-cells.     -   III. MHC multimers (e.g. MHC dextramers, MHC tetramers, MHC         pentamers), complexed with a so-called nonsense peptide (i.e. a         peptide that binds the MHC protein but expectably does not         mediate efficient MHC complex-TCR interaction with any T-cell),         are used as negative control for the specific binding of a         specific MHC multimers to the cell.     -   IV. Binding molecules such as Propidium Iodide (PI) that stain         DNA in cells, here the binding molecule and the label can         optionally be the same molecule.     -   V. Binding molecules that stain DNA, and that is used to         characterize the state of a cell (e.g. state of cell cycle),         e.g. Draq 5, PI, or other DNA binding molecules.     -   VI. Binding molecules that bind specifically to incorporated         molecules. An example is BrdU, which may be added to a cell         which will incorporate BrdU into its DNA; by using anti-BrdU         antibody, cells that have incorporated BrdU will be detected.     -   VII. Binding molecules such as hormones, or growth factors, that         specifically interacts with a cellular component, such as the         estrogen receptor with estrogen or the EGF receptor with EGF.     -   VIII. Introduction of modified nucleotides, amino acids, or         vitamins into cells which incorporate these into cellular         components that subsequently can be detected, by themselves         (e.g. if they are radioactive, or fluoresce) or by their         association with a detection molecule.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an MHC or MHC like complex, such as CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, or CD1d in complex with a peptide, lipid, glycolipid or any other molecule that binds to CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, or CD1d, or such as MR1 in complex with any epitope that binds to the MR1 complex, or such as an empty CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d or MR1, i.e. without epitope bound.

In one embodiment the detection molecule is CD1, such as CD1 selected from the group consisting of CD1 CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d and CD1e.

CD1 (cluster of differentiation 1) is a family of glycoproteins expressed on the surface of various human antigen-presenting cells. They are related to the class I MHC molecules, and are involved in the presentation of lipid antigens to T cells.

In one embodiment the detection molecule is a MHC Class I-like proteins; such as MIC A, MIC B, CD1d, HLA E, HLA F, HLA G, HLA H, ULBP-1, ULBP-2, and ULBP-3.

In one embodiment the binding molecule of the invention comprises one peptide-major histocompatibility complex (pMHC) or MHC complex. In another embodiment the binding molecule of the invention comprises 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, such as 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, 7-8, 8-9, 9-10, 10-11, 11-12, 12-13, 13-15, 15-16, 16-20, 20-21, 21-50, 50-100, 51-100, or more than 100 MHC complexes, such as peptide-MHC complexes.

In a particular embodiment the binding molecule of the detection molecule is an oligonucleotide, wherein said oligonucleotide preferably binds to DNA or RNA molecules inside a cell. Optionally, the identity of the detection molecule within a cell is determined by extending the oligonucleotide-binding molecule using a polymerase, in this way identifying the detection molecule as well as the RNA or DNA template to which it is attached.

The MHC multimer can be composed of MHC class I, class II, CD1 or other MHC-like molecules. Thus, when the term MHC multimers is used herein this includes all MHC-like molecules. The MHC multimer is formed through multimerization of peptide-MHC molecules via different backbones.

An aspect of the invention relates to a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) comprising

-   -   two or more MHC's linked by a backbone molecule; and     -   at least one nucleic acid molecule linked to said backbone,         wherein said nucleic acid molecule comprises a central stretch         of nucleic acids (barcode region) designed to be amplified by         e.g. PCR.

Different types of backbones may be used. Thus, in an embodiment the backbone molecule is selected from the group consisting of polysaccharides, such as glucans such as dextran, a streptavidin or a streptavidin multimer. The skilled artisan may find other alternative backbones.

The MHC's may be coupled to the backbone by different means. Thus, in an embodiment the MHC's are coupled to the backbone through a streptavidin-biotin binding or a streptavidin-avidin binding. Again other binding moieties may be used. The specific binding may use specific couplings points. In another embodiment the MHC's are linked to the backbone via the MHC heavy chain.

The MHC consists of different elements, which may partly be expressed and purified from cell systems (such as the MHC heavy chain and the Beta-2-microglobulin element). Alternatively, the elements may be chemically synthesized. The specific peptide is preferably chemically synthesized.

All three elements are required for the generation of a stable MHC (complex). Thus, in an embodiment the MHC is artificially assembled.

The multimeric MHC may comprise different numbers of MHC's. Thus, in yet an embodiment the multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) is composed of at least four MHC's, such as at least eight, such as at least ten, 2-30, 2-20, such as 2-10 or such as 4-10 MHC's.

In one embodiment there is provided a detection molecule comprising two or more MHC complexes and a multimerization domain, such as comprising 2 MHC complexes, such as 3 MHC complexes, for example 4 MHC complexes, such as 5 MHC complexes, for example 6 MHC complexes, such as 7 MHC complexes, for example 8 MHC complexes, such as 9 MHC complexes, for example 10 MHC complexes, such as 11 MHC complexes, for example 12 MHC complexes, such as 13 MHC complexes, for example 14 MHC complexes, such as 15 MHC complexes, for example 16 MHC complexes, such as 17 MHC complexes, for example 18 MHC complexes, such as 19 MHC complexes, for example 20 MHC complexes, such as 21 MHC complexes, for example 22 MHC complexes, such as 23 MHC complexes, for example 24 MHC complexes, such as 25 MHC complexes, for example 26 MHC complexes, such as 27 MHC complexes, for example 28 MHC complexes, such as 29 MHC complexes, for example 30 MHC complexes, such as more than 30 MHC complexes.

In one embodiment there is provided a detection molecule comprising two or more MHC complexes and a multimerization domain, such as 2-3 MHC complexes, for example 3-4 MHC complexes, such as 4-5 MHC complexes, for example 5-6 MHC complexes, such as 6-7 MHC complexes, for example 7-8 MHC complexes, such as 8-9 MHC complexes, for example 9-10 MHC complexes, such as 10-11 MHC complexes, for example 11-12 MHC complexes, such as 12-13 MHC complexes, for example 13-14 MHC complexes, such as 14-15 MHC complexes, for example 15-16 MHC complexes, such as 16-17 MHC complexes, for example 17-18 MHC complexes, such as 18-19 MHC complexes, for example 19-20 MHC complexes, such as 20-25 MHC complexes, for example 25-30 MHC complexes, such as 30-35 MHC complexes, for example 35-40 MHC complexes, such as 40-45 MHC complexes, for example 45-50 MHC complexes, such as 50-55 MHC complexes, for example 55-60 MHC complexes, such as 60-65 MHC complexes, for example 65-70 MHC complexes, such as 70-75 MHC complexes, for example 75-80 MHC complexes, such as 80-85 MHC complexes, for example 85-90 MHC complexes, such as 90-95 MHC complexes, for example 95-100 MHC complexes, such as 100-125 MHC complexes, for example 125-150 MHC complexes, such as 150-175 MHC complexes, for example 175-200 MHC complexes, such as more than 200 MHC complexes.

In one embodiment the detection molecule comprises 2-20 MHC complexes, for example 2-10 MHC complexes, such as 4-20 MHC complexes, for example 4-10 MHC complexes, such as 5-10 MHC complexes, for example 5-20 MHC complexes, such as 5-25 MHC complexes.

In one embodiment there is provided a detection molecule comprising two or more MHC complexes and a multimerization domain, and comprising one or more labels, such as DNA labels, as defined herein elsewhere.

Different types of MHC's may form part of the multimer. Thus, in an embodiment the MHC is selected from the group consisting of class I MHC, a class II MHC, a CD1, or a MHC-like molecule. For MHC class I the presenting peptide is a 9-11mer peptide; for MHC class II, the presenting peptide is 12-18mer peptides. For alternative MHC-molecules it may be fragments from lipids or gluco-molecules which are presented.

In one embodiment the binding molecule comprises a connector molecule, which connector molecule is able to interact with a component on the linker and/or label of the detection molecule. In one embodiment the connector molecule is biotin or avidin. In one embodiment the linker comprises streptavidin to which the binding molecule binds via its biotin or avidin connector molecule.

BM: MHC Complexes

In a preferred embodiment the binding molecule of the detection molecule of the present invention comprises one or more MHC complexes (or MHC molecules).

The present invention in one embodiment provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), wherein the binding molecule comprises one or more MHC complexes.

The present invention in one embodiment provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), wherein the binding molecule comprises one or more MHC complexes, and the label is a nucleic acid label, such as a DNA label.

The present invention in one embodiment provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), wherein the binding molecule comprises one or more MHC complexes, the label is a nucleic acid label, such as a DNA label, and the linker is a multimerization domain (or carrier molecule, or backbone).

The present invention in one embodiment provides a detection molecule comprising a binding molecule (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), wherein the binding molecule comprises two or more MHC complexes, the linker is a dextran multimerization domain (also known as ‘MHC dextramers’), and the label is a nucleic acid label, such as a DNA label.

The MHC as a binding molecule (MHC-BM) according to the present invention is described in more detail herein below. The MHC as a binding molecule according to the present invention in combination with some linkers is also disclosed in detail herein below.

Each embodiment wherein the binding molecule is a MHC complex can be combined individually with any of the herein disclosed further components of the detection molecules namely linker and label.

The present invention in one aspect refers to a detection molecule comprising a MHC monomer comprising a-b-P, or a MHC multimer comprising (a-b-P)_(n), wherein n>1, wherein a and b together form a functional MHC protein capable of binding an antigenic peptide P,

wherein (a-b-P) is a MHC-peptide complex formed when the antigenic peptide P binds to the functional MHC protein.

The present invention in another aspect refers to a MHC monomer comprising a-b-P, or a MHC multimer comprising (a-b-P)_(n), wherein n>1,

wherein a and b together form a functional MHC protein capable of binding an antigenic peptide P,

wherein (a-b-P) is a MHC-peptide complex formed when the antigenic peptide P binds to the functional MHC protein, and

wherein each MHC complex or MHC peptide complex of a MHC multimer is associated with one or more multimerization domains.

MHC monomers and MHC multimers comprising two or more MHC complexes and/or MHC peptide complexes of class 1 or class 2 MHC are covered by the present invention.

In another aspect the present invention is directed to a composition comprising a plurality of MHC monomers and/or MHC multimers according to the present invention, wherein the MHCs of the MHC multimers individually are identical or different, and a linker such as a carrier.

The present invention further relates to a method for detection of antigen-specific T cells, said method comprising the steps of 1) providing a detection molecule comprising a MHC multimer, 2) providing a population of antigen-specific T cells, and 3) detecting antigen-specific T cells specific for the peptide P of the MHC multimer.

In a further embodiment the present invention relates to a method for counting of antigen-specific T cells, said method comprising the steps of 1) providing a detection molecule comprising a MHC multimer, 2) providing a population of antigen-specific T cells, and 3) counting antigen-specific T cells specific for the peptide P of the MHC multimer.

The present invention also relates to a method for sorting of antigen-specific T cells, said method comprising the steps of 1) providing a detection molecule comprising a MHC multimer, 2) providing a population of antigen-specific T cells, and 3) sorting antigen-specific T cells specific for the peptide P of the MHC multimer.

In yet another embodiment the present invention relates to a method for isolation of antigen-specific T cells, said method comprising the steps of 1) providing a detection molecule comprising a MHC multimer, 2) providing a population of antigen-specific T cells, and 3) isolating antigen-specific T cells specific for the peptide P of the MHC multimer.

In a still further aspect there is provided a method for immune monitoring of one or more diseases comprising monitoring of antigen-specific T cells, said method comprising the steps of

-   -   i) providing a detection molecule comprising a MHC monomer or         MHC multimer or individual components thereof according to the         present invention,     -   ii) providing a population of antigen-specific T cells or         individual antigen-specific T cells, and     -   iii) measuring the number, activity or state and/or presence of         antigen-specific of T cells specific for the peptide P of the         said MHC monomer or MHC multimer, thereby immune monitoring said         one or more diseases.

In one aspect, the present invention is directed to MHC complexes comprising a linker which is a multimerization domain, preferably comprising a carrier molecule and/or a scaffold.

There is also provided a MHC multimer comprising 2 or more MHC-peptide complexes and a multimerization domain to which the 2 or more MHC-peptide complexes are associated. The MHC multimer can generally be formed by association of the 2 or more MHC complexes with the multimerization domain to which the 2 or more MHC complexes are capable of associating.

The multimerization domain can be a scaffold associated with one or more MHC complexes, or a carrier associated with one or more, preferably more than one, MHC complex(es), or a carrier associated with a plurality of scaffolds each associated with one or more MHC complexes, such as 2 MHC complexes, 3 MHC complexes, 4 MHC complexes, 5 MHC complexes or more than 5 MHC complexes. Accordingly, multimerization domain collectively refers to each and every of the above. It will be clear from the detailed description of the invention provided herein below when the multimerization domain refers to a scaffold or a carrier or a carrier comprising one or more scaffolds. It is understood that MHC complexes of the invention may or may not be loaded with antigenic peptides; when they are this may be referred to as a MHC-peptide complex.

Generally, when a multimerization domain comprising a carrier and/or a scaffold is present, the MHC complexes can be associated with this domain either directly or via one or more binding entities. The association can be covalent or non-covalent.

Accordingly, there is provided in one embodiment a MHC complex comprising one or more entities (a-b-P)_(n), wherein a and b together form a functional MHC protein capable of binding a peptide P, and wherein (a-b-P) is the MHC-peptide complex formed when the peptide P binds to the functional MHC protein, said MHC complex optionally further comprising a multimerization domain comprising a carrier molecule and/or a scaffold. “MHC complex” refers to any MHC complex, including MHC monomers in the form of a single MHC complex and MHC multimers comprising a multimerization domain to which more than one MHC complex is associated. MHC complexes can be with or without peptide P included in the binding groove of the MHC.

When the invention is directed to complexes comprising a MHC multimer, i.e. a plurality of MHC complexes of the general composition (a-b-P)_(n) associated with a multimerization domain, n is by definition more than 1, i.e. at least 2 or more. Accordingly, the term “MHC multimer” is used herein specifically to indicate that more than one MHC complex is associated with a multimerization domain, such as a scaffold or carrier or carrier comprising one or more scaffolds. Accordingly, a single MHC complex can be associated with a scaffold or a carrier or a carrier comprising a scaffold and a MHC-multimer comprising 2 or more MHC complexes can be formed by association of the individual MHC complexes with a scaffold or a carrier or a carrier comprising one or more scaffolds each associated with one or more MHC complexes.

When the MHC complex comprises a multimerization domain to which the n MHC complexes are associated, the association can be a covalent linkage so that each or at least some of the n MHC complexes is covalently linked to the multimerization domain, or the association can be a non-covalent association so that each or at least some of the n MHC complexes are non-covalently associated with the multimerization domain.

The MHC complexes of the invention may be provided in non-soluble or soluble form, depending on the intended application.

Effective methods to produce a variety of MHC complexes comprising highly polymorphic human HLA encoded proteins makes it possible to perform advanced analyses of complex immune responses, which may comprise a variety of peptide epitope specific T-cell clones.

One of the benefits of the MHC complexes of the present invention is that the MHC complexes overcome low intrinsic affinities of monomer ligands and counter receptors. The MHC complexes have a large variety of applications that include targeting of high affinity receptors (e.g. hormone peptide receptors for insulin) on target cells. Taken together poly-ligand binding to target cells has numerous practical, clinical and scientifically uses.

Thus, the present invention provides MHC complexes which present mono-valent or multi-valent binding sites for MHC-peptide recognising cells, such as MHC complexes optionally comprising a multimerization domain, such as a scaffold or a carrier molecule, which multimerization domain have attached thereto, directly or indirectly via one or more connectors, covalently or non-covalently, one or more MHC complexes. “One or more” as used herein is intended to include one as well as a plurality, such as at least 2. This applies i.a. to the MHC complexes and to the binding entities of the multimerization domain. The scaffold or carrier molecule may thus have attached thereto a MHC complex or a plurality of such MHC complexes, and/or a connector or a plurality of connectors.

In one preferred embodiment the MHC multimer is between 50,000 Da and 1,000,000 Da, such as from 50,000 Da to 980,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 160,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 140,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 120,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 100,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 80,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 60,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 980,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 160,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 140,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 120,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 980,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 160,000.

In another preferred embodiment the MHC multimer is between 1,000,000 Da and 3,000,000 Da, such as from 1,000,000 Da to 2,800,000; for example from 1,000,000 Da to 2,600,000; such as from 1,000,000 Da to 2,400,000; for example from 1,000,000 Da to 2,200,000; such as from 1,000,000 Da to 2,000,000; for example from 1,000,000 Da to 1,800,000; such as from 1,000,000 Da to 1,600,000; for example from 1,000,000 Da to 1,400,000.

Number of MHC Complexes Per Multimer

A non-exhaustive list of possible MHC mono- and multimers illustrates the possibilities. ‘n’ indicates the number of MHC complexes comprised in the multimer:

a) n = 1, Monomers b) n = 2, Dimers, multimerization can be based on IgG scaffold, streptavidin with two MHC's, coiled-coil dimerization e.g. Fos.Jun dimerization c) n = 3, Trimers, multimerization can be based on streptavidin as scaffold with three MHC's, TNFalpha-MHC hybrids, triplex DNA-MHC konjugates or other trimer structures d) n = 4, Tetramers, multimerization can be based on streptavidin with all four binding sites occupied by MHC molecules or based on dimeric IgA e) n = 5, Pentamers, multimerization can take place around a pentameric coil-coil structure f) n = 6, Hexamers g) n = 7, Heptamers h) n = 8-12, Octa- dodecamers, multimerization can take place using Streptactin i) n = 10, Decamers, multimerization can take place using IgM j) 1 < n < 100, Dextramers, as multimerization domain polymers such as polypeptide, polysaccharides and Dextrans can be used. k) 1 < n < 1000, Multimerization can make use of dendritic cells (DC), antigen-presenting cells (APC), micelles, liposomes, beads, surfaces e.g. microtiterplate, tubes, microarray devices, micro-fluidic systems l) 1 < n, n in billions or trillions or higher, multimerization take place on beads, and surfaces e.g. microtiterplate, tubes, microarray devices, micro-fluidic systems

MHC multimers thus include MHC-dimers, MHC-trimers, MHC-tetramers, MHC-pentamers, MHC-hexamers, as well as organic molecules, cells, membranes, polymers and particles that comprise two or more MHC-peptide complexes. Example organic molecule-based multimers include functionalized cyclic structures such as benzene rings where e.g. a benzene ring is functionalized and covalently linked to e.g. three MHC complexes; example cell-based MHC multimers include dendritic cells and antigen presenting cells (APCs); example membrane-based MHC multimers include liposomes and micelles carrying MHC-peptide complexes in their membranes; example polymer-based MHC multimers include MHC-dextramers (dextran to which a number of MHC-peptide complexes are covalently or non-covalently attached) and example particles include beads or other solid supports with MHC complexes immobilized on the surface. Obviously, any kind of multimerization domain can be used, including any kind of cell, polymer, protein or other molecular structure, or particles and solid supports.

More than 600 MHC alleles (class 1 and 2) are known in humans; for many of these, the peptide binding characteristics are known. The frequency of the different HLA alleles varies considerably, also between different ethnic groups. Thus it is of outmost importance to carefully select the MHC alleles that corresponds to the population that one wish to study.

Any of the components of a MHC complex can be of any of the below mentioned origins. The list is non-exhaustive. A complete list would encompass all Chordate species. By origin is meant that the sequence is identical or highly homologous to a naturally occurring sequence of the specific species.

List of origins: Human, Mouse, Primate (Chimpansee, Gorilla, Orang Utan), Monkey (Macaques), Porcine (Swine/Pig), Bovine (Cattle/Antilopes), Equine (Horse), Camelides (Camels), Ruminants (Deears), Canine (Dog), Feline (Cat), Bird (Chicken, Turkey), Fish, Reptiles, Amphibians.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex of HLA-type A.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex of HLA-type B.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex of HLA-type C.

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A1 (eg. HLA-A*0101, HLA-A*2601, HLA-A*2602, HLA-A2603, HLA-A*3002, HLA-A*3003, HLA-A*3004, HLA-A*3201).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A01 A03 (eg. HLA-A*3001).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A01 A024 (eg. HLA-A*2902).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A2 (eg. HLA-A*0201, HLA-A*0202, HLA-A*0203, HLA-A*0204, HLA-A*0205, HLA-A*0206, HLA-A*0207, HLA-A*0214, HLA-A*0217, HLA-A*6802, HLA-A*6901).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A3 (eg. HLA-A*0301, HLA-A*1101, HLA-A*3101, HLA-A*3301, HLA-A*3303, HLA-A*6601, HLA-A*6801, HLA-A*7401).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-A24 (eg. HLA-A*2301, HLA-A*2402).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B7 (eg. HLA-B*0702, HLA-B*0703, HLA-B*0705, HLA B*1508, HLA-B*3501, HLA-B*3503, HLA-B*4201, HLA-B*5101, HLA-B*5102, HLA-B*5103, HLA-B*5301, HLA-B*5401, HLA-B*5501, HLA-B*5502, HLA-B*5601, HLA-B*6701, HLA-B*7801).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B8 (eg. HLA-B*0801, HLA-B*0802).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B27 (eg. HLA-B*1402, HLA-B*1503, HLA-B*1509, HLA-B*1510, HLA-B*1518, HLA-B*2702, HLA-B*2703, HLA-B*2704, HLA-B*2705, HLA-B*2706, HLA-B*2707, HLA-B*2708, HLA-B*2709, HLA-B*3801, HLA-B*3901, HLA-B*3902, HLA-B*3909, HLA-B*4801, HLA-B*7301).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B44 (eg. HLA-B*1801, HLA-B*3701, HLA-B*4001, HLA-B*4002, HLA-B*4006, HLA-B*4402, HLA-B*4403, HLA-B*4501).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B58 (eg. HLA-B*1516, HLA-B*1517, HLA-B*5701, HLA-B*5702, HLA-B*5801, HLA-B*5802).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA-B62 (eg. HLA-B*1501, HLA-B*1502, HLA-B*1512, HLA-B*1513, HLA-B*4601, HLA-B*5201).

In one embodiment the binding molecules is a MHC class I complex, of supertype HLA Cw 1-8 (eg. HLA-C*01, HLA-C*02, HLA-C*03, HLA-C*04, HLA-C*05, HLA-C*06, HLA-C*07, HLA-C*08).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with an acidic amino acid on 3^(rd) position (eg. HLA-A*0101, HLA-A*2601, HLA-A*2602, HLA-A*2603, HLA-A*3002, HLA-A*3003, HLA-A*3004, HLA-A*3201).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a hydrophobic amino acid on 9th position (eg. HLA-A*0201 . . . 0207, A*0214, A*0217, A*6802, A*6901, HLA-B*1516, B*1517, B*5701, B*5702, B*5801, B*5802).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Basic amino acid on 9^(th) position (eg. HLA-A*0301, HLA-A*1101, HLA-A*3101, HLA-A*3301, HLA-A*3303, HLA-A*6601, HLA-A*6801, HLA-A*7401).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Tyrosine amino acid on 2^(nd) position (eg. HLA-A*2301, HLA-A*2402).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Proline amino acid on 2^(nd) position (eg. HLA-B*0702, HLA-B*0703, HLA-B*0705, HLA-B*1508, HLA-B*3501, HLA-B*3503, HLA-B*4201, HLA-B*5101, HLA-B*5102, HLA-B*5103, HLA-B*5301, HLA-B*5401, HLA-B*5501, HLA-B*5502, HLA-B*5601, HLA-B*6701, HLA-B*7801).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Lysine amino acid on 3^(rd) and 5th position (eg. HLA-B*0801, B*0802).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Arginine amino acid on 2^(nd) position (eg. HLA-B*1402, HLA-B*1503, HLA-B*1509, HLA-B*1510, HLA-B*1518, HLA-B*2702, HLA-B*2703, HLA-B*2704, HLA-B*2705, HLA-B*2706, HLA-B*2707, HLA-B*2708, HLA-B*2709, HLA-B*3801, HLA-B*3901, HLA-B*3902, HLA-B*3909, HLA-B*4801, HLA-B*7301).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Glutamic acid amino acid on 2^(nd) position (eg. HLA-B*1801, HLA-B*3701, HLA-B*4001, HLA-B*4002, HLA-B*4006, HLA-B*4402, HLA-B*4403, HLA-B*4501).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which binds peptides with a Tyrosine amino acid on 9^(th) position (eg. HLA-B*1501, HLA-B*1502, HLA-B*1512, HLA-B*1513, HLA-B*4601, HLA-B*5201).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which in the B pocket selectively binds small or aliphatic peptides (eg. HLA-A*0101, HLA-A*2601, HLA-A*2602, HLA-A*2603, HLA-A*3002, HLA-A*3003, HLA-A*3004, HLA-A*3201, HLA-A*0201, HLA-A*0202, HLA-A*0203, HLA-A*0204, HLA-A*0205, HLA-A*0206, HLA-A*0207, HLA-A*0214, HLA-A*0217, HLA-A*6802, HLA-A*6901, HLA-A*0301, HLA-A*1101, HLA-A*3101, HLA-A*3301, HLA-A*3303, HLA-A*6601, HLA-A*6801, HLA-A*7401).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class I complex, which in the F pocket selectively binds aliphatic peptides (eg. HLA-A*0101, HLA-A*2601 . . . 2603, HLA-A*3002, HLA-A*3003, HLA-A*3004, HLA-A*3201, HLA-A*0201, HLA-A*0202, HLA-A*0203, HLA-A*0204, HLA-A*0205, HLA-A*0206, HLA-A*0207, HLA-A*0214, HLA-A*0217, HLA-A*6802, HLA-A*6901, HLA-A*0301, HLA-A*1101, HLA-A*3101, HLA-A*3301, HLA-A*3303, HLA-A*6601, HLA-A*6801, HLA-A*7401, HLA-B*1501, HLA-B*1502, HLA-B*1512, HLA-B*1513, HLA-B*4601, HLA-B*5201).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex, of HLA-type DP.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex, of HLA-type DQ.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex, of HLA-type DR.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR1 (eg. HLA-DR1*0101, HLA-DR*0102).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR3 (eg. HLA-DR1*1107, HLA-DR*0301, HLA-DR*0305, HLA-DR*0306, HLA-DR*0309).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR4 (eg. HLA-DR1*0401, HLA-DR*0402, HLA-DR*0404, HLA-DR*0405, HLA-DR*0408, HLA-DR*0410, HLA-DR*0426).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR7 (eg. HLA-DR1*0701).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR8 (eg. HLA-DR1*0801, HLA-DR*0802, HLA-DR*0804, HLA-DR*0806, HLA-DR*0813, HLA-DR*0817).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR11 (eg. HLA-DR1*1101, HLA-DR*1104, HLA-DR*1128, HLA-DR*1307, HLA-DR*1321).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR13 (eg. HLA-DR1*1102, HLA-DR*1114, HLA-DR*1120, HLA-DR*1301, HLA-DR*1304, HLA-DR*1322).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR15 (eg. HLA-DR1*1501, HLA-DR*1502).

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a MHC class II complex of HLA supertype DR51 (eg. HLA-DR5*0101).

Generation of MHC Multimers

Different approaches to the generation of various types of MHC multimers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,635,363 (Altmann et al.), patent application WO 02/072631 A2 (Winther et al.), patent application WO 99/42597, US patent 2004209295, U.S. Pat. No. 5,635,363. In brief, MHC multimers can be generated by first expressing and purifying the individual protein components of the MHC protein, and then combining the MHC protein components and the peptide, to form the MHC-peptide complex. Then an appropriate number of MHC-peptide complexes are linked together by covalent or non-covalent bonds to a multimerization domain. This can be done by chemical reactions between reactive groups of the multimerization domain (e.g. vinyl sulfone functionalities on a dextran polymer) and reactive groups on the MHC protein (e.g. amino groups on the protein surface), or by non-covalent interaction between a part of the MHC protein (e.g. a biotinylated peptide component) and the multimerization domain (e.g. four binding sites for biotin on the strepavidin tetrameric protein). As an alternative, the MHC multimer can be formed by the non-covalent association of amino acid helices fused to one component of the MHC protein, to form a pentameric MHC multimer, held together by five helices in a coiled-coil structure making up the multimerization domain.

Appropriate chemical reactions for the covalent coupling of MHC and the multimerization domain include nucleophilic substitution by activation of electrophiles (e.g. acylation such as amide formation, pyrazolone formation, isoxazolone formation; alkylation; vinylation; disulfide formation), addition to carbon-hetero multiple bonds (e.g. alkene formation by reaction of phosphonates with aldehydes or ketones; arylation; alkylation of arenes/hetarenes by reaction with alkyl boronates or enolethers), nucleophilic substitution using activation of nucleophiles (e.g. condensations; alkylation of aliphatic halides or tosylates with enolethers or enamines), and cycloadditions.

Appropriate molecules, capable of providing non-covalent interactions between the multimerization domain and the MHC-peptide complex, involve the following molecule pairs and molecules: streptavidin/biotin, avidin/biotin, antibody/antigen, DNA/DNA, DNA/PNA, DNA/RNA, PNA/PNA, LNA/DNA, leucine zipper e.g. Fos/Jun, IgG dimeric protein, IgM multivalent protein, acid/base coiled-coil helices, chelate/metal ion-bound chelate, streptavidin (SA) and avidin and derivatives thereof, biotin, immunoglobulins, antibodies (monoclonal, polyclonal, and recombinant), antibody fragments and derivatives thereof, leucine zipper domain of AP-1 (jun and fos), hexa-his (metal chelate moiety), hexa-hat GST (glutathione S-transferase) glutathione affinity, Calmodulin-binding peptide (CBP), Strep-tag, Cellulose Binding Domain, Maltose Binding Protein, S-Peptide Tag, Chitin Binding Tag, Immuno-reactive Epitopes, Epitope Tags, E2Tag, HA Epitope Tag, Myc Epitope, FLAG Epitope, AU1 and AU5 Epitopes, Glu-Glu Epitope, KT3 Epitope, IRS Epitope, Btag Epitope, Protein Kinase-C Epitope, VSV Epitope, lectins that mediate binding to a diversity of compounds, including carbohydrates, lipids and proteins, e.g. Con A (Canavalia ensiformis) or WGA (wheat germ agglutinin) and tetranectin or Protein A or G (antibody affinity). Combinations of such binding entities are also comprised. In particular, when the MHC complex is tagged, the binding entity can be an “anti-tag”. By “anti-tag” is meant an antibody binding to the tag and any other molecule capable of binding to such tag.

Generation of Components of MHC

When employing MHC multimers for diagnostic purposes, it is preferable to use a MHC allele that corresponds to the tissue type of the person or animal to be diagnosed. Once the MHC allele has been chosen, a peptide derived from the antigenic protein may be chosen. The choice will depend on factors such as known or expected binding affinity of the MHC protein and the various possible peptide fragments that may be derived from the full sequence of the antigenic peptide, and will depend on the expected or known binding affinity and specificity of the MHC-peptide complex for the TCR. Preferably, the affinity of the peptide for the MHC molecule, and the affinity and specificity of the MHC-peptide complex for the TCR, should be high.

Similar considerations apply to the choice of MHC allele and peptide for therapeutic and vaccine purposes. In addition, for some of these applications the effect of binding the MHC multimer to the TCR is also important. Thus, in these cases the effect on the T-cell's general state must be considered, e.g. it must be decided whether the desired end result is apoptosis or proliferation of the T-cell.

Likewise, it must be decided whether stability is important. For some applications low stability may be an advantage, e.g. when a short-term effect is desired; in other instances, a long-term effect is desired and MHC multimers of high stability is desired. Stabilities of the MHC protein and of the MHC-peptide complex may be modified as described elsewhere herein.

Finally, modifications to the protein structure may be advantageous for some diagnostics purposes, because of e.g. increased stability, while in for vaccine purposes modifications to the MHC protein structure may induce undesired allergenic responses.

The generation of protein chains of MHC as well as the Stabilization of MHC complexes is thoroughly explained in WO 2009/106073, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Other TCR Binding Molecules

MHC I and MHC II complexes bind to TCRs. However, other molecules also bind TCR. Some TCR-binding molecules are described in the following.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding TCR.

In one embodiment the anti-target-molecule capable of binding TCR is a molecule that has homology to the classical MHC molecules and therefore potentially could be TCR binding molecules. These other TCR binding or MHC like molecules include:

Non-Classical MHC Complexes and Other MHC-Like Molecules

Non-classical MHC complexes include protein products of MHC Ib and MHC IIb genes. MHC Ib genes encode β2m-associated cell-surface molecules but show little polymorphism in contrast to classical MHC class I genes. Protein products of MHC class Ib genes include HLA-E, HLA-G, HLA-F, HLA-H, MIC A, MIC B, ULBP-1, ULBP-2, ULBP-3 in humans and H2-M, H2-Q, H2-T and Rael in mice.

Non-classical MHC II molecules (protein products of MHC Ilb genes) include HLA-DM, HLA-DO in humans and H2-DM and H2-DO in mice that are involved in regulation of peptide loading into MHC II molecules.

Another MHC-like molecule of special interest is the MHC I-like molecule CD1. CD1 is similar to MHC I molecules in its organization of subunits and association with β2m but presents glycolipids and lipids instead of peptides.

Artificial Molecules Capable of Binding Specific TCRs

Of special interest are antibodies that bind TCRs. Antibodies herein include full length antibodies of isotype IgG, IgM, IgE, IgA and truncated versions of these, antibody fragments like Fab fragments and scFv. Antibodies also include antibodies of antibody fragments displayed on various supramolecular structures or solid supports, including filamentous phages, yeast, mammalian cells, fungi, artificial cells or micelles, and beads with various surface chemistries.

Peptide Binding TCR

Another embodiment of special interest is peptides that bind TCRs. Peptides herein include peptides composed of natural, non-natural and/or chemically modified amino acids with a length of 8-20 amino acid. The peptides could also be longer than 20 amino acids or shorter than 8 amino acids. The peptides can or cannot have a defined tertiary structure.

Aptamers

Aptamers are another preferred group of TCR ligands. Aptamers are herein understood as natural nucleic acids (e.g. RNA and DNA) or unnatural nucleic acids (e.g. PNA, LNA, morpholinos) capable of binding TCR. The aptamer molecules consist of natural or modified nucleotides in various lengths.

Other TCR-binding molecules can be ankyrin repeat proteins or other repeat proteins, Avimers, or small chemical molecules, as long as they are capable of binding TCR with a dissociation constant smaller than 10⁻³ M.

BM: Anti-Target Molecules

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of associating with, recognizing and/or binding to a predetermined target structure belonging to or associated with an entity/cell, e.g. in a sample. A typical target for a binding molecule is a ‘marker molecule’, which marker molecule is specific for a given cell or cell type.

Any binding molecule that is capable of specifically associating with, recognizing and/or binding to a predetermined target structure is encompassed within the present invention.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a specific cell type.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a specific cell type selected from the group consisting of immune cells, lymphocytes, monocytes, dendritic cells, T-cells, B-cells and NK cells.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a specific cell type selected from the group consisting CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, αβ T cells, invariant γδ T cells and antigen-specific T-cells.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a cell comprising TCRs. In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a cell comprising BCRs.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a specific cancer cell.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a target specifically associated with an organ selected from the group consisting of lymph nodes, kidney, liver, skin, brain, heart, muscles, bone marrow, skin, skeleton, lungs, the respiratory tract, spleen, thymus, pancreas, exocrine glands, bladder, endocrine glands, reproduction organs including the phallopian tubes, eye, ear, vascular system, the gastroinstestinal tract including small intestines, colon, rectum, canalis analis and prostate gland.

Anti-target-molecule is in one embodiment selected from antibodies, antibody mimetics, natural ligands, variants or fragments of natural ligands, synthetic ligands, agonists, antagonists, aptamers (including DNA aptamers, RNA aptamers and peptide aptamers), peptides, and artificial molecules capable of binding a specific target.

Peptide Aptamer

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. In one embodiment the anti-target-molecule is a peptide aptamer, such as a peptide that bind a target. Peptides herein include peptides composed of natural, non-natural and/or chemically modified amino acids, in one embodiment with a length of 8-20 amino acid, such as 5-25 amino acids, for example 5-40 amino acids. The peptides can or cannot have a defined tertiary structure.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is a peptide of 1-100 amino acid residues without tertiary structure.

Nucleic Acid Aptamer

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. In one embodiment the anti-target-molecule is a nucleic acid aptamer (or oligonucleotide aptamer, or simply ‘oligonucleotide’). Nucleic acid aptamers are herein understood as natural nucleic acids (e.g. RNA and DNA) or artificial nucleic acids (e.g. PNA, LNA, morpholinos) capable of binding a target. The aptamer molecules consist of natural or modified nucleotides in various lengths.

Other target-binding molecules include ankyrin repeat proteins or other repeat proteins, Avimers, or small chemical molecules, as long as they are capable of binding the target with an acceptable dissociation constant such as smaller than 10⁻³ M.

Ligand

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. In one embodiment the anti-target-molecule is a ligand capable of binding a target.

Antibodies

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. In one embodiment anti-target-molecule is an antibody. In a preferred embodiment the anti-target-molecule is an antibody that selectively associates with, recognizes and/or binds to a predetermined target structure belonging to or associated with an entity/cell in a sample.

Immunoglobulins are a class of structurally related glycoproteins consisting of two pairs of polypeptide chains, one pair of light (L) low molecular weight chains and one pair of heavy (H) chains, all four inter-connected by disulfide bonds. The structure of immunoglobulins has been well characterized. Briefly, each heavy chain typically is comprised of a heavy chain variable region (VH) and a heavy chain constant region (CH) typically comprised of three domains, CH1, CH2, and CH3. Each light chain typically is comprised of a light chain variable region (VL) and a light chain constant region, typically comprised of one domain (CL). The VH and VL regions may be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability also termed complementarity determining regions (CDRs), interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FRs).

The term “antibody” or “Ab” in the context of the present invention refers to an immunoglobulin molecule, a fragment of an immunoglobulin molecule, or a derivative of either thereof, which has the ability to specifically bind to an antigen under typical physiological conditions. The variable regions of the heavy and light chains of the immunoglobulin molecule contain a binding domain that interacts with an antigen. An antibody may also be multispecific, having specificities for two or more different epitopes, typically non-overlapping. Examples of multispecific antibodies include bispecific antibodies, diabodies, and similar antibody molecules. As indicated above, the term antibody herein, unless otherwise stated, includes fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to specifically bind to the antigen. The antigen-binding function of an antibody may be performed by fragments of a full-length antibody, e.g., Fab and F(ab′)2 fragments. In the context of the present invention the term antibody, unless specified otherwise, includes polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies (mAbs), antibody-like polypeptides such as chimeric antibodies and humanized antibodies. An antibody as generated can possess any isotype. The term “epitope” means a protein determinant capable of specific binding to an antibody.

The terms “human antibody” include antibodies having variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. The human antibodies of the invention may include amino acid residues not encoded by human germline immunoglobulin sequences (e.g., mutations introduced by random or site-specific mutagenesis in vitro or by somatic mutation in vivo). However, the term “human antibody”, as used herein, is not intended to include antibodies in which CDR sequences derived from the germline of another mammalian species, such as a mouse, have been grafted onto human framework sequences.

The terms “monoclonal antibody” (mAb), refer to a preparation of antibody molecules of single molecular composition. A monoclonal antibody composition displays a single binding specificity and affinity for a particular epitope. Accordingly, the term “human monoclonal antibody” refers to antibodies displaying a single binding specificity which have variable and constant regions derived from human germline immunoglobulin sequences. The human monoclonal antibodies may be produced by a hybridoma which includes a B cell obtained from a transgenic or transchromosomal non-human animal, such as a transgenic mouse, having a genome comprising a human heavy chain transgene and a light chain transgene, fused to an immortalized cell.

As used herein, “isotype” refers to the immunoglobulin class (for instance IgGI, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgD, IgA, IgE, or IgM) that is encoded by heavy chain constant region genes. The term “full-length antibody” when used herein, refers to an antibody which contains all heavy and light chain constant and variable domains that are normally found in an antibody of that isotype.

Antibody Mimetics

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. In one embodiment anti-target-molecule is an antibody mimetic. Antibody mimetics are organic compounds that, like antibodies, can specifically bind antigens, but that are not structurally related to antibodies.

Antibody mimetics include, but is not limited to, affibody molecules, affilinns, affimers, affitins, alphabodies, anticalins, avimers, DARPins, fynomers, Kunitz domain peptides and monobodies.

Avimers (short for avidity multimers) are artificial proteins that are able to specifically bind to certain antigens via multiple binding sites. Avimers consist of two or more peptide sequences of 30 to 35 amino acids each, connected by linker peptides.

Targets of Binding Molecules

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of associating with, recognizing and/or binding to a predetermined target structure belonging to or associated with an entity/cell in a sample.

In one embodiment the target for a binding molecule is a ‘marker molecule’, which marker molecule is specific for a given cell or cell type.

In one embodiment the target is an intracellular target.

In one embodiment the target is a cell-surface target.

In one embodiment the target is a membrane-associated target.

In one embodiment the target is a receptor.

In one embodiment the receptor is an intracellular receptor.

In one embodiment the receptor is a cell-surface receptor or membrane-associated receptor.

In one embodiment the target is a soluble receptor.

In one embodiment the target is a extracellular receptor.

In one embodiment the binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule capable of binding a target selected from the group consisting of CD1, CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d, and MR1.

In one embodiment the target is a T cell receptor.

In one embodiment the target is a B cell receptor.

In one embodiment the target is CD4.

In one embodiment the target is CD8.

In one embodiment the target is CD20.

In one embodiment the target of the binding molecule (anti-target molecule) binds a target selected from the group consisting of cancer cell markers, developmental markers, stem cell markers, cell cycle markers, proliferation markers, activation markers, hormones, hormone receptors, cluster of differentiation (CD), cytokines and cytokine receptors.

In one embodiment the cluster of differentiation is selected from a group consisting of CD1-10, CD10-20, CD20-30, CD30-40, CD40-50, CD50-100, CD100-200, CD200-300 and CD300-364.

In one embodiment the cancer cell marker is selected from a group consisting of HER2, CA125, Tyrosinase, Melanoma-associated antigen (MAGE), abnormal products of Ras or p53, Carcinoembryonic antigen, Muc-1, Epithelial tumor antigen, Carbonic Anhydrase, VEGFR, EGFR, TRAI and RANKL.

In one embodiment the stem cell marker is selected from a group consisting of Stro-1, CD146, CD105, CD44, c-kit, Oct4, Sox-2, Klf4, EphB, Nestin and TWIST-1.

In one embodiment the developmental cell marker is selected from a group consisting of Nanog, Oct4, Sox2, TEKT-1, NANOS, c-kit, Sox9, Notch, Msxl, Msx2 and Coll.

In one embodiment the cytokine is selected from a group consisting of TNFα, TNFβ, TNF, IFNα, IFNβ, IFNγ, IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-10-20, IL-20-30, IL-30, IL-31, IL-32, IL-33, IL-34, IL-35, IL-36, IL-37, IL-38, IL-39, IL-40, NFκB, chemokines including CC chemokines (CCL1-CCL-28), CXC chemokines (CXCL1-CXCL17) C chemokines (XCL-1 and -2) and CX3X chemokines (CX3CL1).

In one embodiment the proliferation marker is selected from a group consisting of CyclinA, CyclinB, PCNA, PC10, p53, Mdm2, Cyclin D, Cyclin E, Rb, ARF and HDM2.

In one embodiment the activation marker is selected from a group consisting of CD28, Tbet, Eomes, Blimp, Bcl-6, CD27, MHC-II, TNF, IFN, Fizz1, ARG1 and CCL22R.

In one embodiment the hormone is selected from a group consisting of estrogen, PTH, ADH, T3, ANP, Epinephrine, Norepinephrine, Cortisol, Corticosterone, Aldosterone, Progestin, EPO, Leptin, Insulin, Glucagon, T4, ACTH, FSH, oxytocin and Calcitriol.

In one embodiment the hormone receptor is selected from a group consisting of EstrogenR (ER), GLP-1R, Thyroid receptor, Leptin receptor, Epinephrine receptor, Insulin receptor and Glucagon receptor.

In one embodiment the intracellular marker is selected from a group consisting of Cyclins, Cytokines and organelle markers (for example Apg12, Syntaxin, PAF-46, Histones, Early endosome antigen, clathrin, tubulins, PAF49, FTCD).

In one embodiment the target of the binding molecule is selected from the group consisting of CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD9, CD27, CD28, CD30, CD69, CD134 (OX40), CD137 (4-1BB), CD147, CDw150 (SLAM), CD152 (CTLA-4), CD153 (CD3OL), CD40L (CD154), NKG2D, ICOS, HVEM, HLA Class II, PD-1, Fas (CD95), FasL, CD40, CD48, CD58, CD70, CD72, B7.1 (CD80), B7.2 (CD86), B7RP-1, B7-H3, PD-L1, PD-L2, CD134L, CD137L, ICOSL, LIGHT CD16, NKp30, NKp44, NKp46, NKp80, 2B4, KIR, LIR, CD94/NKG2A, CD94/NKG2C, LFA-1, CD11a/18, CD54 (ICAM-1), CD106 (VCAM), CD49a,b,c,d,e,f/CD29 (VLA-4), CD11a, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD25, CD30, CD37, CD49a, CD49e, CD56, CD27, CD28, CD45, CD45RA, CD45RO, CD45RB, CCR7, CCRS, CD62L, CD75, CD94, CD99, CD107b, CD109, CD152, CD153, CD154, CD160, CD161, CD178, CDw197, CDw217, Cd229, CD245, CD247 and Foxp3.

Additional Components of Detection Molecule

Additional components or substituents may be coupled to the detection molecule, either coupled to carrier or added as individual components not coupled to carrier.

In one embodiment the detection molecule further comprises an enzyme capable of catalysing the transfer of a cell surface moiety from a cell surface entity to the binding molecule of the detection molecule, wherein said cell surface moiety binds to (or associates with) the binding molecule.

In one embodiment the cell surface entity is a cell surface protein.

In one embodiment the cell surface moiety is a peptide fragment or ‘peptide tag’.

The peptide tag added to the binding molecule can be used as a means of isolating the detection molecules that have been in contact with said cell surface entity.

Attachment of Biologically Active Molecules to Binding Molecules

Engagement of MHC complex to the specific T cell receptor leads to a signaling cascade in the T cell. However, T-cells normally respond to a single signal stimulus by going into apoptosis. T cells needs a second signal in order to become activated and start development into a specific activation state e.g. become an active cytotoxic T cell, helper T cell or regulatory T cell.

It is to be understood that the binding molecule such as MHC complex or MHC multimer of the invention may further comprise one or more additional substituents, such as biologically active molecules. The definition of the terms “one or more”, “a plurality”, “a”, “an”, and “the” also apply here. Such biologically active molecules may be attached to the construct in order to affect the characteristics of the constructs, e.g. with respect to binding properties, effects, MHC molecule specificities, solubility, stability, or detectability. For instance, spacing could be provided between the two or more binding molecules such as two or more MHC complexes, one or both chromophores of a Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (FRET) donor/acceptor pair could be inserted, functional groups could be attached, or groups having a biological activity could be attached.

Binding molecules such as MHC multimers can be covalently or non-covalently associated with various molecules: having adjuvant effects; being immune targets e.g. antigens; having biological activity e.g. enzymes, regulators of receptor activity, receptor ligands, immune potentiators, drugs, toxins, co-receptors, proteins and peptides in general; sugar moieties; lipid groups; nucleic acids including siRNA; nano particles; small molecules. In the following these molecules are collectively called biologically active molecules. Such molecules can be attached to the binding molecule such as MHC multimer using the same principles as those described for attachment of binding molecule such as MHC complexes to multimerisation domains as described elsewhere herein. In brief, attachment can be done by chemical reactions between reactive groups on the biologically active molecule and reactive groups of the multimerisation domain and/or between reactive groups on the biologically active molecule and reactive groups of the binding molecule such as MHC-peptide complex. Alternatively, attachment is done by non-covalent interaction between part of the multimerisation domain and part of the biological active molecule or between part of the binding molecule such as MHC-peptide complex and part of the biological active molecule. In both covalent and non-covalent attachment of the biologically molecule to the multimerisation domain a connector molecule can connect the two. The connecotr molecule can be covalent or non-covalent attached to both molecules. Examples of connector molecules are described elsewhere herein. Some of the binding molecules such as MHCmer structures better allow these kinds of modifications than others. Biological active molecules can be attached repetitively aiding to recognition by and stimulation of the innate immune system via Toll or other receptors.

Binding molecules such as MHC multimers carrying one or more additional groups can be used as therapeutic or vaccine reagents.

In particular, the biologically active molecule may be selected from:

-   -   proteins such as MHC Class I-like proteins like MICA, MIC B,         CD1d, HLA E, HLA F, HLA G, HLA H, ULBP-1, ULBP-2, and ULBP-3,     -   co-stimulatory molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD9,         CD27, CD28, CD30, CD69, CD134 (OX40), CD137 (4-1BB), CD147,         CDw150 (SLAM), CD152 (CTLA-4), CD153 (CD3OL), CD40L (CD154),         NKG2D, ICOS, HVEM, HLA Class II, PD-1, Fas (CD95), FasL         expressed on T and/or NK cells, CD40, CD48, CD58, CD70, CD72,         B7.1 (CD80), B7.2 (CD86), B7RP-1, B7-H3, PD-L1, PD-L2, CD134L,         CD137L, ICOSL, LIGHT expressed on APC and/or tumour cells,     -   cell modulating molecules such as CD16, NKp30, NKp44, NKp46,         NKp80, 2B4, KIR, LIR, CD94/NKG2A, CD94/NKG2C expressed on NK         cells, IFN-alpha, IFN-beta, IFN-gamma, IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4,         IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-15, CSFs         (colony-stimulating factors), vitamin D3, IL-2 toxins,         cyclosporin, FK-506, rapamycin, TGF-beta, clotrimazole,         nitrendipine, and charybdotoxin,     -   accessory molecules such as LFA-1, CD11a/18, CD54 (ICAM-1),         CD106 (VCAM), and CD49a,b,c,d,e,f/CD29 (VLA-4),     -   adhesion molecules such as ICAM-1, ICAM-2, GlyCAM-1, CD34,         anti-LFA-1, anti-CD44, anti-beta7, chemokines, CXCR4, CCRS,         anti-selectin L, anti-selectin E, and anti-selectin P,     -   toxic molecules selected from toxins, enzymes, antibodies,         radioisotopes, chemiluminescent substances, bioluminescent         substances, polymers, metal particles, and haptens, such as         cyclophosphamide, methrotrexate, Azathioprine, mizoribine,         15-deoxuspergualin, neomycin, staurosporine, genestein,         herbimycin A, Pseudomonas exotoxin A, saporin, Rituxan, Ricin,         gemtuzumab ozogamicin, Shiga toxin, heavy metals like inorganic         and organic mercurials, and FN18-CRM9, radioisotopes such as         incorporated isotopes of iodide, cobalt, selenium, tritium, and         phosphor, and haptens such as DNP, and digoxiginin,         and combinations of any of the foregoing, as well as antibodies         (monoclonal, polyclonal, and recombinant) to the foregoing,         where relevant. Antibody derivatives or fragments thereof may         also be used.

Biological active molecules as described above may also be attached to antigenic peptide products or antigenic polypeptide products using same principles for attachment.

Linker

The linker comprised in the detection molecule of the present invention is a molecular entity and/or bond that connect the binding molecule and the label of the detection molecule. The connection may be direct or indirect, and may comprise a covalent or non-covalent binding. A linker according to the present invention comprises, or is identical to, a carrier molecule (or carrier), a multimerization domain and/or a backbone, and may equally be referred to as such herein.

In a preferred embodiment the linker consist of or comprises one or more molecules chosen from the group of dextran, streptavidin, peptide, or antibody.

In a preferred embodiment the linker connecting the binding molecule and the label has a length of 1-2 Å, 3-4 Å, 5-8 Å, 9-15 Å, 16-30 Å, 31-50 Å, 51-100 Å, 101-200 Å, 201-500 Å, 501-2000 Å, or longer than 2000 Å.

In one embodiment the linker of the invention, connecting the binding molecule and the label, consists or comprises one or more of the following entities: a short peptide, a modified or non-modified alkane, alkene or alkyne, a polyamide, ethylenglycol or polyethylenglycol, a small chemical entity such as an amide bond or other chemical bond, an oligonucleotide, biotin, the bond formed after reaction of a thiol with an NHS-ester or a maleimide.

Multimerisation Domain

In a preferred aspect of the invention one or multiple binding molecules (BM), as well as one or more labels, associate with a multimerization domain to form a detection molecule,

Wherein at least two binding molecules are associated via a multimerization domain this constitutes a binding molecule multimer (BM multimer).

The term ‘multimerization domain’ is used to refer to a type of linker in the below; namely any molecular entity and/or bond that connect the binding molecule and the label of the detection molecule; alone or via a connector.

A number of binding molecules associate with one or more multimerization domains to form a detection molecule comprising one or more binding molecules and one or more labels. In one embodiment a number of MHC complexes (binding molecules) associate with a multimerization domain to form a MHC multimer.

The size of the multimerization domain spans a wide range, from multimerisation domains based on small organic molecule scaffolds to large multimers based on a cellular structure or solid support. The multimerization domain may thus be based on different types of carriers or scaffolds, and likewise, the attachment of binding molecules, such as MHC complexes, to the multimerization domain may involve covalent or non-covalent connectorss. Characteristics of different kinds of multimerization domains are described below.

Molecular Weight of Multimerization Domain.

-   -   In one embodiment the multimerization domain(s) in the present         invention is preferably less than 1,000 Da (small molecule         scaffold). Examples include short peptides (e.g. comprising 10         amino acids), and various small molecule scaffolds (e.g.         aromatic ring structures).     -   In another embodiment the multimerization domain(s) is         preferably between 1,000 Da and 10,000 Da (small molecule         scaffold, small peptides, small polymers). Examples include         polycyclic structures of both aliphatic and aromatic compounds,         peptides comprising e.g. 10-100 amino acids, and other polymers         such as dextran, polyethylenglycol, and polyureas.     -   In another embodiment the multimerization domain(s) is between         10,000 Da and 100,000 Da (Small molecule scaffold, polymers e.g.         dextran, streptavidin, IgG, pentamer structure). Examples         include proteins and large polypeptides, small molecule         scaffolds such as steroids, dextran, dimeric streptavidin, and         multi-subunit proteins such as used in Pentamers.     -   In another embodiment the multimerization domain(s) is         preferably between 100,000 Da and 1,000,000 Da (Small molecule         scaffold, polymers e.g. dextran, streptavidin, IgG, pentamer         structure). Typical examples include larger polymers such as         dextran (used in e.g. Dextramers), and streptavidin tetramers.     -   In another embodiment the multimerization domain(s) is         preferably larger than 1,000,000 Da (Small molecule scaffold,         polymers e.g. dextran, streptavidin, IgG, pentamer structure,         cells, liposomes, artificial lipid bilayers, polystyrene beads         and other beads. Most examples of this size involve cells or         cell-based structures such as micelles and liposomes, as well as         beads and other solid supports.

As mentioned elsewhere herein multimerisation domains can comprise carrier molecules (connectors), scaffolds or combinations of the two.

Type of Multimerization Domain.

In principle any kind of carrier or scaffold can be used as multimerization domain, including any kind of cell, polymer, protein or other molecular structure, or particles and solid supports. Below different types and specific examples of multimerization domains are listed.

-   -   Cell. Cells can be used as carriers. Cells can be either alive         and mitotic active, alive and mitotic inactive as a result of         irradiation or chemically treatment, or the cells may be dead.         The MHC expression may be natural (i.e. not stimulated) or may         be induced/stimulated by e.g. Inf-y. Of special interest are         natural antigen presenting cells (APCs) such as dendritic cells,         macrophages, Kupfer cells, Langerhans cells, B-cells and any MHC         expressing cell either naturally expressing, being transfected         or being a hybridoma.     -   Cell-like structures. Cell-like carriers include membrane-based         structures carrying MHC-peptide complexes in their membranes         such as micelles, liposomes, and other structures of membranes,         and phages such as filamentous phages.     -   Solid support. Solid support includes beads, particulate matters         and other surfaces. A preferred embodiment include beads         (magnetic or non-magnetic beads) that carry electrophilic groups         e.g. divinyl sulfone activated polysaccharide, polystyrene beads         that have been functionalized with tosyl-activated esters,         magnetic polystyrene beads functionalized with tosyl-activated         esters), and where binding molecules such as MHC complexes may         be covalently immobilized to these by reaction of nucleophiles         comprised within the BM such as the MHC complex with the         electrophiles of the beads. Beads may be made of sepharose,         sephacryl, polystyrene, agarose, polysaccharide, polycarbamate         or any other kind of beads that can be suspended in aqueous         buffer.     -   Another embodiment includes surfaces, i.e. solid supports and         particles carrying immobilized binding molecules such as MHC         complexes on the surface. Of special interest are wells of a         microtiter plate or other plate formats, reagent tubes, glass         slides or other supports for use in microarray analysis, tubings         or channels of micro fluidic chambers or devices, Biacore chips         and beads     -   Molecule. Multimerization domains may also be molecules or         complexes of molecules held together by non-covalent bonds. The         molecules constituting the multimerization domain can be small         organic molecules or large polymers, and may be flexible linear         molecules or rigid, globular structures such as e.g. proteins.         Different kinds of molecules used in multimerization domains are         described below.         -   Small organic molecules. Small organic molecules here             includes steroids, peptides, linear or cyclic structures,             and aromatic or aliphatic structures, and many others. The             prototypical small organic scaffold is a functionalized             benzene ring, i.e. a benzene ring functionalized with a             number of reactive groups such as amines, to which a number             of binding molecules such as MHC molecules may be covalently             linked. However, the types of reactive groups constituting             the connector connecting the binding molecules such as MHC             complex and the multimerization domain, as well as the type             of scaffold structure, can be chosen from a long list of             chemical structures. A non-comprehensive list of scaffold             structures are listed below.         -   Typical scaffolds include aromatic structures,             benzodiazepines, hydantoins, piperazines, indoles, furans,             thiazoles, steroids, diketopiperazines, morpholines,             tropanes, coumarines, qinolines, pyrroles, oxazoles, amino             acid precursors, cyclic or aromatic ring structures, and             many others.         -   Typical carriers include linear and branched polymers such             as peptides, polysaccharides, nucleic acids, and many             others. Multimerization domains based on small organic or             polymer molecules thus include a wealth of different             structures, including small compact molecules, linear             structures, polymers, polypeptides, polyureas,             polycarbamates, cyclic structures, natural compound             derivatives, alpha-, beta-, gamma-, and omega-peptides,             mono-, di- and tri-substituted peptides, L- and D-form             peptides, cyclohexane- and cyclopentane-backbone modified             beta-peptides, vinylogous polypeptides, glycopolypeptides,             polyamides, vinylogous sulfonamide peptide,             Polysulfonamide-conjugated peptide (i.e., having prosthetic             groups), Polyesters, Polysaccharides such as dextran and             aminodextran, polycarbamates, polycarbonates, polyureas,             poly-peptidylphosphonates, Azatides, peptoids (oligo             N-substituted glycines), Polyethers, ethoxyformacetal             oligomers, poly-thioethers, polyethylene, glycols (PEG),             polyethylenes, polydisulfides, polyarylene sulfides,             Polynucleotides, PNAs, LNAs, Morpholinos, oligo pyrrolinone,             polyoximes, Polyimines, Polyethyleneimine, Polyacetates,             Polystyrenes, Polyacetylene, Polyvinyl, Lipids,             Phospholipids, Glycolipids, polycycles, (aliphatic),             polycycles (aromatic), polyheterocycles, Proteoglycan,             Polysiloxanes, Polyisocyanides, Polyisocyanates,             polymethacrylates, Monofunctional, Difunctional,             Trifunctional and Oligofunctional open-chain hydrocarbons,             Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and             Oligofunctional Nonaromat Carbocycles, Monocyclic, Bicyclic,             Tricyclic and Polycyclic Hydrocarbons, Bridged Polycyclic             Hydrocarbones, Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional             and Oligofunctional Nonaromatic, Heterocycles, Monocyclic,             Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Heterocycles, bridged             Polycyclic Heterocycles, Monofunctional, Difunctional,             Trifunctional and Oligofunctional Aromatic Carbocycles,             Monocyclic, Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Aromatic             Carbocycles, Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and             Oligofunctional Aromatic Hetero-cycles. Monocyclic,             Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Heterocycles. Chelates,             fullerenes, and any combination of the above and many             others.         -   Biological polymers. Biological molecules here include             peptides, proteins (including antibodies, coiled-coil             helices, streptavidin and many others), nucleic acids such             as DNA and RNA, and polysaccharides such as dextran. The             biological polymers may be reacted with MHC complexes (e.g.             a number of MHC complexes chemically coupled to e.g. the             amino groups of a protein), or may be linked through e.g.             DNA duplex formation between a carrier DNA molecule and a             number of DNA oligonucleotides each coupled to a MHC             complex. Another type of multimerization domain based on a             biological polymer is the streptavidin-based tetramer, where             a streptavidin binds up to four biotinylated MHC complexes,             as described above (see Background of the invention).         -   Self-assembling multimeric structures. Several examples of             commercial MHC multimers exist where the multimer is formed             through self-assembling. Thus, the Pentamers are formed             through formation of a coiled-coil structure that holds             together 5 MHC complexes in an apparently planar structure.             In a similar way, the Streptamers are based on the             Streptactin protein which oligomerizes to form a MHC             multimer comprising several MHC complexes.

In the following, alternative ways to make binding molecules such as MHC multimers based on a molecule multimerization domain are described. They involve one or more of the above-mentioned types of multimerization domains.

MHC dextramers can be made by coupling MHC complexes to dextran via a streptavidin-biotin interaction. In principle, biotin-streptavdin can be replaced by any dimerization domain, where one half of the dimerization domain is coupled to the MHC complex and the other half is coupled to dextran. For example, an acidic helix (one half of a coiled-coil dimer) is coupled or fused to MHC, and a basic helix (other half of a coiled-coil dimmer) is coupled to dextran. Mixing the two results in MHC binding to dextran by forming the acid/base coiled-coil structure.

Binding molecule dextramers can be made by coupling binding molecules to dextran via a streptavidin-biotin interaction. In principle, biotin-streptavdin can be replaced by any dimerization domain, where one half of the dimerization domain is coupled to the binding molecule and the other half is coupled to dextran. For example, an acidic helix (one half of a coiled-coil dimer) is coupled or fused to the BM, and a basic helix (other half of a coiled-coil dimmer) is coupled to dextran. Mixing the two results in the BM binding to dextran by forming the acid/base coiled-coil structure.

Antibodies can be used as scaffolds by using their capacity to bind to a carefully selected antigen found naturally or added as a tag to a part of the binding molecule such as the MHC molecule not involved in peptide binding. For example, IgG and IgE will be able to bind two binding molecules such as two MHC molecules, and IgM having a pentameric structure will be able to bind 10 binding molecules such as 10 MHC molecules. The antibodies can be full-length or truncated; a standard antibody-fragment includes the Fab2 fragment.

Peptides involved in coiled-coil structures can act as scaffold by making stable dimeric, trimeric, tetrameric and pentameric interactions. Examples hereof are the Fos-Jun heterodimeric coiled coil, the E. coli homo-trimeric coiled-coil domain Lpp-56, the engineered Trp-zipper protein forming a discrete, stable, a-helical pentamer in water at physiological pH.

Further examples of suitable scaffolds, carriers and connectors are streptavidin (SA) and avidin and derivatives thereof, biotin, immunoglobulins, antibodies (monoclonal, polyclonal, and recombinant), antibody fragments and derivatives thereof, leucine zipper domain of AP-1 (Jun and fos), hexa-his (metal chelate moiety), hexa-hat GST (glutathione S-tranferase), glutathione, Calmodulin-binding peptide (CBP), Strep-tag, Cellulose Binding Domain, Maltose Binding Protein, S-Peptide Tag, Chitin Binding Tag, Immuno-reactive Epitopes, Epitope Tags, E2Tag, HA Epitope Tag, Myc Epitope, FLAG Epitope, AU1 and AU5 Epitopes, Glu-Glu Epitope, KT3 Epitope, IRS Epitope, Btag Epitope, Protein Kinase-C Epitope, VSV Epitope, lectins that mediate binding to a diversity of compounds, including carbohydrates, lipids and proteins, e.g. Con A (Canavalia ensiformis) or WGA (wheat germ agglutinin) and tetranectin or Protein A or G (antibody affinity). Combinations of such binding entities are also comprised. Non-limiting examples are streptavidin-biotin and jun-fos. In particular, when the MHC molecule is tagged, the binding entity may be an “anti-tag”. By “anti-tag” is meant an antibody binding to the tag, or any other molecule capable of binding to such tag.

Wherein the binding molecule comprise MHC complexes, these can be multimerized by other means than coupling or binding to a multimerization domain. Thus, the multimerization domain may be formed during the multimerization of MHCs. One such method is to extend the bound antigenic peptide with dimerization domains. One end of the antigenic peptide is extended with dimerization domain A (e.g. acidic helix, half of a coiled-coil dimer) and the other end is extended with dimerization domain B (e.g. basic helix, other half of a coiled-coil dimer). When MHC complexes are loaded/mixed with these extended peptides the following multimer structure will be formed: A-MHC-BA-MHC-BA-MHC-B etc. The antigenic peptides in the mixture can either be identical or a mixture of peptides with comparable extended dimerization domains. Alternatively both ends of a peptide are extended with the same dimerization domain A and another peptide (same amino acid sequence or a different amino acid sequence) is extended with dimerization domain B. When MHC and peptides are mixed the following structures are formed: A-MHC-AB-MHC-BA-MHC-AB-MHC-B etc. Multimerization of MHC complexes by extension of peptides are restricted to MHC II molecules since the peptide binding groove of MHC I molecules is typically closed in both ends thereby limiting the size of peptide that can be embedded in the groove, and therefore preventing the peptide from extending out of the groove.

Another multimerization approach applicable to both MHC I and MHC II complexes is based on extension of N- and C-terminal of the MHC complex. For example the N-terminal of the MHC complex is extended with dimerization domain A and the C-terminal is extended with dimerization domain B. When MHC complexes are incubated together they pair with each other and form multimers like: A-MHC-BA-MHC-BA-MHC-BA-MHC-B etc. Alternatively the N-terminal and the C-terminal of a MHC complex are both extended with dimerization domain A and the N-terminal and C-terminal of another preparation of MHC complex (either the same or a different MHC) are extended with dimerization domain B. When these two types of MHC complexes are incubated together multimers will be formed: A-MHC-AB-MHC-BA-MHC-AB-MHC-B etc.

In all the above-described examples the extension can be either chemically coupled to the peptide/MHC complex or introduced as extension by gene fusion. Dimerization domain AB can be any molecule pair able to bind to each other, such as acid/base coiled-coil helices, antibody-antigen, DNA-DNA, PNA-PNA, DNA-PNA, DNA-RNA, LNA-DNA, leucine zipper e.g. Fos/Jun, streptavidin-biotin and other molecule pairs as described elsewhere herein.

In one embodiment the one or more multimerization domains each have a molecular weight of from 50,000 Da to preferably less than 1,000,000 Da, such as from 50,000 Da to 980,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 160,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 140,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 120,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 100,000; for example from 50,000 Da to 80,000; such as from 50,000 Da to 60,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 1,000,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 980,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 160,000; such as from 100,000 Da to 140,000; for example from 100,000 Da to 120,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 1,000,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 960,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 940,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 920,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 900,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 880,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 860,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 840,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 820,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 800,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 780,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 760,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 740,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 720,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 700,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 680,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 660,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 640,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 620,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 600,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 580,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 560,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 540,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 520,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 500,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 480,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 460,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 440,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 420,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 400,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 380,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 360,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 340,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 320,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 300,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 280,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 260,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 240,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 220,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 200,000; such as from 150,000 Da to 180,000; for example from 150,000 Da to 160,000.

Connector

In one embodiment a number of binding molecules (BM) associate with a multimerization domain to form a binding molecule multimer (BM multimer). The association may be direct—between the binding molecule and the multimerization domain, or may be via an association with a connector, such as a connector molecule, which interconnects the binding molecule and the multimerization domain. A multimerization domain with a connector is an example of linkers according to the present invention,

In another embodiment the linker of the detection molecule comprises or consists of one or more connectors and/or connector molecules. Connectors may be formed of chemical bonds and/or molecules.

The attachment of binding molecules to the multimerization domain may involve covalent or non-covalent connectors, and may involve small reactive groups as well as large protein-protein interactions. The coupling of multimerization domains and binding molecules involve the association of an entity X (attached to or part of the multimerization domain) and an entity Y (attached to or part of the binding molecule and/or label). Thus, the connector that connects the multimerization domain and the binding molecule comprises an XY portion.

A connector according to the invention in on one embodiment comprises one or more chemical bond formed between the linker/multimerization domain, and each of the binding molecules and labels.

A connector according to the invention in on one embodiment comprises one or more connector molecules associated with the linker/multimerization domain, and each of the binding molecules and labels.

In one embodiment, a number of MHC complexes associate with a multimerization domain to form a MHC multimer. The attachment of MHC complexes to the multimerization domain may involve covalent or non-covalent connectors, and may involve small reactive groups as well as large protein-protein interactions.

The coupling of multimerization domains and MHC complexes involve the association of an entity X (attached to or part of the multimerization domain) and an entity Y (attached to or part of the MHC complex and/or label). Thus, the connector that connects the multimerization domain and the MHC complex comprises an XY portion.

-   -   Covalent connector. The XY linkage can be covalent, in which         case X and Y are reactive groups. In this case, X can be a         nucleophilic group (such as —NH₂, —OH, —SH, —NH—NH₂), and Y an         electrophilic group (such as CHO, COOH, CO) that react to form a         covalent bond XY; or Y can be a nucleophilic group and X an         electrophilic group that react to form a covalent bond XY. Other         possibilities exist, e.g either of the reactive groups can be a         radical, capable of reacting with the other reactive group.     -   X and Y can be reactive groups naturally comprised within the         multimerization domain and/or the binding molecule such as MHC         complex, or they can be artificially added reactive groups.         Thus, connectors containing reactive groups can be linked to         either of the multimerization domain and binding molecule such         as MHC complex; subsequently the introduced reactive group(s)         can be used to covalently link the multimerization domain and         binding molecule such as MHC complex.     -   Example natural reactive groups of binding molecule such as MHC         complexes include amino acid side chains comprising —NH₂, —OH,         —SH, and —NH—. Example natural reactive groups of         multimerization domains include hydroxyls of polysaccharides         such as dextrans, but also include amino acid side chains         comprising —NH₂, —OH, —SH, and —NH— of polypeptides, when the         polypeptide is used as a multimerization domain.     -   In some MHC multimers, one of the polypeptides of the MHC         complex (i.e. the β2M, heavy chain or the antigenic peptide) is         linked by a protein fusion to the multimerization domain. Thus,         during the translation of the fusion protein, an acyl group         (reactive group X or Y) and an amino group (reactive group Y         or X) react to form an amide bond. Example MHC multimers where         the bond between the multimerization domain and the MHC complex         is covalent and results from reaction between natural reactive         groups, include MHC-pentamers (described in US         patent 2004209295) and MHC-dimers, where the linkage between         multimerization domain and MHC complex is in both cases         generated during the translation of the fusion protein.     -   Example artificial reactive groups include reactive groups that         are attached to the multimerization domain or the binding         molecule such as MHC complex, through association of a connector         molecule comprising the reactive group. The activation of         dextran by reaction of the dextran hydroxyls with divinyl         sulfone, introduces a reactive vinyl group that can react with         e.g. amines of the binding molecule such as MHC complex, to form         an amine that now links the multimerization domain (the dextran         polymer) and the binding molecule such as MHC complex. An         alternative activation of the dextran multimerization domain         involves a multistep reaction that results in the decoration of         the dextran with maleimide groups, as described in the patent         Siiman et al. U.S. Pat. No. 6,387,622. In this approach, the         amino groups of MHC complexes are converted to —SH groups,         capable of reacting with the maleimide groups of the activated         dextran. Thus, in the latter example, both the reactive group of         the multimerization domain (the maleimide) and the reactive         group of the MHC complex (the thiol) are artificially         introduced.     -   Sometimes activating reagents are used in order to make the         reactive groups more reactive. For example, acids such as         glutamate or aspartate can be converted to activated esters by         addition of e.g. carbodiimid and NHS or nitrophenol, or by         converting the acid moiety to a tosyl-activated ester. The         activated ester reacts efficiently with a nucleophile such as         —NH₂, —SH, —OH, etc.     -   For the purpose of this invention, the multimerization domains         (including small organic scaffold molecules, proteins, protein         complexes, polymers, beads, liposomes, micelles, cells) that         form a covalent bond with the binding molecules such as MHC         complexes can be divided into separate groups, depending on the         nature of the reactive group that the multimerization domain         contains. One group comprise multimerization domains that carry         nucleophilic groups (e.g. —NH₂, —OH, —SH, —CN, —NH—NH₂),         exemplified by polysaccharides, polypeptides containing e.g.         lysine, serine, and cysteine; another group of multimerization         domains carry electrophilic groups (e.g. —COOH, —CHO, —CO,         NHS-ester, tosyl-activated ester, and other activated esters,         acid-anhydrides), exemplified by polypeptides containing e.g.         glutamate and aspartate, or vinyl sulfone activated dextran; yet         another group of multimerization domains carry radicals or         conjugated double bonds.     -   Likewise, binding molecules such as MHC complexes can be divided         into separate groups, depending on the nature of the reactive         group comprised within the binding molecule. One group comprise         binding molecules such as MHCs that carry nucleophilic groups         (e.g. —NH₂, —OH, —SH, —CN, —NH—NH₂), e.g. lysine, serine, and         cysteine; another group of binding molecules such as MHCs carry         electrophilic groups (e.g. —COOH, —CHO, —CO, NHS-ester,         tosyl-activated ester, and other activated esters,         acid-anhydrides), exemplified by e.g. glutamate and aspartate;         yet another group of binding molecules such as MHCs carry         radicals or conjugated double bonds.     -   The reactive groups of the binding molecule such as MHC complex         are either carried by the amino acids of the binding molecule         such as MHC-peptide complex (and may be comprised by any of the         peptides of the MHC-peptide complex, including the antigenic         peptide), or alternatively, the reactive group of the binding         molecule such as MHC complex has been introduced by covalent or         non-covalent attachment of a molecule containing the appropriate         reactive group.     -   Preferred reactive groups in this regard include —CSO₂OH,         phenylchloride, —SH, —SS, aldehydes, hydroxyls, isocyanate,         thiols, amines, esters, thioesters, carboxylic acids, triple         bonds, double bonds, ethers, acid chlorides, phosphates,         imidazoles, halogenated aromatic rings, any precursors thereof,         or any protected reactive groups, and many others.     -   Reactions that may be employed include acylation (formation of         amide, pyrazolone, isoxazolone, pyrimidine, comarine,         quinolinon, phthalhydrazide, diketopiperazine, benzodiazepinone,         and hydantoin), alkylation, vinylation, disulfide formation,         Wittig reaction, Horner-Wittig-Emmans reaction, arylation         (formation of biaryl or vinylarene), condensation reactions,         cycloadditions ((2+4), (3+2)), addition to carbon-carbon         multiplebonds, cycloaddition to multiple bonds, addition to         carbon-hetero multiple bonds, nucleophilic aromatic         substitution, transition metal catalyzed reactions, and may         involve formation of ethers, thioethers, secondary amines,         tertiary amines, beta-hydroxy ethers, beta-hydroxy thioethers,         beta-hydroxy amines, beta-amino ethers, amides, thioamides,         oximes, sulfonamides, di- and tri-functional compounds,         substituted aromatic compounds, vinyl substituted aromatic         compounds, alkyn substituted aromatic compounds, biaryl         compounds, hydrazines, hydroxylamine ethers, substituted         cycloalkenes, substituted cyclodienes, substituted 1, 2, 3         triazoles, substituted cycloalkenes, beta-hydroxy ketones,         beta-hydroxy aldehydes, vinyl ketones, vinyl aldehydes,         substituted alkenes, substituted alkenes, substituted amines,         and many others.     -   Binding molecule dextramers, preferably MHC dextramers, can be         made by covalent coupling of binding molecules such as MHC         complexes to the dextran backbone, e.g. by chemical coupling of         binding molecules such as MHC complexes to dextran backbones.     -   The MHC complexes can be coupled through either heavy chain or         β2-microglobulin if the MHC complexes are MHC I or through         α-chain or β-chain if the MHC complexes are MHC II. MHC         complexes can be coupled as folded complexes comprising heavy         chain/beta2microglobulin or α-chain/β-chain or either         combination together with peptide in the peptide-binding cleft.         Alternatively either of the protein chains can be coupled to         dextran and then folded in vitro together with the other chain         of the MHC complex not coupled to dextran and together with         peptide.     -   Direct coupling of binding molecules such as MHC complexes to         dextran multimerization domain can be via an amino group or via         a sulphide group. Either group can be a natural component of the         binding molecule such as MHC complex or attached to the binding         molecules such as MHC complex chemically. Alternatively, a         cysteine may be introduced into the genes of the binding         molecules such as either chain of the MHC complex.     -   Another way to covalently link binding molecules such as MHC         complexes to dextran multimerization domains is to use the         antigenic peptide as a connector between MHC and dextran.         Connectors containing antigenic peptide at one end is coupled to         dextran. Antigenic peptide here means a peptide able to bind MHC         complexes in the peptide-binding cleft. As an example, 10 or         more antigenic peptides may be coupled to one dextran molecule.         When MHC complexes are added to such peptide-dextran construct         the MHC complexes will bind the antigenic peptides and thereby         MHC-peptide complexes are displayed around the dextran         multimerization domain. The antigenic peptides can be identical         or different from each other. Similarly MHC complexes can be         either identical or different from each other as long as they         are capable of binding one or more of the peptides on the         dextran multimerization domain.     -   Non-covalent connector. The linkage moleculethat connects the         multimerization domain and the binding molecule such as MHC         complex comprises an XY portion. Above different kinds of         covalent linkages XY were described. However, the XY linkage can         also be non-covalent.     -   Non-covalent XY linkages can comprise natural dimerization pairs         such as antigen-antibody pairs, DNA-DNA interactions, or can         include natural interactions between small molecules and         proteins, e.g. between biotin and streptavidin. Artificial XY         examples include XY pairs such as His₆ tag (X) interacting with         Ni-NTA (Y) and PNA-PNA interactions.     -   Protein-protein interactions. The non-covalent connector may         comprise a complex of two or more polypeptides or proteins, held         together by non-covalent interactions. Example polypeptides and         proteins belonging to this group include Fos/Jun, Acid/Base         coiled coil structure, antibody/antigen (where the antigen is a         peptide), and many others.     -   A preferred embodiment involving non-covalent interactions         between polypeptides and/or proteins are represented by the         Pentamer structure described in US patent 2004209295.     -   Another preferred embodiment involves the use of antibodies,         with affinity for the surface of the binding molecule (BM).         Thus, an anti-BM antibody, with its two binding sites, will bind         two binding molecules and in this way generate a bivalent BM         multimer. In addition, the antibody can stabilize the BM through         the binding interactions.     -   Another preferred embodiment involves the use of antibodies,         with affinity for the surface of MHC opposite to the         peptide-binding groove. Thus, an anti-MHC antibody, with its two         binding sites, will bind two MHC complexes and in this way         generate a bivalent MHC multimer. In addition, the antibody can         stabilize the MHC complex through the binding interactions. This         is particularly relevant for MHC class II complexes, as these         are less stable than class I MHC complexes.     -   Polynucleotide-polynucleotide interactions. The non-covalent         connector may comprise nucleotides that interact non-covalently.         Example interactions include PNA/PNA, DNA/DNA, RNA/RNA, LNA/DNA,         and any other nucleic acid duplex structure, and any combination         of such natural and unnatural polynucleotides such as DNA/PNA,         RNA/DNA, and PNA/LNA.

Protein-small molecule interactions. The non-covalent connector may comprise a macromolecule (e.g. protein, polynucleotide) and a small molecule ligand of the macromolecule. The interaction may be natural (i.e., found in Nature, such as the Streptavidin/biotin interaction) or non-natural (e.g. His-tag peptide/Ni-NTA interaction). Example interactions include Streptavidin/biotin and anti-biotin antibody/biotin.

-   -   Combinations—non-covalent connector molecules. Other         combinations of proteins, polynucleotides, small organic         molecules, and other molecules, may be used to link the MHC to         the multimerization domain. These other combinations include         protein-DNA interactions (e.g. DNA binding protein such as the         gene regulatory protein CRP interacting with its DNA recognition         sequence), RNA aptamer-protein interactions (e.g. RNA aptamer         specific for growth hormone interacting with growth hormone)     -   Synthetic molecule-synthetic molecule interaction. The         non-covalent connector may comprise a complex of two or more         organic molecules, held together by non-covalent interactions.         Example interactions are two chelate molecules binding to the         same metal ion (e.g. EDTA-Ni⁺⁺-NTA), or a short polyhistidine         peptide (e.g. His₆) bound to NTA-Ni⁺⁺.

In another preferred embodiment the multimerization domain is a bead. The bead is covalently or non-covalently coated with binding molecules, such as BM multimers or BM monomers, for example MHC multimers or single MHC complexes, through non-cleavable or cleavable connectors. As an example, the bead can be coated with streptavidin monomers, which in turn are associated with biotinylated binding molecules such as MHC complexes; or the bead can be coated with streptavidin tetramers, each of which are associated with 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 biotinylated binding molecules such as MHC complexes; or the bead can be coated with BM-dextramers such as MHC-dextramers where e.g. the reactive groups of the BM- or MHC-dextramer (e.g. the divinyl sulfone-activated dextran backbone) has reacted with nucleophilic groups on the bead, to form a covalent linkage between the dextran of the dextramer and the beads.

In another preferred embodiment, the binding molecule multimers such as MHC multimers described above (e.g. where the multimerization domain is a bead) further contains a flexible or rigid, and water soluble, connector that allows for the immobilized binding molecules such as MHC complexes to interact efficiently with cells; such as T-cells with affinity for the MHC complexes. In yet another embodiment, the connector is cleavable, allowing for release of the binding molecules such as MHC complexes from the bead. If T-cells have been immobilized, by binding to the BMs such as MHC complexes, the T-cells can very gently be released by cleavage of this cleavable connector. Most preferably, the connector is cleaved at physiological conditions, allowing for the integrity of the isolated cells.

Further examples of connector molecules that may be employed in the present invention include Calmodulin-binding peptide (CBP), 6×HIS, Protein A, Protein G, biotin, Avidine, Streptavidine, Strep-tag, Cellulose Binding Domain, Maltose Binding Protein, S-Peptide Tag, Chitin Binding Tag, Immuno-reactive Epitopes, Epitope Tags, GST tagged proteins, E2Tag, HA Epitope Tag, Myc Epitope, FLAG Epitope, AU1 and AU5 Epitopes, Glu-Glu Epitope, KT3 Epitope, IRS Epitope, Btag Epitope, Protein Kinase-C Epitope, VSV Epitope.

The list of dimerization- and multimerization domains, described elsewhere in this document, define alternative non-covalent connectors between the multimerization domain and the binding molecule such as the MHC complex.

The abovementioned dimerization- and multimerization domains represent specific binding interactions. Another type of non-covalent interactions involves the non-specific adsorption of e.g. proteins onto surfaces. As an example, the non-covalent adsorption of proteins onto glass beads represents this class of XY interactions. Likewise, the interaction of binding molecules such as MHC complexes (comprising full-length polypeptide chains, including the transmembrane portion) with the cell membrane of for example dendritic cells is an example of a non-covalent, primarily non-specific XY interaction.

In some of the abovementioned embodiments, several multimerization domains (e.g. streptavidin tetramers bound to biotinylated MHC complexes) are linked to another multimerization domain (e.g. the bead). For the purpose of this invention we shall call both the smaller and the bigger multimerization domain, as well as the combined multimerization domain, for multimerization domain.

Kit of Parts

The composition of the invention may form part of a kit. Thus, yet an aspect of the invention relates to a kit of parts comprising

-   -   a. one or more detection molecules, wherein each detection         molecule or set of detection molecules are as disclosed herein         throughout, and     -   b. one or more additional components.

In one embodiment the kit of parts comprises

-   -   a composition comprising a detection molecule, wherein said         detection molecule comprises a DNA molecule label, according to         the invention; and     -   one or more sets of primers for amplifying the nucleic acid         molecule label, such as DNA molecule label.

In one embodiment said additional components comprise reagents for detecting and/or amplifying the label of the detection molecule.

In one embodiment said additional components comprise reagents for detecting and/or amplifying the nucleic acid label of the detection molecule.

In one embodiment said additional components comprise one or more primer sets capable of amplifying the label of the nucleic acid label, such as amplifying the barcode region of the nucleic acid label via hybridization to the primer regions of the nucleic acid label.

Detection Method

It is an aspect of the invention to provide a detection method comprising one or more steps of:

-   -   a. Combining a sample with at least one detection molecule;         wherein the detection molecule comprises a binding molecule         (BM), a linker (Li), and a label (La), each as defined according         to the present invention; and wherein said sample comprises at         least one cell and/or entity,     -   b. Incubating the at least one detection molecule and the         sample;     -   c. Isolating and/or detecting the at least one detection         molecule of step b), and     -   d. Optionally determining the identity of the at least one         detection molecule of step c).

It is understood that each step of the detection method, namely the sample, the isolation and/or detection and the determination of label, individually can be selected from any of the samples, isolation and/or detection steps and determination of label steps disclosed herein throughout. Thus, any combination of sample, isolation and/or detection and determination of label are encompassed within the present disclosure and invention.

In one embodiment there is provided a method comprising the following steps:

-   -   a. Combining at least one cell with at least one detection         molecule, wherein the detection molecule comprises a binding         molecule (BM), a linker (Li), and a label (La);     -   b. Allowing the detection molecules to recognize and bind cells         through their binding molecule (BM);     -   c. Detecting and/or isolating cell-detection molecule complexes         formed in step (b); and     -   d. Identifying detection molecules capable of binding to a cell         in step (b)

Also provided is a method for detecting antigen-responsive cells in a sample comprising:

-   -   a. providing one or more multimeric major histocompatibility         complexes (MHC's) according to the invention or a composition         according to the invention;     -   b. contacting said multimeric MHC's with said sample; and     -   c. detecting binding of the multimeric MHC's to said antigen         responsive cells, thereby detecting cells responsive to an         antigen present in a set of MHC's; wherein said binding is         detected by amplifying the barcode region of said nucleic acid         molecule linked to the one or more MHC's.

It is understood that the detection molecule and each of the components of the detection molecule (BM, Li and La) referred to in the detection methods of the invention can individual be as outlined herein elsewhere.

The detection molecules and methods (e.g. detection methods) of the present invention can be used for or applied in a number of methods and assays. The assays for which the detection molecules and the methods of using same can be employed include assays for recognizing or detecting well-known targets or epitopes (such as diagnosis, detection of antigen-specific T-cells), and assays for investigating novel or unknown targets or epitopes (such as epitope discovery, whereby the binding properties of the detection molecule are unknown).

Methods include, but are not limited to one or more of: epitope discovery, analytical studies, diagnosis, therapy/treatment, detection of antigen-responsive cells, detection of antigen-specific T-cells, characterization of cells of their detection molecule-binding properties, T-cell epitope mapping, immune-related therapies, immune-recognition discovery and measuring immune reactivity after vaccination.

In one embodiment the present invention allows for detection of multiple antigen-responsive cells present in the same sample, wherein said antigen-responsive cells have different specificities and detect different antigens and/or epitopes. This can be achieved since each detection molecule has a unique and detectable label (La) associated with a specific binding molecule (BM) for the antigen-responsive cell.

In one embodiment the detection method further comprises one or more steps of providing a sample, preferably a sample comprising at least one entity and/or at least one cell.

In one embodiment the detection method further comprises one or more steps of pre-treatment of the sample, and/or pre-treatment of cells of the sample.

The method thus in one embodiment involves first the mixing of one or more detection molecules capable of binding certain cells with a sample comprising cells, followed by complex formation between some or all of the detection molecules and some or all of the cells, and finally detection and/or isolation of the cell-detection molecule complexes formed.

It follows that in step b) the one or more detection molecules are allowed to associate with, recognize, and/or bind to said at least one cell and/or entity through their binding molecule.

The detection method in some embodiment further comprises one or more steps of separating unbound detection molecules from cell- or entity-detection molecule complexes.

The detection method in some embodiment further comprises one or more steps of removing unbound detection molecules by washing and/or centrifuging.

In one embodiment in step c) and d) said detection molecule is comprised in a cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule complex.

In another embodiment in step c) and d) said detection molecule is not comprised in a cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule complex.

In one embodiment in step c) and d) said detection molecule is no longer comprised in a cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule complex, wherein said detection molecule has previously interacted with a cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule complex.

In steps c) and/or d) of the detection method the sorting and/or detecting thus ensues on the detection molecule per se, or the cell-detection molecule complex (or entity-detection molecule complex).

In one embodiment step c) comprises isolating and detecting the at least one detection molecule.

In one embodiment step c) comprises first isolating and then detecting the at least one detection molecule.

In one embodiment step c) comprises detecting the at least one detection molecule.

In one embodiment step c) comprises isolating the at least one detection molecule.

In one embodiment step c) comprises first detecting and then isolating the at least one detection molecule.

The isolation in step c) may be performed by any method known to the skilled person. Isolation is used interchangeably with enrichment and cell sorting herein.

In a particular embodiment the detection molecule further comprises one or more fluorescent labels, which are useful in the sorting of specific cell populations. Examples of specific cell populations include T-cells (CD8 or CD4 restricted), other immune cells or specifically MHC multimer binding T-cells

In one embodiment, specific cell populations are sorted by methods comprising one or more of flow cytometry, FACS sorting, centrifugation, washing, precipitation, filtration and affinity column sorting, or any other means of cell sorting/selection.

In one embodiment in step c) isolating comprises sorting of cell populations based on the functional response to a stimuli (responsive or non-responsive population), such as cytokine secretion, phosphorylation, calcium release.

In one embodiment in step c) isolating comprises sorting of cell populations based on phenotype, such as by linking a certain set of phenotypic characteristics to the antigen-responsiveness.

In one embodiment in step c) isolating comprises immobilization of the detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes, such as by precipitating cells, such as by centrifugation, by immunoprecipitation, or any other means that precipitates the cells. or by binding the cell-detection molecule complexes to a bead, a particle, another surface, an antibody or an MHC complex.

In one embodiment said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes comprises hybridization onto an array.

In one embodiment said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes by hybridization onto an array comprises a nucleic acid/nucleic acid-interaction between the nucleic acid label of the detection molecule and an antisense nucleic acid sequence in the array.

In one embodiment said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes by hybridization onto an array comprises a DNA/DNA-interaction between the DNA label of the detection molecule and an antisense DNA in the array.

In one embodiment said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises one or more steps of adding primary antibodies that bind to the immobilized detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes and detecting said primary antibodies directly wherein the primary antibody is labelled, or indirectly by adding labelled secondary antibodies.

In one embodiment said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises one or more steps of detecting the immobilized detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes by monitoring read-out from a second label such as a fluorophore.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises interaction between ‘coating DNA’ on the cell surface and the DNA label of the detection molecule.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises protease cleavage of the peptide label of the detection molecule.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises transfer of a cell surface moiety to the detection molecule (e.g. a ‘peptide tag’).

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises detection of the label based on the physical characteristics of the label, including mass, sequence, charge, volume, size, dimensions, fluorescence, absorption, emission, NMR spectra and others.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises amplification of the label.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises sequencing of the label (e.g. DNA sequencing, peptide sequencing).

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises amplification of the barcode sequence of a nucleic acid label by PCR and/or sequencing of the barcode sequence.

In one embodiment sequencing comprises deep sequencing or next generation sequencing.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises mass spectrometry.

In one embodiment detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in step d) comprises one or more of gel electrophoresis, gel filtration, PAGE, column fractionation, PCR and QPCR.

The detection method in some embodiments further comprises one or more steps of single-cell sorting and sequencing, such as single-cell T cell sorting of and single-cell TCR sequencing.

In an aspect of the present invention a nucleic acid label comprising a barcode will serve as a specific label for a given binding molecule, such as a peptide-MHC molecule that is multimerized to form a MHC multimer. The multimer can be composed of MHC class I, class II, CD1 or other MHC-like molecules. Thus, when the term MHC multimers is used this includes all MHC-like molecules. The MHC multimer is formed through multimerization of peptide-MHC molecules via different backbones. The barcode will be co-attached to the multimer and serve as a specific label for a particular peptide-MHC complex. In this way up to 1000 to 10.000 (or potentially even more) different peptide-MHC multimers can be mixed, allow specific interaction with T-cells from blood or other biological specimens, wash-out unbound MHC-multimers and determine the sequence of the DNA-barcodes. When selecting a cell population of interest, the sequence of barcodes present above background level, will provide a fingerprint for identification of the antigen responsive cells present in the given cell-population. The number of sequence-reads for each specific barcode will correlate with the frequency of specific T-cells, and the frequency can be estimated by comparing the frequency of reads to the input-frequency of T-cells. This strategy may expand our understanding of T-cell recognition.

In one embodiment a nucleic acid-label, DNA-label or DNA-barcode serves as a specific label for certain antigen specific T-cells and can be used to determine the specificity of a T-cell after e.g. single-cell sorting, functional analyses or phenotypical assessments. In this way antigen specificity can be linked to both the T-cell receptor sequence (that can be revealed by single-cell sequencing methods) and functional and phenotypical characteristics of the antigen specific cells.

Furthermore, this strategy may allow for attachment of several different (sequence related) peptide-MHC multimers to a given T-cell—with the binding avidity of the given peptide-MHC multimer determining the relative contribution of each peptide-MHC multimer to the binding of cell-surface TCRs. By applying this feature it is possible to allow the determination of the fine-specificity/consensus recognition sequence of a given TCR by use of overlapping peptide libraries or alanine substitution peptide libraries. Such determination is not possible with current MHC multimer-based technologies.

As previously described a pool (library) of different sets of multimeric major histocompatibility complexes (MHC's) may be used to analyze an overall cell population for its specificity for peptides. Thus, another aspect of the invention relates to a composition comprising a subset of multimeric major histocompatibility complexes (MHC's) according to the invention, wherein each set of MHC's has a different peptide, decisive for T cell recognition and a unique “barcode” region in the DNA molecule. In the present context, it is to be understood that each specific multimeric major histocompatibility complex is present in the composition with a certain number and that there is subset of different multimeric major histocompatibility complexes present in the composition.

Preferably all specific region for each multimeric MHC can be determined with only a few primer sets, preferably only one primer set. Thus, in an embodiment the primer regions in the DNA molecule are identical for each set of MHC's. In this way only one primer set is required. In an alternative embodiment, the mulitmeric MHC's are grouped by different primer sets, thereby allowing multiplication of different sets of the multimeric MHCs. In this way background noise may be limited, while also retrieving information of specific bindings. Thus, different primer set for different sets of MHC's may be used.

The number of individual sets of multimeric MHC's may vary. Thus, in an embodiment the composition comprises at least 10 different sets of multimeric MHC's such as at least 100, such as at least 500, at least 1000, at least 5000, such as in the range 10-50000, such as 10-1000 or such as 50-500 sets of MHC's.

Through analyses of barcode-sequence data, the antigen specificity of cells in the specimen can be determined. When DNA-barcode #1 is detected above background level of reads it means that peptide-MHC multimer #1 was preferentially bound to the selected cell type. Same goes for barcode no. 2, 3, 4, 5, . . . etc. up to the potential combination of more than 1000 (but not restricted to this particular number). When the number of input cells are known, e.g. when cell populations of interest is captured via a fluorescence signal also attached to the multimer by flow cytometry-based sorting or other means of capturing/sorting, the specific T-cell frequency can be calculated comparing the frequency of barcode-reads to the number of sorted T-cells.

In a particular embodiment the cells have not been permeabilized or lysed and therefore the detection molecules bind predominantly to the outer surface of the cells. In one embodiment the cells are intact, the cell membrane of the cells are intact.

In a particular embodiment the cells are permeable to the detection molecules wherefore the detection molecules bind to the outer surface of the cell as well as one or more components of the interior of the cell.

In a preferred embodiment, the combining of one or more cells (step a.), followed by incubation to allow binding (step b.), is performed in a buffer, such as a buffer selected from the group consisting of a PBS buffer, a Tris buffer, a phosphate buffer and any other buffer with appropriate ionic strength and pH, suitable for formation of the cell-detection molecule complexes.

In a preferred embodiment the detecting of the cell-detection molecule complexes is done by first spinning down the cells (and the detection molecules attached to the cells), removing the supernatant, optionally washing one or more times, and optionally amplifying the DNA oligonucleotide labels e.g. by PCR, then identifying the DNA label of the detection molecules still bound to the cells by e.g. sequencing of the DNA or by running polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis to identify different DNA oligonucleotides based on their differential migration in the gel, thereby identifying the detection molecules capable of binding cells.

As known to the skilled person, unbound molecules should preferably be removed. Thus, in an embodiment unbound (multimeric) MHC's are removed before amplification, e.g. by washing and/or spinning e.g. followed by removing of the supernatant.

The detection of the barcode in one embodiment includes sequencing of the amplified barcode regions. Thus, in an embodiment the detection of barcode regions includes sequencing of said barcode region, such as by deep sequencing or next generation sequencing.

In a preferred embodiment the isolation of cell-detection molecule complexes of step c. is done by immobilization of a population of cells by binding to a marker molecule attached to a surface such as the bottom of a well of a microtiter plate, a bead such as a magnetic polystyrene bead, or a glass plate, where the marker molecule binds to all or a subset of the cells.

In a preferred embodiment the marker molecule is an antibody against the CD8 or CD4 receptor of T cells, and the binding molecule of the detection molecule is a pMHC complex or a number of pMHC complexes, where the pMHC are of class I or class II, respectively.

In a preferred embodiment the cell-detection moleculecomplexes are first isolated, and then diluted and aliquoted into separate wells, under conditions where the majority of wells as a result will contain zero or one cell, and wherefore the detection molecules bound to each individual cell may be determined.

It may also be advantageously to be able to sort the cells. Thus, in an embodiment the method further comprises cell sorting by e.g. flow cytometry such as FACS. This may e.g. be done if the backbone is equipped with a fluorescent marker. Thus, unbound cells may also be removed/sorted.

In a preferred embodiment, the method is performed on known negative control cell samples (i.e. cell samples that are known to not contain cells that can bind to the detection molecules used in the method) to ensure that non-specific (“faulty”) binding events occur. The method will typically be performed in parallel using two cell samples: one that contain cells that may comprise cells with binding affinity for one or more of the detection molecules; and one cell sample that does not contain cells with significant affinity for one or more detection molecules.

In a preferred embodiment, the method is performed including a negative control detection molecule (i.e. a detection molecule that is expected to not bind any of the cells).

In a preferred embodiment, the method is performed including a positive control detection molecule (i.e. a detection molecule that is expected to bind one or some of the cells).

As also known to the skilled person, the measured values are preferably compared to a reference level. Thus, in an embodiment said binding detection includes comparing measured values to a reference level, e.g. a negative control and/or total level of response in the sample. In a further embodiment, said amplification is PCR such as QPCR.

Isolating and/or Detecting Detection Molecules

Isolating detection molecules that are complexes with a certain cell, or that have been in contact with a certain cell, can be done in many ways.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that are in contact with the cells are enriched by removing detection molecules that are not in contact with cells. This can for example be done by centrifugation of the mixture of detection molecules and cell, whereby cells are precipitated along with the detection molecules that bind them. When the supernatant is then removed, the detection molecules that do not bind the cells are removed. As a result, the detection molecules that bind the cells are enriched for.

In one embodiment the incubation mixture of detection molecules and cells is centrifuged, in order to precipitate the cells, and thereby the detection molecules bound to the cells. When the supernatant is the removed, the detection molecules that did not bind to cells are removed as well. Optionally, one may repeat centrifugation and resuspension one or more times, and then finally the enriched pool of detection molecules can be examined, e.g. the identity and quantity of the recovered detection molecules may be determined.

In one embodiment the incubation mixture of detection molecules and cells is centrifuged, in order to precipitate the cells, and thereby the detection molecules bound to the cells. When the supernatant is then removed, the detection molecules that did not bind to cells are removed as well. Optionally, one may repeat centrifugation and resuspension one or more times, and then finally the enriched pool of detection molecules can be examined, e.g. the identity and quantity of the recovered detection molecules may be determined. In one embodiment the resulting detection molecules, still bound to cells, may be released from the cells, by e.g. mild acid or mild base treatment or protease treatment if the binding molecule or linker is a peptide. Once released, the detection molecules may be examined by hybridization to an array of anti-sense molecules. For example, if the labels of e.g. 100 detection molecules are oligonucloetide labels of different sequence, the array can comprise the corresponding 100 complementary sequences, positioned in a way so that a given position or area of the array comprises only oligonucleotides of a given sequence. The identity of the oligonucleotide label and hence the detection molecule to which it is bound, can then be determined when examining to which position in the array that it anneals.

In another embodiment of the above embodiment, the cells and detection molecules are not separated before applying the cell-detection molecule complexes to the array. As a result, the cells will become immobilized on the array at those positions where the sequence of the oligonucleotide label of the detection molecule bound to said cell is complementary to the oligonucleotide of the array. This way, both the identity of the recovered detection molecules, as well as the number of cells capable of binding said detection molecules, can be deduced from the array.

In the two embodiments immediately above, the binding of detection molecules to the array is detected for example by adding antibodies that bind the binding molecule, and then staining these antibodies using secondary antibodies and e.g. chromophores or fluorophores as a readout, using standard procedures. Alternatively, the detection molecule can simply carry a signal molecule, such as a fluorophore.

In one embodiment the incubation mixture of detection molecules and cells is centrifuged, under conditions and buffer choice where a gradient develops in the centrifugation vial. As a result of the gradient being established in the centrifugation vial, the cells and detection molecules and cell-detection molecule complexes will be distributed along the gradient according to their weight and volume. Different cell types with different characteristics will locate to different positions in the gradient. Therefore, cells of different kinds, along with the detection molecules that bind to them, can be recovered from specific positions along the gradient. Unbound detection molecules will locate far from the cells. After collecting the cells and detection molecules bound to these cells, from a given position in the gradient, the identity and quantity of the recovered detection molecules may be determined.

In one embodiment the incubation mixture of detection molecules and cells is applied to a filter that retains structures of same or larger size than cells, and let smaller structures and molecules pass through. The retained cells may be resuspended and applied to the filter one or more times. Finally, the identity and quantity of the recovered detection molecules, i.e. the detection molecules that bound to the cells, may be determined.

In one embodiment the detection molecules are incubated with a solid sample comprising cells, such as a tissue section or biopsy. After incubation, the solid tissue or biopsy is washed one or more times, to remove unbound detection molecules. Finally, the remaining detection molecules, bound to cells of the solid tissue, can be identified and quantified by determining the identity and amount of label remaining on the solid tissue.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that are capable of binding certain cells are isolated by immobilizing said cells on e.g. beads, for example coated with an antibody specific for said cells (e.g. beads coated with anti-CD4 antibodies to specifically examine binding of detection molecules to CD4 T cells). When the cells have been immobilized on the beads, the beads are washed a couple of times to remove unbound or weakly bound detection molecules. The enriched pool of detection molecules, each of which are capable of binding the immobilized cells, can then be identified and quantified by identification and quantification of their respective labels.

In one embodiment, both the ability to secrete certain molecules, as well as the ability to bind specific detection molecules, is used as a means of enrichment of certain detection molecules. For example, if certain T cells of a cell sample are stimulated to secrete INF-γ (e.g by addition of free peptides to the cell suspension, or by binding of MHC multimers such as Dextramers or tetramers), and if bi-specific antibodies, recognizing both a T cell-specific protein on the cell surface, and INF-y, are added, the secreted INF-γ will be captured by the bi-specific antibody and become immobilized on the cell surface. If then beads, coated with anti-INF-γ antibody recognizing another face of INF-γ are added, the cells that secrete INF-γ will become immobilized on the beads. If then detection molecules comprising pMHC binding molecules are added to the cell/bead suspension, detection molecules capable of binding T cells will become immobilized on the beads as well. After washing to remove unbound detection molecules, the detection molecules binding to T cells that were secreting INF-y, can be recovered. Finally, the identity and amount of the recovered detection molecules can be determined by identifying the label of the recovered detection molecules. Thus, in this approach, the detection molecules are identified that bind to T cells, where said T cells are known to secrete INF-y.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules carry both binding molecules (e.g. pMHC complexes) and anti-INF-γ antibody. INF-γ will be secreted from certain cells as a result of the stimulation brought about by the binding of the detection molecule (i.e. brought about by the binding of the pMHC binding molecule), and the secreted INF-γ will be captured on detection molecules bound to the same cell. These cells may be immobilized on beads carrying anti-INF-γ antibodies. After washing to remove unbound detection molecules, the detection molecules binding to T cells that were secreting INF-γ, can be recovered. Finally, the identity and amount of the recovered detection molecules can be determined by identifying the label of the recovered detection molecules. Thus, in this approach, the detection molecules are identified that bind to T cells, where said T cells are known to secrete INF-γ.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that are capable of binding certain cells are isolated by applying the incubation mixture of cells and detection molecules to an affinity column, e.g. carrying antibodies or other proteins that bind to a certain cell membrane protein of said cells (where the cell membrane protein is indicative of the cell being e.g. in a certain development stage, a certain stage in the mitotic cycle, or indicative of the cell being of a certain kind). It is of course important that the column material allows the cells to migrate relatively unhindered through the column unless they bind to the affinity target (e.g. antibody) on the column. The cells that bind to the affinity column will migrate slower through the column and can be recovered from the later column fractions. The detection molecules that do not bind cells will flow through much faster than the cells, and can be recovered in early fractions. The enriched pool of detection molecules, each of which are capable of binding the immobilized cells, can then be identified and quantified from the later fractions, by identification and quantification of their respective labels.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that are capable of binding certain cells are isolated by immobilizing all the detection molecules recovered after washing cells. Thus, in this embodiment, the detection molecules that are not bound to a cell are removed, by recovering the cell (e.g. by centrifugation, filtration through a filter that allows molecules but not cells to pass through, or any other means that recovers the cells (and the detection molecules bound to them) but does not recover the unbound detection molecules. The recovered cells may be re-suspended and the centrifugation/filtration process repeated, and then the recovered cells with detection molecules bound are immobilized on a surface (e.g. a microtiter-plate well coated with antibodies that recognize and bind detection molecules) or a bead (e.g. a bead coated with antibodies that recognize and bind detection molecules), or are precipitated by adding primary antibodies that bind detection molecules, and secondary antibodies that bind the primary antibodies, thus resulting in the formation of large aggregates of cells, detection molecules, and primary and secondary antibodies, which can easily be precipitated. Finally, the identity and quantity of each kind of recovered detection molecule is determined.

In one embodiment involving the isolation of detection molecules that are capable of binding to certain cells, flow-activated cell sorting (FACS) is used. For example, the detection molecule may, in addition to a linker, binding molecule and label, comprise a fluorescent moiety (i.e. a fluorophore). Detection molecules and cells are incubated, and those cells that are bound by a (fluorescent) detection molecule can be identified and collected by a flow activated cell sorter (FACS). Thus, after sorting, the detection molecules that were capable of binding to cells, are collected together with the cells they bind to. The identity and amount of the recovered binding molecules can then be identified by identification and quantification of the corresponding labels.

In one embodiment, the invention is used to perform single-cell phenotyping and/or analysis. Thus, most of the abovementioned isolation procedures, in which (a subset of) cells are isolated, e.g. by centrifugation, FACS sorting, or bead immobilization, the cells may (following their enrichment) be diluted and placed in separate containers (e.g. separate wells of a microtiter-plate well), at a dilution where there is on average significantly less than one cell per well. Consequently, those wells comprising one cell can be used to do single-cell phenotyping, by identifying the labels (and hence the detection molecules) associated with the one cell present in the well.

In one embodiment, the binding molecule binds to an intracellular target, e.g. a protein or a mRNA. For such cases, the detection molecule needs to become intracellularized, either as a means of active or passive transport across the fully functional membrane, or as a result of the cells having been mildly permeabilized. The cells may be permeabilized using standard methods such as those used routinely in intracellular staining (ICS) procedures.

Detecting detection molecules that are complexed with a certain cell, or that have been in contact with a certain cell, can be done in many ways.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that are or have been in contact with the cells are marked specifically. In one embodiment the detection molecules carry DNA oligonucleotide labels (“label DNA”) of different lengths, i.e. the length of the DNA label identifies the detection molecule. The surface of the sample cells is coated with DNA oligonucletides (“coating DNA”), for example by adding antibody-DNA conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface structure.

The “label DNA” and “coating DNA” have complementary regions in their 3′-ends but the 3′-end of “label DNA” is blocked and cannot serve as primer for an extension reaction. When a detection molecule binds the DNA coated cells, the “label DNA” is brought into proximity of the “coating DNA”, allowing the complementary 3′ends to anneal. When a polymerase and radioactive nucleosides are added, the strand complementary to the “label DNA” is generated by extension from the 3′end of “coating DNA”. DNA is then purified from the mixture and applied to an appropriate gel, allowing separation of the radioactive DNA fragments. The identity and amount of the labels (and hence the corresponding detection molecules) can be determined from the position and intensity of the band on the gel.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that have been in contact with cells are marked specifically. In one embodiment the detection molecules carry peptide labels. The peptide label consists of a coding region and a protease cleavage site proximal to the linker that connects the label to the binding molecule. The surface of the sample cells is coated with proteases capable of cleaving the peptide labels, for example by adding antibody-protease conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface structure. Thus, when the detection molecules bind to the sample cells, they are brought into proximity of the protease, which results in cleavage of the label and release of the coding region from the detection molecule and hence, release from the cells. After centrifugation to precipitate the cells, the supernatant can be analysed by mass spectrometry to determine the identity and amount of the labels that were released from the cells, and hence, the identity and amount of detection molecules that bound to the cells in question.

In one embodiment, the detection molecules that have been in contact with cells are marked, allowing their enrichment and analysis. For example, if the detection molecule carries—in addition to the binding molecule, linker and label—an enzyme catalyzing the transfer of a cell surface moiety (e.g. a peptide fragment) from a cell surface protein to the binding molecule of the detection molecule, when said surface protein binds to the binding molecule. This peptide tag that has been added to the binding molecule, can then be used as a means of isolating all the detection molecules that have been in contact with said cell surface protein (e.g. by purifying the tagged detection molecules by applying the incubation mixture to beads coated with anti-peptide tag antibodies). Finally, the isolated detection molecules can be identified by identification and quantification of their labels.

Determining the Identity of the Label

The identity of the label and thereby the identity of the binding molecule, may be determined from the label's physical characteristics, such as its mass, composition or sequence, charge, volume, size and dimensions, fluorescence, absorption, emission, NMR spectrum, and many other physical characteristics.

The mass of a label can be determined by e.g. mass spectrometry.

The composition of a label can be determined by degradation to its components (e.g a peptide being degraded to its amino acid residues), and the amounts of each of its components be determined by e.g. chemical methods (e.g. specific reactions), whereby the composition can be determined.

The sequence of a polymer can be determined by appropriate sequencing methods. Thus, for peptides the sequence can be deduced by standard peptide sequencing methods (e.g. Edman degradation). Likewise, for natural oligonucleotides the sequence can be determined using standard sequencing reactions, involving chemical or enzymatic procedures. Oligonucleotides comprising certain unnatural nucleotides may also be sequenced by some of these methodologies.

The sequence and amount of an oligonucleotide can also be determined by measuring its ability to anneal to complementary oligonucleotide sequences. This principle is applied in Q-PCR, where a polymerase chain reaction is performed. Here, forward and reverse primers are added to the composition of labels, whereafter the amount corresponding (complementary) oligonucleotide template (label) can be determined by determining the amount of double-stranded PCR product generated at different stages (number of cycles) of the PCR reaction.

Where a composition of detection molecules carry labels of similar size and/or mass, but different charge, these may be separated and identified and their relative amounts determined by e.g. running them on a gel. If the labels are of similar size and dimension, and if the labels migrate from the negative to positive electrode, the labels with the highest negative charge will migrate the fastest through the gel. The relative amounts of the different labels are reflected in the density, optionally staining density if the gel is stained after electrophoresis, of the different bands on the gel.

The volume, size and dimensions of a label molecule determines how fast it will flow through a column. For some column types, the largest molecules flow through the column the fastest (e.g. gel filtration columns). For other column types, the largest molecules flow through the slowest. Both column types can be used to separate and identify and determine the relative amounts of different labels, by applying the composition of labels to the top of the column, and measuring the flow-through time for each of the labels, as well as the amount of label detected in a given fraction.

Labels emitting any kind of radiation can be identified and quantified from its spectrum of emission and intensity of radiation. Detection of radiation is used in e.g. flow cytometers and spectrophotometers.

Labels can also be identified and quantified from their NMR signal.

Binding of Detection Molecules can be Detected Using Various Principles:

-   -   Fluidic samples are one embodiment of the present invention         where binding and detection of binding molecules can be used to         make a diagnostic analysis. One or more defined structures may         be measured.     -   Often entities like cells or other particles in a sample are         detected by binding molecules associated to surface receptors or         intracellular structures of the cell or binding structures         exposed on the bead

One way to analyse fluidic samples is using flow cytometry. In flow cytometry, the sample is a suspension of entities, which are moved to and centered in the flow cell (interrogation point) by co-flow with sheath fluid, or is directly injected into the instrument.

Liquid cell samples can be analyzed using a flow cytometer, able to detect and count individual cells passing in a stream through a laser beam. For identification of specific cells in a sample, cells are tagged with fluorescent labeled detection molecules by incubating cells with labelled detection molecule and then force the cells with a large volume of liquid through a nozzle creating a stream of individually spaced cells. Each cell passes through a laser beam and during the passage the laser light is scattered and any fluorochrome bound to the cell is excited and thereby fluoresce. Sensitive photomultipliers detect emitted fluorescence and thereby gives information of binding detection molecules to the surface of a given cell. By this method labelled detection molecules can be used to identify specific cell populations in cell samples of any individual. In here the term “labeling” of cells with labelled detection molecules is used interchangeably with the term “staining”.

Flow cytometry allows detection of a single entity with a specified set of characteristics, within a population of entities with other sets of characteristics. A major advantage of flowcytometry is that it allows rapid analysis of multiple parameters for each individual entity, simultaneously.

Another example of a method measuring binding of labeled binding molecules (detection molecules) to structures in fluidic samples is detection of cells or particles in the sample by binding labeled binding molecule followed by identification of labeled structures using microscopy include light microscopy, immunofluorescence microscopy, confocal microscopy or other forms of microscopy. Basically the fluidic sample is stained with labeled binding molecule and non-binding binding molecule removed by washing. Then the sample is spread out on a slide or similar in a thin layer and labelled cells identified using a microscope.

-   -   Measurement of detection molecule can also be used on solid         samples. Example solid sample include but is not limited to         solid tissue, blocks of solid tissue, slices of solid tissue,         cells or particles embedded in a solid matrix or any other solid         or semisolid sample.     -   Solid samples are typically analysed by placing them in         instruments as blocks or in the form of thin slide of material         on e.g. a glass plate. Solid material can then be labeled by         binding detection molecule and the amount of bound detection         molecule measured.

An example of a method measuring binding of detection molecule to solid sample is immunohistochemistry. This assay technique involves immobilization of the tissue slice on a glass slice, carrying the sample through the assay steps to the final analysis.

The means of detection typically involve photometric methods, microcopy and/or digital scanning of the sample. It may be simple light or fluorescence microscopy, for determination of chemiluminescence, morphology, shape, and fluorescence. Also, laser scanning techniques may be employed, where confocal microscopy or standard light microscopy is employed to give a 3- and 2-dimensional picture, respectively, of the sample. A digital image may be acquired, whereby the individual features e.g. light intensity at a given area of the sample can be determined.

Another example of a method measuring binding of detection molecule to solid sample is immunoelectron microscopy. In this technique detection molecules labeled with gold particle are applied to thin section of sample which are then examined in a transmission electron microscope. This method is used to detect intracellular location of structures or particular matter in a sample at high resolution.

Samples can also be attached to solid support and then incubated with detection molecule and bound detection molecule measured. Alternatively detection molecule of interest is bound to structure in sample before immobilization of sample to solid support. This principle is especially useful for binding detection molecules in solution to its binding partner in fluidic samples but can also be used on solid samples.

Below different principles for measurement of binding detection molecule to sample immobilized to solid support is listed.

-   -   Molecule of interest is immobilized on solid support and         detected using labeled marker. Alternatively the sample is first         labeled and then immobilized on solid support. An example is         ELISA based and Radioimmuno based assays. In both assays the         immobilized sample is incubated with detection molecule (or the         sample is incubated with detection molecule and then immobilized         on solid support), then non-binding detection molecule is         removed by washing. Bound detection molecule is measured. The         detection molecule may be labeled directly orindirectly. In         ELISA the label is most often an enzyme while in radioimmuno         assays the label is a radioactive molecule. Other labeling         molecules may also be used like fluorochromes, chromophores or         other molecules that can be measured. Useful labeling molecules         are described elsewhere herein.     -   Structure of interest in sample is catched by its partner; the         specific detection molecule that is immobilized on solid         support. Bound sample or part of sample is then detected using a         labeled marker specific for the same or a different structure in         the bound sample.     -   Different detection molecules to two or more structures of         interest in same sample are immobilized on solid support in a         defined pattern. Structures of interest in sample are bound to         the defined areas of the support and are detected by a labeled         marker. Each individual structure binds to different partners         immobilized in different positions on the solid support. Thereby         the sample may be phenotyped.     -   Two or more solid supports (e.g. beads) with different         characteristics (e.g. size, fluorescence, fluorescence         intensities, labels), where each kind of bead has a specific         detection molecule immobilized. Structures of interest in sample         are bound to specific populations of beads, where each bead         population is defined by the detection molecule they have         immobilized. The different populations of beads are detected         through their special characteristics.

The sample analysed by the above described methods may first be subjected to another analysis e.g. separation according to size. An example is Blotting techniques were molecular structures of a sample are first separated according to size and then transferred to a solid support followed by detection with labeled detection molecule. Depending on the structure to be analysed different forms of blotting exist, e.g. Western blotting for analysis of proteins, Northern blotting for analysis of RNA and Southern blotting for analysis of DNA.

-   -   Binding may also be measured without using labeled detection         molecules for detection. A sample may be captured by immobilized         binding molecule, then eluted and quantified. Usually the         starting point is a sample in solution, such as a cell lysate,         growth medium or blood. The molecule or structure of interest         will have a well known and defined property which can be         exploited during the binding process. The process itself can be         thought of as an entrapment, with the target molecule becoming         trapped on a solid or stationary phase or medium. The other         molecules in solution will not become trapped as they do not         possess this property. The solid medium can then be removed from         the mixture, washed and the target molecule released from the         entrapment in a process known as elution.     -   Binding to the solid phase may be achieved by column         chromatography, whereby the solid medium is packed onto a         chromatography column, the initial mixture run through the         column to allow binding, a wash buffer run through the column         and the elution buffer subsequently applied to the column and         collected. These steps are usually done at ambient pressure (as         opposed to HPLC or FPLC).     -   Alternatively binding may be achieved using a batch treatment,         by adding the initial mixture to the solid phase in a vessel,         mixing, separating the solid phase (by centrifugation for         example), removing the liquid phase, washing, re-centrifuging,         adding the elution buffer, re-centrifuging and removing the         eluate.     -   Sometimes a hybrid method is employed, the binding is done by         the batch method, then the solid phase with the target molecule         bound is packed onto a column and washing and elution are done         on the column.     -   A third method, expanded bed adsorption, which combines the         advantages of the two methods mentioned above, has also been         developed. The solid phase particles are placed in a column         where liquid phase is pumped in from the bottom and exits at the         top. The gravity of the particles ensures that the solid phase         does not exit the column with the liquid phase.     -   Following elution the purified or enriched molecule or structure         can be quantitated, enriched further or used in new analytical         processes or treatment processes.     -   Measurement of alteration of physical state of sample or         structure in sample upon binding molecule. For example addition         of binding molecule to a fluidic sample may induce cross-linking         of structures, clumping and/or aggregation of sample. E.g.         antibodies or other binding molecules can bind large particles         and make the particle to clump or agglutinate. The antibody or         other molecule binds multiple particles and joins them, creating         a large complex.     -   Similar addition of binding molecule to solid sample may make         the solid sample becoming semi solid, fluidic or in another way         change texture.     -   Other physical characteristics may be changed as a consequence         of addition of binding molecule to sample and if measureable         they can be used for analysis of sample.     -   An example of a specific assay measuring alteration in the         physical state of a sample upon addition of binding molecule is         turbidimetry. This is a method for determining the concentration         of a substance in a solution by the degree of cloudiness or         turbidity it causes or by the degree of clarification it induces         in a turbid solution.     -   Indirect measurement of binding is measurement of the result of         the interaction between binding molecule and structure in sample         in contrast to direct measurement of the binding molecule bound         in sample. The result of interaction between binding molecule         and structure in sample can be measured in several ways indirect         ways.     -   Measurement of produced substance. Upon binding of binding         molecule to structure in sample the sample may release and/or         produce a substance that can be measured. Depending on the         nature of the sample different principles exists         -   The produced substance may be measured in solution either             directly or by detection with a labeled detection molecule.             The produced substance may be easily accessible for             detection or alternatively need to be extracted from sample             before measurement is possible.

One example of measurement of produced substance in solution is Polymerase Chain reaction (PCR). In this method fragments of DNA in solution are amplified by binding DNA primers (binding molecules) to defined areas of the DNA in sample. The amount of amplified DNA is then measured.

Another example is measurement of produced soluble substance inside cells using intracellular flow cytometry. This can be done using block of secretion of soluble substance (e.g. by monensin), permeabilization of cell (by e.g. saponine) followed by immunofluorescent staining. The method involves the following steps: 1) An reagent able to block extracellular secretion of cytokine is added, e.g. monensin that interrupt intracellular transport processes leading to accumulation of produced soluble factor, e.g. cytokine in the Golgi complex. 2) Fixation of cell membrane using mild fixator followed by permeabilization of cell membrane by. e.g. saponine. 3) Addition of labelled detection molecule specific for the produced soluble substance to be determined. 5) Measurement of labelled cells using a flow cytometer. Optionally this analysis can be combined with labeling with detection molecules specific for surface exposed structures. If so these detection molecules are added before step 2.

An alternative to this procedure is to trap secreted soluble factors on the surface of the secreting cells followed by detection with specific detection molecules as described by Manz, R. et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92:1921 (1995).

-   -   The produced substance may be immobilized to solid support         followed by detection using labeled marker. Principles for         immobilization and detection are as described elsewhere herein         for immobilization of samples and direct detection     -   An example of indirect detection of produced substance         immobilized on solid support is measurement of substances         secreted from stimulated cells by capture of the secreted         substance on solid support followed by detection with labeled         detection molecule. Secreted soluble substance in the         supernatant is immobilized on solid support either directly or         through a linker molecule. The cells may be stimulated by         addition of other cells to the sample, addition of antigens         (peptides/proteins) to the sample, addition of stimulatory         proteins or other molecules or stimulated by other means. The         amount of secreted substance can be measured in different ways:         -   Soluble substances secreted from individual cells can be             detected by capturing of the secreted soluble substances             locally by detection molecules, e.g. antibody specific for             the soluble substance. Soluble substance recognizing             detection molecules are then immobilised on a solid support             together with cells and soluble substances secreted by             individual cells are thereby captured in the proximity of             each cell. Bound soluble substance can be measured using             labelled detection molecule specific for the captured             soluble substance. The number of cells that has given rise             to labelled spots on solid support can then be enumerated             and these spots indicate the presence of specific cells that             have been stimulated with particular stimulator.         -   Soluble substances secreted from a population of cells are             detected by capture and detection of soluble substance             secreted from the entire population of specific cells. In             this case soluble substance do not have to be captured             locally close to each cell but the secreted soluble             substances may be captured and detected in the same well as             where the cells are or transferred to another solid support             with detection molecules for capture and detection e.g.             beads or wells of ELISA plate.     -   The produced substance is measured directly in solid sample         using principles as described for solid samples elsewhere         herein.     -   Measurement of effector function in sample. Binding of binding         molecule may also result in changes in effector function of         sample. Effector function is inhere any function of sample or         produced in sample. This type of measurement is only relevant         for samples comprising living cells, living organisms or other         living material. Examples of effector function of/in a sample         include but are not limited to cytolytic activity, catalytic         activity, ability to stimulate other cells or samples or ability         to induce apoptosis in sample itself or in other samples.

An example is measurement of activation of T cells in a sample by measurement of cytolytic activity of the T cell in a cytolytic assay, e.g. a chromium release assay.

-   -   Measurement of growth. Binding of binding molecule may induce or         inhibit growth in a sample. This type of measurement is only         relevant for samples comprising living cells, living organisms         or other living material. In cell samples growth can be measured         as proliferation of cells in the sample.     -   Examples of methods useful for measuring proliferation include         but are not limited to:         -   Detection of mRNA. Proliferation of T cells can be detected             by measurement of mRNA inside cell. Cell division and             proliferation requires production of new protein in each             cell which as an initial step requires production of mRNA             encoding the proteins to be synthesized.         -   Detection of incorporation of thymidine. The proliferative             capacity of T cells in response to stimulation by MHC             multimer can be determined by a radioactive assay based on             incorporation of [3H]thymidine ([3H]TdR) into newly             generated DNA followed by measurement of radioactive signal.         -   Detection of incorporation of BrdU. Cell proliferation can             also be detected by of incorporation of             bromo-2′-deoxyuridine (BrdU) followed by measurement of             incorporated BrdU using a labeled anti-BrdU antibody in an             ELISA based analysis.         -   Viability of cells may be measured by measurement ATP in a             cell culture.             Separation According to Size, Structure or Other Physical             Characteristics

Properties of a sample can also be determined by measuring size and/or structure of sample. Below different methods based on different principles are listed.

Gel Electrophoresis

Gel electrophoresis is a technique used for the separation of deoxyribonucleic acid, ribonucleic acid, or protein molecules using an electric current applied to a gel matrix. The term “gel” in this instance refers to the matrix used to contain andseparate the target molecules. In most cases the gel is a crosslinked polymer whose composition and porosity is chosen based on the specific weight and composition of the target to be analyzed. When separating proteins or small nucleic acids (DNA, RNA, or oligonucleotides) the gel is usually composed of different concentrations of acrylamide and a cross-linker, producing different sized mesh networks of polyacrylamide. When separating larger nucleic acids (greater than a few hundred bases), the preferred matrix is purified agarose. In both cases, the gel forms a solid, yet porous matrix. Acrylamide, in contrast to polyacrylamide, is a neurotoxin and must be handled using appropriate safety precautions to avoid poisoning.

“Electrophoresis” refers to the electromotive force (EMF) that is used to move the molecules through the gel matrix. By placing the molecules in wells in the gel and applying an electric current, the molecules will move through the matrix at different rates, usually determined by mass, toward the positive anode if negatively charged or toward the negative cathode if positively charged.

After the electrophoresis is complete, the molecules in the gel can be stained to make them visible. Ethidium bromide, silver, or coomassie blue dye may be used for this process. Other methods may also be used to visualize the separation of the mixture's components on the gel. If the analyte molecules fluoresce under ultraviolet light, a photograph can be taken of the gel under ultraviolet lighting conditions. If the molecules to be separated contain radioactivity added for visibility, an autoradiogram can be recorded of the gel.

If several mixtures have initially been injected next to each other, they will run parallel in individual lanes. Depending on the number of different molecules, each lane shows separation of the components from the original mixture as one or more distinct bands, one band per component. Incomplete separation of the components can lead to overlapping bands, or to indistinguishable smears representing multiple unresolved components.

Bands in different lanes that end up at the same distance from the top contain molecules that passed through the gel with the same speed, which usually means they are approximately the same size. There are molecular weight size markers available that contain a mixture of molecules of known sizes. If such a marker was run on one lane in the gel parallel to the unknown samples, the bands observed can be compared to those of the unknown in order to determine their size. The distance a band travels is approximately inversely proportional to the logarithm of the size of the molecule.

Gel electrophoresis is usually performed for analytical purposes, but may be used as a preparative technique prior to use of other methods such as mass spectrometry, RFLP, PCR, cloning, DNA sequencing, or Southern blotting for further characterization.

Depending on the type of material to be separated different techniques may be used some of these are listed below:

-   -   Polypeptide length can be determined by SDS PAGE. The solution         of proteins to be analyzed is first mixed with SDS, an anionic         detergent which denatures secondary and non-disulfide-linked         tertiary structures, and applies a negative charge to each         protein in proportion to its mass. Without SDS, different         proteins with similar molecular weights would migrate         differently due to differences in mass charge ratio, as each         protein has an isoelectric point and molecular weight particular         to its primary structure. This is known as Native PAGE. Adding         SDS solves this problem, as it binds to and unfolds the protein,         giving a near uniform negative charge along the length of the         polypeptide.     -   SDS binds in a ratio of approximately 1.4 g SDS per 1.0 g         protein (although binding ratios can vary from 1.1-2.2 g SDS/g         protein), giving an approximately uniform mass:charge ratio for         most proteins, so that the distance of migration through the gel         can be assumed to be directly related to only the size of the         protein. A tracking dye may be added to the protein solution to         allow the experimenter to track the progress of the protein         solution through the gel during the electrophoretic run.     -   Native Gel Electrophoresis is a technique used mainly in protein         electrophoresis where the proteins are not denatured and         therefore separated based on their charge-to-mass ratio. The two         main types of native gels used in protein electrophoresis are         polyacrylamide gels and agarose gels.     -   Polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE) is used for separating         proteins ranging in size from 5 to 2,000 kDa due to the uniform         pore size provided by the polyacrylamide gel. Pore size is         controlled by controlling the concentrations of acrylamide and         bis-acrylamide powder used in creating a gel. Care must be used         when creating this type of gel, as acrylamide is a potent         neurotoxin in its liquid and powdered form. The other type of         gel used is agarose gel. Agarose gels can also be used to         separate native protein. They do not have a uniform pore size,         but are optimal for electrophoresis of proteins that are larger         than 200 kDa.     -   Unlike SDS-PAGE type electrophoreses, Native gel electrophoresis         does not use a charged denaturing agent. The molecules being         separated (usually proteins) therefore differ in Molecular mass         and intrinsic charge and experience different electrophoretic         forces dependent on the ration of the two. Since the proteins         remain in the native state they may be visualised not only by         general protein staining reagents but also by specific         enzyme-linked staining.     -   QPNC-PAGE, or quantitative preparative native continuous         polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, is a high-resolution         technique applied in biochemistry and bioinorganic chemistry to         separate proteins by isoelectric point. This variant of gel         electrophoresis is used by biologists to isolate active or         native metalloproteins in biological samples and to resolve         properly and improperly folded metal cofactor-containing         proteins in complex protein mixtures     -   Determination of size of DNA or RNA fragments, e.g. agarose gel         electrophoresis     -   Separation of proteins according to mass and isoelectric point,         e.g. 2D gel electrophoresis. Two-dimensional gel         electrophoresis, abbreviated as 2-DE or 2-D electrophoresis, is         a form of gel electrophoresis where mixtures of proteins are         separated by two properties in two dimensions on 2D gels.     -   2-D electrophoresis begins with 1-D electrophoresis but then         separates the molecules by a second property in a direction 90         degree from the first. In 1-D electrophoresis, proteins (or         other molecules) are separated in one dimension, so that all the         proteins/molecules will lie along a lane but be separated from         each other by a property (e.g. isoelectric point). The result is         that the molecules are spread out across a 2-D gel. Because it         is unlikely that two molecules will be similar in two distinct         properties, molecules are more effectively separated in 2-D         electrophoresis than in 1-D electrophoresis.     -   The two dimensions that proteins are separated into using this         technique can be isoelectric point, protein complex mass in the         native state, and protein mass.         Chromatography

Chromatography is another method to separate structures according to size, structure or other physical characteristics. In principle a sample dissolved in a “mobile phase” is passed through a stationary phase, which separates the analyte to be measured from other molecules in the mixture and allows it to be isolated.

-   -   Below different types of chromatography is listed     -   Column chromatography         -   Ion exchange chromatography         -   Size exclusion chromatography         -   Liquid chromatography (LC, HPLC)         -   Gas chromatography     -   Planar chromatography         -   Paper chromatography         -   Thin layer chromatography             Separation Based on Chemical Properties

Samples can also be analysed be analyzing their chemical composition. The chemical composition of the whole sample med be determined, alternatively the chemical composition of fragments or individual structures of the sample is identified. Often this type of analysis are preceded by one or more other diagnostic or analytical methods e.g. separation according to size.

An example of this type of analysis is mass spectrometry. Mass spectrometry is an analytical technique that identifies the chemical composition of a compound or sample on the basis of the mass-to-charge ratio of charged particles. The method employs chemical fragmentation of a sample into charged particles (ions) and measurements of two properties, charge and mass, of the resulting particles, the ratio of which is deduced by passing the particles through electric and magnetic fields in a mass spectrometer. The design of a mass spectrometer has three essential modules: an ion source, which transforms the molecules in a sample into ionized fragments; a mass analyzer, which sorts the ions by their masses by applying electric and magnetic fields; and a detector, which measures the value of some indicator quantity and thus provides data for calculating the abundances each ion fragment present. The technique has both qualitative and quantitative uses, such as identifying unknown compounds, determining the isotopic composition of elements in a compound, determining the structure of a compound by observing its fragmentation, quantifying the amount of a compound in a sample using carefully designed methods (e.g., by comparison with known quantities of heavy isotopes), studying the fundamentals of gas phase ion chemistry (the chemistry of ions and neutrals in vacuum), and determining other physical, chemical, or biological properties of compounds.

Measurement of Catalysis

Catalysis is the process in which the rate of a chemical reaction is increased by means of a chemical substance known as a catalyst. Unlike other reagents that participate in the chemical reaction, a catalyst is not consumed. Thus, the catalyst may participate in multiple chemical transformations, although in practice catalysts are sometimes consumed in secondary processes. Examples of catalysis include but are not limited to:

-   -   Measurement of enzymatic activity         -   Measurement of induction of enzymatic activity         -   Measurement of inhibition of enzymatic activity     -   Measurement of substrate for enzyme in a sample         Measurement of Growth

Growth is another parameter that can be measured in a sample. It can be natural growth in sample, the samples impact of growth on another sample or analysis system and/or the growth in sample after the sample has been added stimulus, inhibitor or other substance influencing growth.

Examples of measurement of growth in sample include but are not limited to:

-   -   Measurement of proliferation     -   Measurement of viability     -   Measurement of volume     -   Measurement of density

The above described chemical assays may be combined with one or more other chemical assays in order to make the final diagnosis of the unit. The chemical assays may be applied to the sample of the unit or to different samples from the same unit.

Further Aspects Relates to Different Uses

Overall, the multimeric MHC's or compositions comprising such sets of MHC's may find different uses. Thus, an aspect relates to the use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) or a composition according to the invention for the detection of antigen-responsive cells in a sample.

Another aspect relates to the use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) or a composition according to the invention in the diagnosis of diseases or conditions, preferably cancer and/or infectious diseases.

A further aspect relates to the use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) or a composition according to the invention in the development of immune-therapeutics.

Yet a further aspect relates to the use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) or a composition according to the invention in the development of vaccines.

Another aspect relates to the use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) or a composition according to the invention for the identification of epitopes.

In sum, the advantages of the present invention include, without limitation, the possibility for detection of multiple (potentially, but exclusively, >1000) different antigen-responsive cells in a single sample. The technology can be used, but is not restricted, for T-cell epitope mapping, immune-recognition discovery, diagnostics tests and measuring immune reactivity after vaccination or immune-related therapies.

This level of complexity allow us to move from model antigens to determination of epitope-specific immune reactivity covering full organisms, viral genomes, cancer genomes, all vaccine components etc. It can be modified in a personalized fashion dependent of the individuals MHC expression and it can be used to follow immune related diseases, such as diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis or similar.

Biological materials are for instance analyzed to monitor naturally occurring immune responses, such as those that can occur upon infection or cancer. In addition, biological materials are analyzed for the effect of immunotherapeutics including vaccines on immune responses. Immunotherapeutics as used here is defined as active components in medical interventions that aim to enhance, suppress or modify immune responses, including vaccines, non-specific immune stimulants, immunosuppressives, cell-based immunotherapeutics and combinations thereof.

The invention can be used for, but is not restricted to, the development of diagnostic kits, where a fingerprint of immune response associated to the given disease can be determined in any biological specimen. Such diagnostic kits can be used to determining exposure to bacterial or viral infections or autoimmune diseases, e.g., but not exclusively related to tuberculosis, influenza and diabetes. Similar approach can be used for immune-therapeutics where immune-responsiveness may serve as a biomarker for therapeutic response. Analyses with a barcode labelled MHC multimer library allow for high-throughput assessment of large numbers of antigen responsive cells in a single sample.

Furthermore, barcode labelled MHC-multimers can be used in combination with single-cell sorting and TCR sequencing, where the specificity of the TCR can be determined by the co-attached barcode. This will enable us to identify TCR specificity for potentially 1000+different antigen-responsive T-cells in parallel from the same sample, and match the TCR sequence to the antigen specificity. The future potential of this technology relates to the ability to predict antigen responsiveness based on the TCR sequence. This would be highly interesting as changes in TCR usage has been associated to immune therapy (11,12).

Further, there is a growing need for the identification of TCRs responsible for target-cell recognition (e.g., but not exclusive, in relation of cancer recognition). TCRs have been successfully used in the treatment of cancer (13), and this line of clinical initiatives will be further expanded in the future. The complexity of the barcode labeled MHC multimer libraries will allow for personalized selection of relevant TCRs in a given individual.

Due to the barcode-sequence readout, the barcode labeled MHC multimer technology allow for the interaction of several different peptide-MHC complexes on a single cell surface, while still maintaining a useful readout. When one T-cell binds multiple different peptide-MHC complexes in the library, their relative contribution to T-cell binding can be determined by the number of reads of the given sequences. Based on this feature it is possible to determine the fine-specificity/consensus sequences of a TCR. Each TCR can potential recognize large numbers of different peptide-MHC complexes, each with different affinity (14). The importance of such quantitative assessment has increased with clinical used of TCRs and lack of knowledge may have fatal consequences as recently exemplified in a clinical study where cross recognition of a sequence related peptide resulted in fatal heart failure in two cases (15,16). Thus, this particular feature for quantitative assessment of TCR binding of peptide-MHC molecules related to the present invention can provide an efficient solution for pre-clinical testing of TCRs aimed for clinical use.

Also related to the above, this allows for determination of antigen responsiveness to libraries of overlapping or to very similar peptides. Something that is not possible with present multiplexing technologies, like the combinatorial encoding principle. This allows for mapping of immune reactivity e.g. to mutation variant of viruses, such as, but not exclusive, HIV.

In broad embodiment, the present invention is the use of barcode labelled MHC multimers for high-throughput assessment of large numbers of antigen responsive cells in a single sample, the coupling of antigen responsiveness to functional and phenotypical characteristic, to TCR specificity and to determine the quantitative binding of large peptide-MHC libraries to a given TCR.

While the foregoing written description of the invention enables one of ordinary skill to make and use what is considered presently to be the best mode thereof, those of ordinary skill will understand and appreciate the existence of variations, combinations, and equivalents of the specific embodiment, method, and examples herein. The invention should therefore not be limited by the above described embodiment, method, and examples, but by all embodiments and methods within the scope and spirit of the invention.

It is as aspect of the invention to provide the use of barcode labelled MHC multimers for multiplex detection of different T-cell specificities in a single sample, enabling simultaneous detection of potentially more than 1000 different T-cell specificities where the specificity is revealed through sequencing of the barcode label.

It is as aspect of the invention to provide the use of barcode labelled MHC multimers in combination with single-cell sorting and TCR sequencing, where the specificity of the TCR can be determined by the co-attached barcode. This will enable identification of TCRs specific for a mixture of numerous (potentially, but not restricted to >1000) different peptide-MHC multimers, and match the TCR sequence to the antigen specificity.

It is as aspect of the invention to provide the use of barcode labelled MHC multimers for determining the affinity and binding motif of a given TCR. The barcode labelling strategy will allow for attachment of several different (sequence related) peptide-MHC multimers to a given T-cell—with the binding affinity determining the relative contribution by each peptide-MHC multimer. Thereby it is possible to map the fine-specificity/consensus recognition sequence of a given TCR by use of overlapping peptide libraries or e.g. alanine substitution libraries.

It is as aspect of the invention to provide the use of barcode labelled MHC multimers to map antigen responsiveness against sequence related/similar peptides in the same libraries, e.g. mutational changes in HIV infection. This has not been possible with previous MHC multimer based techniques.

It is as aspect of the invention to provide the use of barcode-labelled MHC multimers to couple any functional feature of a specific T-cell or pool of specific T-cells to the antigen (peptide-MHC) recognition. E.g. determine which T-cell specificities in a large pool secrete cytokines, releases Calcium or other functional measurement after a certain stimuli.

Sample

A binding molecule is a molecule that specifically associates covalently or non-covalently with a structure belonging to or associated with an entity in a sample. In one embodiment said entity is selected from the group consisting of a cell, a cell population, a sample comprising one or more cells, a molecule, a marker molecule, a surface of a biological cell, a cellular entity, and a cellular component (e.g. micelle),

In an embodiment the methods of the present invention includes providing a sample such as a biological sample.

The type of sample may vary. In an embodiment the sample is a biological sample. In an embodiment the sample is a blood sample, such as an peripheral blood sample, a blood derived sample, a tissue biopsy or another body fluid, such as spinal fluid, or saliva.

The source of the sample may also vary. Thus, in a further embodiment said sample has been obtained from a mammal, such as a human, mouse, pigs, and/or horses.

In a preferred embodiment one cell may bind 1, 2-5, 6-20, 21-100, 101-1000, 1001-50000, 50000-200000, or more than 200000 detection molecules.

Each individual cell to be combined with at least one detection molecule has the capacity to bind a single or a number of detection molecules. It follows that one cell in one embodiment binds 1 detection molecule according to the invention, such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 detection molecules, such as binds 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, 7-8, 8-9, 9-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-40, 40-50, 50-75, 75-100, 100-150, 150-200, 200-250, 250-500, 500-750, 750-1000, 1000-2000, 2000-5000, 5000-10.000, 10.000-25.000, 25.000-50.000, 50.000-100.000, 100.000-250.000, 250.000-500.000, 500.000-1.000.000, or more than 1.000.000 detection molecules.

In a preferred embodiment the binding molecule specifically associates covalently or non-covalently with a structure belonging to or associated with a cell in a sample.

The sample in one embodiment is selected from the group consisting of a solid sample, a fluid sample, a semifluid sample, a liquid sample, a solubilised sample and a sample comprising dissociated cells of a solid sample.

The sample in one embodiment is selected from the group consisting of a biofilm, a biopsy, a surgical sample, a tissue sample, a microarray-fixed sample, solid tissue section such as a fresh section, a frozen section and a FFPE section.

Cell samples capable of being analyzed by detection molecules and then analysed using flow cytometry include but is not limited to blood, CSF, lymph, cell lines (e.g. hybridomas, transfected cells), semen, suspension of bacteria, suspension of viral particles, suspension of beads or other particles or supra molecular structures, homogenized tissues or any other fluidic sample from a given sample.

In one embodiment the sample is selected from the group consisting of blood, whole blood, plasma, serum, Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), human PBMN (HPBMC), buffy coat, synovial fluid, bone marrow, cerebrospinal fluid, saliva, lymph fluid, seminal fluid, urine, stool, exudate, transdermal exudates, pharyngeal exudates, nasal secretions, sputum, sweat, bronchoalveolar lavage, tracheal aspirations, fluid from joints, vitreous fluid, vaginal or urethral secretions or semen.

Herein, disaggregated cellular tissues such as, for example, hair, skin, synovial tissue, tissue biopsies and nail scrapings are also considered as biological samples.

IN one embodiment the sample comprises one or more cells is selected from the group consisting of immune cells, lymphocytes, monocytes, dendritic cells, T-cells, B-cells and NK cells.

In one embodiment said sample comprises one or more cells selected from the group consisting of CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, αβ T cells, invariant γδ T cells, an antigen-specific T-cell, antigen-responsive T cell and cells comprises T-cell receptors.

Many of the assays and methods described in the present invention are particularly useful for assaying T-cells in blood samples. Blood samples includes but is not limited to whole blood samples or blood processed to remove erythrocytes and platelets (e.g., by Ficoll density centrifugation or other such methods known to one of skill in the art) and the remaining PBMC sample, which includes the T-cells of interest, as well as B-cells, macrophages and dendritic cells, is used directly. Also included are blood samples processed in other ways e.g. isolating various subsets of blood cells by selecting or deselecting cells or entities in blood.

In one embodiment said cell is a cancer cell.

In one embodiment said sample is derived from an organ selected from the group consisting of lymph nodes, kidney, liver, skin, brain, heart, muscles, bone marrow, skin, skeleton, lungs, the respiratory tract, spleen, thymus, pancreas, exocrine glands, bladder, endocrine glands, reproduction organs including the phallopian tubes, eye, ear, vascular system, the gastroinstestinal tract including small intestines, colon, rectum, canalis analis and prostate gland; normal, diseased and/or cancerous.

In one embodiment the surface of sample cells is coated with proteases capable of cleaving a peptide label, for example by adding antibody-protease conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface structure.

In one embodiment the surface of sample cells is coated with DNA oligonucletides (“coating DNA”), for example by adding antibody-DNA conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface structure.

Diseases

Detection molecules of the present invention can be used in immune monitoring, diagnostics, prognostics, therapy and vaccines for many different diseases, including but not limited to the diseases listed in the following.

a) Infectious Diseases Caused by Virus Such as,

Adenovirus (subgropus A-F), BK-virus, CMV (Cytomegalo virus, HHV-5), EBV (Epstein Barr Virus, HHV-4), HBV (Hepatitis B Virus), HCV (Hepatitis C virus), HHV-6a and b (Human Herpes Virus-6a and b), HHV-7, HHV-8, HSV-1 (Herpes simplex virus-1, HHV-1), HSV-2 (HHV-2), JC-virus, SV-40 (Simian virus 40), VZV (Varizella-Zoster-Virus, HHV-3), Parvovirus B19, Haemophilus influenza, HIV-1 (Human immunodeficiency Virus-1), HTLV-1 (Human T-lymphotrophic virus-1), HPV (Human Papillomavirus giving rise to clinical manifestions such as Hepatitis, AIDS, Measles, Pox, Chicken pox, Rubella, Herpes and others.

b) Infectious Diseases Caused by Bacteria Such as,

Gram positive bacteria, gram negative bacteria, intracellular bacterium, extracellular bacterium, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium avium subsp. Paratuberculosis, Borrelia burgdorferi, Borrelia Garinii, Borrelia Afzelii, other spirochetes, Helicobacter pylori, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Listeria monocytogenes, Histoplasma capsulatum, Bartonella henselae, Bartonella quintana giving rise to clinical manifestations such as Tuberculosis, Pneumonia, Stomach ulcers, Paratuberculosis and others.

c) Infectious Diseases Caused by Fungus Such as,

Aspergillus fumigatus, Candida albicans, Cryptococcus neoformans, Pneumocystis carinii giving rise to clinical manifestations such as skin-, nail-, and mucosal infections, Meningitis, Sepsis and others.

d) Parasitic Diseases Caused by Parasites Such as,

Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium vivax, Plasmodium malariae, Schistosoma mansoni, Schistosoma japonicum, Schistosoma haematobium, Trypanosoma cruzi, Trypanosoma rhodesiense, Trypanosoma gambiense, Leishmania donovani, and Leishmania tropica.

e) Allergic Diseases Caused by Allergens Such as,

Birch, Hazel, Elm, Ragweed, Wormwood, Grass, Mould, Dust Mite giving rise to clinical manifestations such as Asthma.

f) Transplantation-Related Diseases Caused by

reactions to minor histocompatibility antigens such as HA-1, HA-8, USP9Y, SMCY, TPR-protein, HB-1Y and other antigens in relation to, Graft-versus-host-related disease, allo- or xenogene reactions i.e. graft-versus-host and host-versus-graft disease.

g) Cancerous Diseases Associated with Antigens Such as

Survivin, Survivin-2B, Livin/ML-IAP, Bcl-2, Mcl-1, Bcl-X(L), Mucin-1, NY-ESO-1, Telomerase, CEA, MART-1, HER-2/neu, bcr-abl, PSA, PSCA, Tyrosinase, p53, hTRT, Leukocyte Proteinase-3, hTRT, gp100, MAGE antigens, GASC, JMJD2C, JARD2 (JMJ), JHDM3a, WT-1,CA 9, Protein kinases, where the cancerous diseases include malignant melanoma, renal carcinoma, breast cancer, lung cancer, cancer of the uterus, cervical cancer, prostatic cancer, pancreatic cancer, brain cancer, head and neck cancer, leukemia, cutaneous lymphoma, hepatic carcinoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer.

h) Autoimmune and Inflammatory Diseases, Associated with Antigens Such as

GAD64, Collagen, human cartilage glycoprotein 39, β-amyloid, Aβ42, APP, Presenilin 1, where the autoimmune and inflammatory diseases include Diabetes type 1, Rheumatoid arthritis, Alzheimer, chronic inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis uterosa, Multiple Sclerosis, Psoriasis

EXAMPLES Example A

This example relates to

i) the stability of DNA oligonucleotides (DNA tag/label), used in one embodiment of the invention, in blood preparations, and

ii) an embodiment of the invention, in which certain tagged Dextramers (detection molecules in which the binding molecule is a number of peptide-MHC complexes, and the label is a DNA oligonucleotide) are enriched for. Allowing identification of the Dextramers with binding specificity for certain (subpopulations of) cells in the cell sample tested.

In i) it is shown that DNA oligos are stable during handling in PBMC's and in blood for a time that will allow staining, washing and isolation of T cells and subsequent amplification of DNA tags.

In ii) Show that a model system consisting of DNA-tagged Dextramers with MHC specificities for CMV, Flu and negative control peptide will locate to and can be captured/sorted with relevant T cell specificities and can be identified by PCR amplification and/or sequencing.

Stability of Single-Stranded and Double-Stranded Oligonucleotides in Blood Preparations

DNA tag oligo design. 69-nucleotide long, biotinylated TestOligo was prepared, consisting of

5′primer region (22 nt italic type, left)—

random region (6×N-nt)—barcode region (21 nt underlined)—

3′primer region (20 nt italic type, right):

‘b’=Biotin-TEG 5′ modification

‘h’=HEG (terminal modifications)

Forward-01 primer GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTG Reverse-01 primer ATGCAACCAAGAGCTTAAGT TestOligo-01 bGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATCCATTCCATCCAGCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCAT TestOligo-02 bhGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATCCATTCCATCCAGCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCAT TestOligo-03 bhGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATCCATTCCATCCAGCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCATh TestOligo-04 bhGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTTGAACTATGAATCGTCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCATh TestOligo-05 bhGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATAGGTGTCTACTACCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCATh TestOligo-06 bhGAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTTTATTGGAGAGCACGCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCATh Q-PCR probes for quantifying the amount of TestOligos 1-6: +=locked nucleic acid (LNA) modified RNA nucleotide LNA-3 8=FAM; 7=BHQ-1-plus

-   -   TCT[+A][+T][+C]A[+T][+T]CC[+A][+T][+C]CAGC         LNA-4         8=FAM; 7=BHQ-1-plus     -   TCT[+T][+G][+A]AC[+T][+A]TG[+A][+A][+T]CGTC         LNA-5         9=HEX; 7=BHQ-1-plus     -   TCT[+A][+T][+A]GG[+T][+G]TC[+T][+A][+C]TACC         LNA-6         2=Cy5; 1=BHQ-2-plus     -   TCT[+T][+T][+A]TT[+G][+G]AG[+A][+G][+C]ACGC

The stability of oligo-tags by Q-PCR was analyzed under conditions relevant for T cell isolation:

The testOligos 1-6 were incubated in anticoagulated EDTA blood, and following incubation the amount of each of the testOligos was determined using Q-PCR using the abovementioned primers and probes. The oligo tags were quantified by QPCR with SYBR® Green JumpStart™ Taq ReadyMix™ according to manufacturer's protocol in combination with any capillary QPCR instruments (e.g. Roche LightCycler or Agilent Mx3005P).

Because of the different termini of the testOligos 1-6, this also was a test of the stability of non-modified DNA oligo tag vs HEG modified 5′ and HEG modified 5′ and 3′ (TestOligo-01, -02 and -03 respectively).

The results are shown in FIG. 8. It is concluded that the stability of the testOligos is appropriately high for all variants tested, to perform the invention.

Generation and screening of a 3 member DNA tagged MHC Dextramer library for screening of antigen specific T cells in a lymphoid cell sample

This experiment involves the generation of 3 DNA-tagged Dextramers, each with a unique specificity, as follows:

Dextramer 1: Flu (HLA-A*0201/GILGFVFTL/MP/Influenza)

Dextramer 2: CMV (HLA-A*0201/NLVPMVATV/pp65/CMV)

Dextramer 3: Negative (HLA-A*0201/ALIAPVHAV/Neg.Control).

Each of these Dextramers thus have a unique pMHC specificity (i.e. the three Dextramers have different binding molecules), and each Dextramer carries a unique label (DNA oligonucleotide) specific for that one pMHC specificity.

The library of DNA-tagged Dextramers are screened in a preparation of lymphoid cells such as anticoagulated EDTA blood or preparations of peripheral blood mononucleated cells (PBMC's). Those Dextramers that bind to cells of the cell sample will be relatively more enriched than those that do not bind.

Finally, the MHC/antigen specificity of the enriched Dextramers is revealed by identification of their DNA tags by Q-PCR with DNA tag-specific probes or by sequencing of the DNA tags.

1. Production of 3 Different DNA Tamed Dextramers with HLA-A*0201-Peptide (pMHC) Complexes.

pMHC complexes are generated and attached to dextran, along with unique DNA tags identifying each of the individual pMHC complexes, as follows.

Generation of DNA tagged Dextramers with Flu (HLA-A*0201/GILGFVFTL/MP/Influenza), CMV (HLA-A*0201/NLVPMVATV/pp65/CMV) and Negative (HLA-A*0201/ALIAPVHAV/Neg.Control).

Dextramer stock is 160 nanomolar (nM), TestOligo stock is diluted to 500 nM. Mix 10 micro liter (uL) 160 nM dextramer stock with 10 uL 500 nM TestOligo stock. Incubate 10 min at r.t. Mix with 1.5 ug pMHC complex of desired specificity. Adjust volume to 50 uL with a neutral pH buffer such as PBS or Tris pH 7,4, and store at 4 degrees Celsius. This will produce a DNA tagged Dextramer with approximately 3 oligo tags and 12 pMHC complexes, respectively, per Dextramer.

-   -   a. Dex-Oligo-03=Dextramer with TestOligo-03 and         HLA-A*0201/NLVPMVATV/pp65/CMV.     -   b. Dex-Oligo-04=Dextramer with TestOligo-04 and         HLA-A*0201/GILGFVFTL/MP/Influenza.     -   c. Dex-Oligo-05=Dextramer with TestOligo-05 and         HLA-A*0201/ALIAPVHAV/Neg.Control.         2. Preparation of Cell Sample for Screening for Antigen-Specific         T Cells.

-   a. Appropriate cell samples for identification of antigen specific T     cells are preparations of lymphoid cells such as preparations of     peripheral blood mononucleated cells (PBMC's) or anticoagulated     blood. Such preparations of cell samples are prepared by standard     techniques known by a person having ordinary skill in the art.

-   b. Transfer in the range of 1E7 lymphoid cells (from PBMC or EDTA     anticoagulated blood) to a 12×75 mm polystyrene test tube.

-   c. Add 2 ml PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH 7.4. Centrifuge     at 300×g for 5 min. Remove supernatant and resuspend cells in a     total volume of 2.5 ml PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH 7.4.     3. Preparation and Modification of Library of DNA Tagged Dextramers     with Three MHC/Peptide Specificities (from 1).

-   a. Mix 5 ul 10 uM biotin with 10 ul each of Dex-Oligo-03,     Dex-Oligo-04 and Dex-Oligo-05.     4. Mixing of Preparations of Lymphoid Cells with a Library of DNA     Tagged MHC Dextramers.

-   a. Mix 1E7 lymphoid cells in 2.5 mL (from 2b) with 30 uL library of     DNA tagged Dextramers (from 3a).

-   b. Incubate 30 min at r.t.

-   c. Centrifuge at 300×g for 5 min. and remove the supernatant.

-   d. Resuspend pellet in 2.5 ml PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH     7.4. Centrifuge at 300×g for 5 min. and remove the supernatant.

-   e. Resuspend pellet in 2.5 ml PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH     7.4     5. Capture of all CD8+ Antigen Specific T Cells by Magnet Assisted     Cell Sorting, Performed According to Miltenyi Biotec Catalog Nr     130-090.878, Whole Blood CD8 MicroBead Protocol.

-   a. Add 100 uL Whole Blood CD8 MicroBeads (Miltenyi Biotec catalog nr     130-090.878) to resuspended lymphoid cells from 4e. Mix and allow     capture of CD8+ T cells for 15 min at r.t.

-   b. Place Whole Blood Column in the magnetic field of a suitable MACS     Separator. For details see the Whole Blood Column Kit data sheet.

-   c. Prepare column by rinsing with 3 mL separation buffer (autoMACS     Running Buffer or PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH 7.4).

-   d. Apply magnetically labeled cell suspension (4e) onto the prepared     Whole Blood Column. Collect flow-through containing unlabeled cells.

-   e. Wash Whole Blood Column with 3×3 mL separation buffer (autoMACS     Running Buffer or PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH 7.4).

-   f. Remove Whole Blood Column from the separator and place it on a     new collection tube.

-   g. Capture CD8+ T cells by pipetting 5 mL Whole Blood Column Elution     Buffer or PBS containing 5% fetal calf serum, pH 7.4 onto the Whole     Blood Column. Immediately flush out the magnetically labeled cells     by firmly pushing the plunger into the column.

-   h. Centrifuge at 300×g for 5 min. and remove the supernatant.     Resuspend the collected CD8+ cells in 50 uL and store at minus 20     degrees Celsius for subsequent analysis.     6. Identification of Dextramers that Bound Significantly to Antigen     Specific T Cells of the Lymphoid Cell Sample.

-   a. Quantifying ratios of DNA oligo tags in input (3a) vs captured     fraction (5h) by sequencing or alternatively quantifying by QPCR     using the DNA tag specific probes LNA-3, LNA-4 and LNA-5 will reveal     the relative abundance of antigen specific T cells in the lymphoid     cell sample.     -   i. Quantifying ratios of DNA oligo tags in input (3a) vs         captured fraction (5h) by QPCR using the DNA tag specific probes         LNA-3, LNA-4 and LNA-5.         -   1. Make 25 uL QPCR reactions of             -   a. input of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (3a)             -   b. output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h)             -   c. Standard curves of 10 to 1E8 TestOligo-03,                 TestOligo-04 and TestOligo-05 respectively.         -   2. Mix 12.5 uL JumpStart Taq ReadyMix (Sigma-Aldrich #D7440)             with 0,125 uL 100 uM primer each of Forward-01 and             Reverse-01, 0.625 ul 10 uM of either probe LNA-3, LNA-4 or             LNA-5, 0.025 ul Reference dye (Sigma-Aldrich #R4526) and             12.5 uL of either input of library of DNA tagged Dextramers             (3a), output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h) or             Standard curves of 10 to 1E8 TestOligo-03, TestOligo-04 and             TestOligo-05 respectively.         -   3. Run two step QPCR thermal profile Cycle 1=5 min at 95             degrees Celsius, Cycle 2−40=30 sec at 95 degrees Celsius and             1 min at 60 degrees Celsius.         -   4. Estimate the relative abundance of T cells with antigen             specificity against one of the three MHC Dextramers by             plotting the QPC cycle time (Ct) values of the input of             library of DNA tagged Dextramers (3a), the output of library             of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h) in a plot of Ct values of the             QPCR standard curve of TestOligo-03, TestOligo-04 and             TestOligo-05 respectively.     -   ii. Quantifying ratios of DNA oligo tags in input (3a) vs         captured fraction (5h) by ultra-deep sequencing.         -   1. Make 25 uL PCR reactions of             -   a. input of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (3a)             -   b. output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h)         -   2. Mix PCR reaction using any standard PCR master mix with             1.25 uL 10 uM primer each of Forward-01 and Reverse-01, and             12.5 uL of either input of library of DNA tagged Dextramers             (3a) or output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h). Top             up to 25 uL with pure water. For example use 2x PCR Master             Mix from Promega containing Taq DNA polymerase, dNTPs, MgCl2             and reaction buffers.         -   3. Ultra Deep Sequencing of the above PCR product can be             provided by a number of commercial suppliers such as for             example Eurofins Genomics, GATC Biotech or Beckman Coulter             Genomics using well established Next Generation Sequensing             technologies such as Roche 454, Ion Torrent, the Illumine             technology or any other high throughput sequencing technique             for PCR amplicon sequencing.         -   4. PCR amplicon analysis of the relative abundances of the             input of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (3a), the output             of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h) will reveal the             relative abundance of T cells with antigen specificity             against one of the three MHC Dextramers.             7. Predicted Results and Comments

-   a. It is expected that the relative abundance and ratios of DNA     oligo tags in input of a library of DNA tagged Dextramers (3a) as     estimated by QPCR or sequencing is primarily affected by three     parameters namely i) the ratio in which the DNA oligo tags were     supplied during the generation of the DNA tagged Dextramers     (1.a.i.1), ii) how the library input was mixed (3a) and iii) how     efficiently the individual DNA oligo tags are amplified in the PCR     reactions.     -   i. In an example, the relative ratios of DNA oligo tags in input         of a library of DNA tagged Dextramers as generated in 3a and as         measured by QPCR or sequencing would be between 1 to 10 fold of         each other.

-   b. It is expected that the relative abundance and ratios of DNA     oligo tags in the output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h) as     estimated by QPCR or sequencing, in addition to the three parameters     mentioned in 7a, is primarily affected by three additional     parameters namely i) the number of antigen specific T cells with     specificity for one of the three MHC-peptide combinations ii) the     affinity of the T cell receptor of the given T cell for the given     MHC-peptide complex and finally iii) the efficiency of separating     antigen-specific T cells and their associated DNA tagged MHC     Dextramers from unbound DNA tagged MHC Dextramers by washing and     cell capture.     -   i. In an example, the relative ratios of DNA oligo tags in         output of a library of DNA tagged Dextramers as generated in 5h         and as measured by QPCR or sequencing would be more than 10 fold         in favor of those DNA oligo tags coupled to an MHC Dextramer         with an MHC-peptide complex for which antigen-specific T cells         are present in the lymphoid cell sample.         -   1. In a lymphoid cell sample from an influenza positive and             CMV positive HLA-A0201 donor with antigen-specific T cells             against HLA-A*0201/NLVPMVATV/pp65/CMV and             HLA-A*0201/GILGFVFTL/MP/Influenza and no antigen-specific T             cells against HLA-A*0201/ALIAPVHAV/Neg.Control it is             expected that the relative ratios of TestOligo-03             (Dex-Oligo-03=Dextramer with TestOligo-03 and             HLA-A*0201/NLVPMVATV/pp65/CMV), TestOligo-04             (Dex-Oligo-04=Dextramer with TestOligo-04 and             HLA-A*0201/GILGFVFTL/MP/Influenza) and TestOligo-05             (Dex-Oligo-05=Dextramer with TestOligo-05 and             HLA-A*0201/ALIAPVHAV/Neg.Control) will be more than 10 fold             in the favor of TestOligo-03 and TestOligo-04 over             TestOligo-05. That is TestOligo-03 and TestOligo-04 is             expected to be more than 10 fold more abundant or frequent             than TestOligo-05 as measured by sequencing or QPCR of the             output of library of DNA tagged Dextramers (5h) if they were             supplied in equal amounts in the input of library of DNA             tagged Dextramers (3a).

Example B

FIG. 7 shows results that act as proof-of-principle for the claimed invention. FIG. 7A, Flow cytometry data of peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) from healthy donors.

Materials and Methods

PBMCs were stained with CMV specific peptide-MHC multimers coupled to a specific nucleotide-barcode. In addition to CMV peptide-MHC reagents the cells were stained in the presence of negative control reagents i.e. HIV-peptide MHC multimers coupled to another specific barcode label and the additional negative control peptide-MHC reagents (p*) not holding a barcode—all multimers were additionally labeled with a PE-fluorescence label. The amounts of MHC multimers used for staining of PBMCs were equivalent to the required amount for staining of 1000 different peptide-MHC specificities i.e. 1× oligo-labeled CMV specific MHC multimers, lx oligo-labeled HIV specific MHC multimers and 998× non-labeled p*MHC multimers, so as to give an impression whether background staining will interfere with the true positive signal. Prolonged washing steps were included (either 0 min (A), 30 min (B) or 60 min (C)) after removing the MHC multimers, and data from all experiments are shown. The PE-MHC-multimer positive cells were sorted by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) FIG. 7B, Cross threshold (Ct) values from multiplex qPCR of the sorted PE-MHC-multimer positive cells. QPCR was used to assess the feasibility of detecting certain cell specificity through barcode-labeled peptide-MHC-multimers. Reagents associated with a positive control (CMV) barcode and a negative control (HIV) barcode were present during staining, but negative control (HIV) barcode-peptide-MHC multimers should be washed out.

Examples of nucleic acid sequences are:

DNA-barcode oligo for CMV MHC multimer attachment:

5GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATCCATTCCATCCAGCTCACTTAA GCTCTTGGTTGCAT

DNA-barcode oligo for HIV MHC multimer attachment:

5GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATAGGTGTCTACTACCTCACTTAA GCTCTTGGTTGCAT

5=Biotin-TEG

Results

Results shows Ct value only detectable to the CMV peptide-MHC multimer associated barcode, whereas the HIV-peptide MHC multimer associated barcode was not detected

Conclusion

This experiment is a representative example of several similar experiment performed with other antigen specificities. Overall these data show that it is feasible to

-   -   1) stain with at least 1000 different MHC-multimers in a single         sample while still maintain a specific signal,     -   2) attach a DNA-barcode to an MHC multimer,     -   3) amplify the DNA-barcode after cellular selection steps,     -   4) read the barcode with QPCR, using barcode specific probes,     -   5) obtain a specific signal corresponding to the antigen         specific T cell population present in the sample, while         non-specific MHC multimer barcodes are non-detectable.

Together these (and similar data available) provide proof of feasibility for the steps described in FIGS. 3, 4 and 5.

Examples 1-12, 20-21, 60-61, 79-82 and 120-124

In the following examples, the experimental methods comprise one or more of the following steps

1. Sample preparation.  a. Acquiring sample  b. Modifying sample 2. Linker preparation. 3. Binding molecules preparation  a. Synthesis  b. Modification  c. Purification 4. Label preparation  a. Synthesis  b. Modification  c. Purification 5. Detection molecules preparation  a. Synthesis  b. Modification  c. Purification 6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules  a. Amount of sample  b. Amount of detection molecule  c. Conditions 7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired characteristics  a. Apply  b. Wash  c. Separate 8. Identification of enriched detection molecule  a. Apply  b. Analysis

Example 1

In this example the binding molecules are pMHC complexes, the linker is a dextran-streptavidin-fluorochrome conjugate, and the label is a DNA oligonucleotide.

The sample is a HPBMC from humans, the isolating and/or detecting is done by flow cytometry (FACS), and the determining of the identity of the label is done by quantitative PCR (QPCR).

Example 1 Explained

This is an example where the Sample (1) was blood from one CMV positive and HIV negative donor which was modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The binding molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying either CMV (positive antigen) or HIV (negative antigen) derived peptide-antigens. The binding molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of a control T-cell population.

The Labels (4) were oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels were combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label. The detection molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching binding molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and labels in the form of biotin-modified double stranded oligonucleotides onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. Two different detection molecules were generated wherein the two individual detection molecules containing different pMHC were encoded by corresponding individual oligonucleotide labels.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed detection molecules (5) under conditions (6c) that allowed binding of detection molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound detection molecules were separated from the non-cell bound detection molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind detection molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to quantitative PCR analysis of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells to reveal the identity of the detection molecules that bound to the T cells present in the sample. This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to peptide-MHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. It also revealed the feasibility of enriching for Detection Molecules based on the presence of T cells specific for the positive peptide-antigen (CMV) over the negative peptide-antigen (HIV) antigens.

Example 1 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell sample used in this example was         obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from a donor that         was CMV positive as well as HIV negative as determined by         conventional MHC-multimer staining.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Blood was obtained from the Danish             Blood Bank, in the form of buffy coats (BC). A peripheral             blood mononuclear cell preparation obtained following             standard donor blood preparations.         -   b. Modifying sample: Peripheral blood mononuclear cells             (PBMCs) were isolated from whole blood by density gradient             centrifugation. The density gradient medium, Lymphoprep             (Axis-Shield), which consists of carbohydrate polymers and a             dense iodine compound, facilitate separation of the             individual constituents of blood. Blood samples were diluted             1:1 in RPMI (RPMI 1640, GlutaMAX, 25 mM Hepes; gibco-Life             technologies) and carefully layered onto the Lymphoprep.             After centrifugation, 30 min, 490 g, PBMCs together with             platelets were harvested from the middle layer of cells. The             isolated cells, the buffy coat (BC), was washed twice in             RPMI and cryopreserved at −150° C. in fetal calf serum (FCS;             gibco-Life technologies) containing 10% dimethyl sulfoxide             (DMSO; Sigma-Aldrich). BC's used in this example are listed             in table 1 along with peptide-antigen specific T cells             identified within these samples by conventional MHC multimer             staining.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was a         dextran molecule, to which was attached streptavidin and         fluorochromes. The streptavidin served as attachment sites for         biotinylated oligonucleotides (Label) and biotinylated         peptide-MHC complexes (Binding Molecules). The fluorochrome         allowed separation of cells bound to detection molecules from         cells not bound to detection molecules.         -   i. In this example linkers were linear and branched dextran             molecules with covalently attached streptavidin (5-10 per             linker) and fluorochromes (2-20 per linker) in the form of             PE. Linkers were essentially Dextramer backbone as described             by Immudex.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: The binding molecules used in         this example were two different class I MHC-peptide complexes.         MHC heavy chains (HLA-A0201 and HLA-B0702) and B2M were         expressed in E. coli as previously described (Hadrup et         al. 2009) and each MHC-I complex generated with two peptide         antigens. The individual specificities (allele and peptide         combination) were generated in the following way:         -   a. Synthesis: Binding molecules in this example were             specific pMHC monomers that were produced from UV-exchange             of selected HLA-I monomers carrying a photolabile 9-residue             peptide-ligand (p*). When exposed to UV-light (366 nm) the             photolabile ligand will be cleaved and leave the binding             groove empty. Due to the instability of empty MHC-I             molecules, the complexes will quickly degrade if they are             not rescued by replacement with another peptide that match             that HLA-type. In this way specific pMHC monomers were             produced by mixing excess of desired HLA ligands with p*MHC             monomers. p*MHC monomers were refolded, biotinylated and             purified as previously described (Hadrup et al. 2009).             -   i. HIV derived peptide ILKEPVHGV from antigen HIV                 polymerase and CMV derived peptide TPRVTGGGAM from                 antigen pp65 TPR (Pepscan Presto, NL) were diluted in                 phosphate buffered saline (DPBS; Lonza) and mixed to                 final concentrations 100 μg/ml:200 μM (HLA-A0201:                 ILKEPVHGV and HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM). The mixtures were                 exposed to 366 nm UV light (UV cabinet; CAMAG) for one                 hour and optionally stored for up to 24 h at 4° C.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: Before applying the peptide exchanged HLA             monomer Binding Molecules for preparation of detection             molecules these were centrifuged 5 min, 3300 g, to sediment             any aggregated MHC molecules.     -   4. Label preparation: In this example, two different double         stranded oligonucleotides, DNA barcodes, of the same length but         partially different sequence, were generated. Each of the DNA         barcodes would become attached to a specific pMHC, and thus         functioned as a Label for this specific Binding Molecule. The         oligonucleotides were biotinylated, allowing easy attachment to         the dextran-streptavidin conjugate linker.         -   a. Synthesis: The Labels were generated from partially             complementary oligonucleotides which were purchased from DNA             Technology (Denmark) and delivered as lyophilized powder.             Stock dilutions of 100 μM oligonucleotides were made in             nuclease free water and stored at −20° C.             -   i. The Label system used in this example was named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This was                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) where annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which were applied as a DNA-barcodes (Labels) (see FIG.                 9 for design of the DNA-barcodes).By combining 2 unique                 oligonucleotide-sequences (A label precursor) that were                 partly complementary to 2 other unique oligonucleotide                 sequences (B label precursor) a combinatorial library of                 4 different (AxBy) Labels were produced. Only 2 of these                 Labels were used in this example (A1B1 and A2B2). Refer                 to table 2 for an overview of the different 2OS A and B                 nucleotide sequences. Briefly:             -   Partly complementary A and B oligonucleotides were                 annealed to produce two combined A+B DNA barcodes (A1+61                 to produce A1B1 and A2+B2 to produce A2B2). The                 respective A and B oligonucleotides were mixed as stated                 in table 3, heated to 65° C. for 2 min and cooled slowly                 to <35° C. in 15-30 min. The annealed A and B                 oligonucleotides were then elongated as stated in                 table 3. Elongation reagents were mixed <15 min before                 use. After mixing, the reactions were incubated 5 min,                 RT, to allow elongation of the annealed                 oligonucleotides. The reagents used for annealing (left)                 and elongation (right) of partly complementary                 oligonucleotides is described in table 3. Reagents                 marked in italic were from the the Sequenase Version 2.0                 DNA Sequencing Kit (Affymetrix #70770).         -   b. Modification: All labels were diluted to working             concentrations (2.17 uM) in nuclease free water with 0.1%             Tween and stored at −20° C.         -   c. Purification: Labels were not purified further.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules         (pMHCs) and Labels (DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached         to a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Synthesis: For preparation of Detection Molecules the 2OS             DNA-barcodes were attached to the dextramer prior to             addition of pMHC. 1 ul dextramer was used for every 3 ul of             prepared Detection Molecule. Briefly, for generation of             Detection Molecules:             -   i. The Label:linker conjugate were generated by addition                 of label in two fold excess over linker (label:linker,                 2:1) i.e. 1×0.16 uM linker (dex), were mixed with                 0.15×2.17 uM label (2OS DNA-barcode) and incubated at                 least 30 min, 4° C.             -   ii. Binding molecules, in the form of biotinylated                 UV-exchanged peptide-MHC monomer, were added to the                 label:linker conjugate to reach a concentration of 44                 ug/ml of the given pMHC in 3 ul, and incubated 30 min,                 RT.             -   The final volume was reached by addition of 0.02% NaN₂                 in PBS together with D-biotin (Avidity Bio200) in a                 final concentration of 12.6×10⁻⁶M. The detection                 molecule preparation was incubated 30 min, 4° C., and                 optionally stored for up to 4 weeks at 4° C. (overview                 of the amounts used can be found in table 4). Two sets                 of two detection molecules were generated. Each set with                 the two specificities individually labeled. The label                 was inverted between the two sets as described below.                 -   1. 1×CMV specific pMHCs (HLA-A0201: ILKEPVHGV)                     coupled to 2OS-A1B1, 1×HIV specific pMHCs                     (HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM) coupled to 2OS-A2B2.                 -   2. 1×CMV specific pMHCs (HLA-A0201: ILKEPVHGV)                     coupled to 2OS-A2B2, 1×HIV specific pMHCs                     (HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM) coupled to 2OS-A1B1.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications were performed         -   c. Purification: The Detection Molecules were centrifuged 5             min, 3300 g, to sediment any aggregates before being added             to the cell sample,     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container to allow         Detection Molecules to bind to T cells.         -   a. Amount of sample: 1×10E6-2×10E6 cells in the form of             BC's, were used.         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: According to table 4. for             staining in 100 ul 1.32 ug/ml calculated in relation to each             binding molecule (specific peptide-MHC) on the Detection             Molecule was required per incubation, i.e. 3 ul of each             Detection Molecule.         -   c. Conditions: BCs were thawed in 10 ml, 37° C., RPMI with             10% fetal bovine serum (FBS), centrifuged 5 min, 490 g, and             washed twice in 10 ml RPMI with 10% FBS. All washing of             cells refer to centrifugation 5 min, 490 g, with subsequent             removal of supernatant. 1×10E6-2×10E6 cells were washed in             200 ul barcode-buffer (PBS/0.5% BSA/2 mM EDTA/100 pg/mI             herring DNA) and resuspended in this buffer to approximately             20 pl per sample. The barcode buffer is optimized to             increase the stability of the oligonucleotides associated             with the Detection molecules. The cells were incubated with             50 nM dasatinib, 30 min, 37° C., prior to incubation of             cells with Detection Molecules.             -   i. The Detection molecules were added in the required                 amount. If necessary barcode-buffer was added to reach a                 total volume of 100 ul and cells were incubated 15 min,                 37° C. 20 ul antibody mixture containing                 PerCP-conjugated anti-CD8 antibody and dump channel                 FITC-conjugated antibodies (table 5) along with 0.1 μl                 near-IR-viability dye (Invitrogen L10119) was added for                 every 100 ul of PBMC:detection molecule sample. The                 samples were incubated 30 min, 4° C., and cells were                 washed twice in 200 ul barcode-buffer. Optionally cells                 were fixed in 1% paraformaldehyde in DPBS overnight, 4°                 C., and washed twice in barcode-buffer. Fixed cells were                 stored for up to a week at 4° C.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: The Detection Molecules were enriched by using         flow cytometry, more specifically,         Fluorescence-Activated-Cell-Sorting (FACS). Since all Detection         Molecules carried a PE-fluorescent label, the cells that bound         to Detection Molecules would fluoresce according to this         fluorochromes emission peak. By applying a FACS sorter this         feature could be used to separate cells that bound to detection         molecules from cells that did not bind Detection Molecules i.e.         to separate those cells that did fluoresce from those cells that         did not fluoresce. As a result the Detection Molecules that         bound to cells, and hence the associated Labels, were enriched         for.         -   a. Apply: Cells were sorted on a BD FACSAria, equipped with             three lasers (488 nm blue, 633 nm red and 405 nm violet).             The flow cytometry data analyses were performed using the BD             FACSDiva software version 6.1.2. The following gating             strategy was applied: Lymphocytes were identified in a             FSC/SSC plot. Additional gating on single cells             (FSC-A/FSC-H), live cells (near-IR-viability dye negative),             and CD4, CD14, CD16, CD19, CD40 negative (FITC)/CD8 positive             cells (PerCP) were used to define the CD8 T cell population             (table 5). The PE positive population, i.e. the cells that             bound to detection molecules, were defined within the PerCP             positive population         -   b. Wash: not applied         -   c. Separate: The PE positive cells were sorted by FACS, as             described in 7a, into tubes that contained 200 μl             barcode-buffer and that had been pre-saturated for 2h-O.N.             in 2% BSA. The sorted cells were centrifuged 5 min, 5000 g,             to allow removal of excess buffer (<10 ul should reside in             the container). Cells were stored at −80° C.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Since the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific binding of         the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) to cells, the identification of         the associated Labels (oligonucleotide barcodes) amongst the         sorted cells would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to cells         in the PBMC sample. In this example the enriched Detection         Molecules were identified by quantitative PCR (QPCR) using         Label-specific fluorescent reporter probes.         -   a. Apply: Labels derived from sorted cells were analyzed by             QPCR with the Brilliant II QRT-PCR Low ROX Master Mix Kit             (Agilent technologies, #600837) according to table 6. PCR             was run on the thermal cycler: Mx3000P qPCR system (Agilent             Technologies). The thermal profile is listed in table 7 and             the label-specific fluorescent reporter probes were:             Probe123: 5′6-FAM/GCCTGTAGTCCCACGCGATCTAACA/3′BHQ_1 for             detection of label 2OS-A1B1 and Probe124:         -   5′HEX/CAACCATTGATTGGGGACAACTGGG/3′BHQ_1 for detection of             label 2OS-A2B2. The label specific reporter probes were             purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark) and delivered as             lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of 100 pM             oligonucleotides were made in nuclease free water and stored             at −20° C. Primers used for amplification in this experiment             forward: GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC, and reverse:             CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTC.         -   b. Analysis: combined with the above.

Example 1—Results and Conclusions

After sorting of PE labeled cells and QPCR the resultant Ct values confirmed that Detection Molecules were enriched, i.e. 2OS DNA-barcode Labels were successfully recovered, only when associated with the CMV epitope, while they were not detected when associated with the HIV epitope (FIG. 10). This was observed even when labels were inverted between the two Binding Molecules, implying that the recovery was not Label specific, but truly specific for the Binding molecule.

It was verified that the 2OS labels were recovered after cellular interaction, sorting and QPCR only if they were associated with positive control Detection molecules, and not if they were associated with negative control Detection molecules.

Example 2

In this example the binding molecules are pMHC complexes, the linker is a dextran-streptavidin-fluorochrome conjugate, and the label is a DNA oligonucleotide.

The sample is a HPBMC, the isolating and/or detecting is by FACS, and the determining of the identity of the label is by QPCR.

Example 2 Explained

This is an example where the Sample (1) was blood from one CMV positive and HIV negative donor which was modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The example is similar to example 1 except that a 1000 fold excess of Detection Molecules with irrelevant Binding Molecules but without label were included. The Binding Molecules used (3) are peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying either CMV (positive antigen) or HIV (negative antigen) derived peptide-antigens or pMHC complexes displaying irrelevant peptide antigen. The Binding Molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding Molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC.

The Labels (4) were single stranded oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching binding molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides, DNA-barcodes, onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. Three different detection molecules were generated wherein the two of these individual detection molecules containing CMV- and HIV-directed pMHC were encoded for by corresponding individual DNA-barcodes. Detection Molecules with irrelevant Binding Molecules (p*MHC) were not encoded for with a DNA-barcode.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed detection molecules (5) in a ratio of 1:1:998 (Labeled-CMV:Labeled-HIV:unlabeled-irrelevant directed Binding Molecules) under conditions (6c) that allowed binding of detection molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound detection molecules were separated from the non-cell bound detection molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind detection molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to quantitative PCR analysis of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells to reveal the identity of the detection molecules that bound to the T cells present in the sample. This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to peptide-MHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. It also revealed the feasibility of enriching for Detection Molecules based on the presence of T cells specific for the positive peptide-antigen (CMV) over the negative peptide-antigen (HIV) antigens. In this setting, it was proved that it was possible to specifically enrich Detection Molecules associated with positive peptide-antigen when excess of irrelevant Detection Molecule was included in the sample incubation.

Example 2 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell sample used in this example was         obtained in the same way as described in example 1     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The binding molecules used in         this example were two different class I MHC-peptide complexes.         MHC heavy chains (HLA-A02 and HLA-B07) and B2M were expressed         in E. coli as previously described (Hadrup et al. 2009) and each         MHC-I complex generated with two peptide antigens or left with         an irrelevant photolabile 9-mer peptide. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) were generated in         the following way:         -   a. Synthesis: As in example 1.             -   i. HIV derived peptide ILKEPVHGV from antigen HIV                 polymerase and CMV derived peptide TPRVTGGGAM from                 antigen pp65 TPR (Pepscan Presto, NL) were diluted in                 phosphate buffered saline (DPBS; Lonza) and mixed to                 final concentrations 100 μg/ml:200 μM (HLA-A0201:                 ILKEPVHGV and HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM). The mixtures were                 exposed to 366 nm UV light (UV cabinet; CAMAG) for one                 hour and optionally stored for up to 24 h at 4° C. The                 irrelevant Binding Molecules, p*HLA-A0201 and                 p*HLA-B0702 were mixed in equal amounts (pg/ml) and                 diluted to 100 pg/ml in DPBS.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: Before applying the peptide exchanged HLA             monomer Binding Molecules for preparation of detection             molecules these were centrifuged 5 min, 3300 g, to sediment             any aggregated MHC molecules. The p*MHC monomers were not             purified further.     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker.         -   a. Synthesis: The Labels were oligonucleotides, DNA             barcodes, which were purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark)             and delivered as lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of 100             μM oligonucleotide were made in nuclease free water and             stored at −20° C.             -   i. The Label system used in this example was named 1OS                 and comprised of single stranded oligonucleotides which                 were applied as a DNA barcodes (Oligo 4:                 5GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTTGAACTATGA                 ATCGTCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCAT and Oligo 5:                 5GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTGAANNNNNNTCTATAGGTGTC                 TACTACCTCACTTAAGCTCTTGGTTGCAT were used in this                 experiment, 5 indicates a 5′ biotin modification).         -   b. Modification: All Labels were diluted to working             concentrations (2.17 uM) in nuclease free water with 0.1%             Tween and stored at −20° C.         -   c. Purification: Labels were not purified further.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules         (pMHCs) and Labels (oligonucleotides) were attached to the         Linker (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached         to a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Synthesis: In this example the Detection Molecules were             prepared by attaching 1OS DNA-barcodes prior to addition of             pMHC. Detection Molecules were essentially generated in the             same way as described in example 1, with the difference that             two different sets of two detection molecules were             generated.         -   Each set had two specificities individually labeled. The             Labels were inverted between the two sets as described             below. Moreover a third         -   Detection Molecule was generated without any Label, but             comprised of the Linker and a Binding Molecule (p*MHC), this             detection molecule was included in both sets of Detection             Molecules as described below in the indicated stoichiometry:             -   1. 1×CMV specific pMHCs (HLA-A0201: ILKEPVHGV) coupled                 to Oligo4, 1×HIV specific pMHCs (HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM)                 coupled to Oligo5 and 998x non-labeled p*MHC                 (HLA-A0201:p* and HLA-B0702:p*).             -   2. 1×CMV specific pMHCs (HLA-A0201: ILKEPVHGV) coupled                 to Oligo5, 1×HIV specific pMHCs (HLA-B0702:TPRVTGGGAM)                 coupled to Oligo4 and 998x non-labeled p*MHC                 (HLA-A0201:p* and HLA-B0702:p*).         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of each set of             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules in the pooled solution of Detection Molecules.             -   i. Size exclusion spin columns (Nanosep 300K Omega, Pall                 Corporation) with a cut-off at 300 kDa were saturated by                 adding 500 μl 2% BSA/DPBS and centrifuging 5000 g, until                 the volume had passed through. Subsequently, the columns                 were washed twice by adding 500 μl DPBS and centrifuging                 5000 g until no volume was left in the columns. Each                 pooled set of detection molecules were added to a spin                 column and centrifuged 5000 g, 4° C., until the desired                 volume resided in the column (80 μl per incubation with                 sample). The reduced volume of each set of Detection                 Molecules was moved to new containers.         -   c. Purification: The Detection Molecules were centrifuged 5             min, 3300 g, to sediment any aggregates before being added             to the sample.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were incubated in the same way as         described in example 1.     -   7. Enrichment of Detection Molecules with desired         characteristics: The Detection Molecules were enriched for in         the same way as described in example 1.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Enriched         Detection Molecules were essentially identified in the same way         as described in example 1, with the difference that two         different label-specific fluorescent reporter probes were         applied: LNA-4:         5′6-FAM/TCT[+T][+G][+A]AC[+T][+A]TG[+A][+A][+T]CGTC/3′BHQ-1-plus         for detection of Oligo4 and LNA-5:         5′HEX/TCT[+A][+T][+A]GG[+T][+G]TC[+T][+A][+C]TACC/3′BHQ-1-plus         for detection of Oligo5 ([+X] indicating locked nucleic acids         (LNAs)). Primers used for amplification of Oligo 4 and Oligo 5,         forward: GAGATACGTTGACCTCGTTG and reverse: ATGCAACCAAGAGCTTAAGT.

Example 2—Results and Conclusions

After sorting of PE labeled cells and QPCR the resultant Ct values confirmed that Detection Molecules were enriched, i.e. 1OS DNA-barcode Labels were successfully recovered, only when associated with the CMV epitope, while they were not detected when associated with the HIV epitope (FIG. 11). This was observed even when labels were inverted between the two Binding Molecules, implying that the recovery was not Label specific, but truly specific for the Binding molecule. Moreover the example demonstrated that a great amount of irrelevant Detection molecule equipped with the same fluorescent label as all Detection molecules in the incubation would not be detrimental for enrichment of cells that would fluoresce due to specific binding with a Detection molecule.

It was verified that the 1OS Labels were recovered after cellular interaction, sorting and QPCR only if they were associated with positive control Detection molecules, and not if they were associated with negative control Detection molecules, even in the presence of a high amount of irrelevant Detection molecule.

Example 3

In this example the binding molecules are pMHC representing 6 different HLA-alleles, the linker is dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate and the label is a DNA oligonucleotide.

The sample is HPBMC, the isolating and/or detecting is by FACS, and the determining of the identity of the label is by sequencing.

Example 3 Explained

This is an example where the Samples (1) were blood from one donor that were HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and another donor that were HLA-B0702 negative which were modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs). These samples were mixed in different ratios to generate new samples with different but known frequencies of T cells specific toward the HLA-B0702:CMV epitope. The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 110 different peptide-antigens comprised within 6 different HLA-types. The MHC molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) were single stranded oligonucleotide applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 110 different Detection Molecules were generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, were encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules were separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode Label associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to T cells present in the sample.

This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. The number of sequencing reads mapped to a given DNA-barcode and its corresponding Binding Molecule would mirror the frequency of the T cells found by conventional MHC multimer stainings using the same Binding Molecule.

Example 3 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example was         obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from one donor         that were HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and from another donor         that were HLA-B0702 negative, as determined by conventional         pMHC-multimer and antibody stainings.         -   a. Acquiring sample: As in example 1         -   b. Modifying sample: PBMCs were isolated from whole blood as             described in example 1.             -   i. Mixing of PBMCs from the two donors provided a                 titration of the HLA-B0702 CMV pp65 TPR responses in a                 B0702 negative donor sample. 5 fold dilutions of BC260                 into BC262 were applied to generate seven samples with:                 100, 20, 4, 0.8, 0.16, 0.032 and 0.0064% of cells                 derived from BC260. This corresponded to theoretical                 frequencies of HLA-B0702 CMV pp65 TPR specific T cells                 of 5%, 1%, 0.2%, 0.04%, 0.008%, 0.0016% and 0.00032%.                 The samples were in turn applied to evaluate the                 sensitivity of the Detection Molecules for detecting                 antigen-specific T cells in a sample. The relevance of                 the results obtained after applying the Detection                 Molecules could be evaluated by comparison of results                 obtained by conventional pMHC-multimer staining when                 applying a corresponding sample.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1-2.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example were class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) were generated as         described in example 1. A library of 110 different pMHCs,         comprised of 6 different HLA-types, were generated, these are         listed in table 9.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-2         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-2     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 110 different Labels from the 1OS system were applied         (table 8).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 2             -   i. The Label system used in this example were named 1OS                 and comprised of single stranded oligonucleotides which                 were applied as a DNA barcodes.         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-2.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-2.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules were generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (1OS DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached         to a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules were essentially generated in the             same way as described in example 2, with the difference that             110 different Detection Molecules were generated. The given             combination of Label (DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule             (pMHC) of each Detection Molecule are presented in table 9.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 110 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules. This was done as described in example 2         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-2.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container to allow         Detection Molecules to bind to T cells.         -   a. Amount of sample: Duplicates of seven samples each             comprised of 2×10E6 cells in the form of BC's, i.e.             2×(1×100% BC260 and 6× five-fold dilutions of BC260 into             BC262) (as described in 1.b)         -   b. Amount of Detection Molecule: As described in example 1         -   c. Conditions: BC260 and BC262 were thawed individually in             10 ml, 37° C., RPMI with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS),             centrifuged 5 min, 490 g, and washed twice in 10 ml RPMI             with 10% FBS. All washing of cells refer to centrifugation 5             min, 490 g, with subsequent removal of supernatant. BC's             were incubated individually in 50 nM dasatinib, 30 min,             37° C. and resuspended in 10 ml per 2×10E6 cells of the             respective BC. Five-fold dilutions of BC260 were produced by             adding 2.5 ml (0.5×10E6) of the former cell sample into 10             ml (2×10E6 cells) of the BC262 sample. The mixed cellular             samples were washed in 200 ul barcode-buffer (PBS/0.5% BSA/2             mM EDTA/100 pg/ml herring DNA) and resuspended in this             buffer to approximately 20 μl per sample prior to incubation             of cells with Detection Molecules.             -   i. The Detection molecules were added in the required                 amount and samples were incubated as described in                 example 1-2.     -   7. Enrichment of Detection Molecules with desired         characteristics: The Detection Molecules were enriched for in         the same way as described in example 1-2.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific binding of         the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) to cells, the identification of         the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst the sorted cells         would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to cells in the PBMC         sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes associated with the         enriched Detection Molecules, were amplified by PCR and         identified by high-throughput sequencing.         -   a. Apply. The sorted cell sample which contained             DNA-barcodes derived from the enriched Detection Molecules             were amplified by PCR. See table table 10 for composition of             the PCR and table 11 for the thermal profile. The Taq PCR             Master Mix Kit (Qiagen, #201443) was applied and PCR was run             on the thermal cycler: GeneAmp, PCR System 9700 (Applied             Biosystem). PCR products were visualized after gel             electrophoresis on a Bio-Rad Gel Doc EZ Imager. DNA was             sequenced using the Ion Torrent PGM platform (Life             Technologies)             -   i. Primers were purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark)                 and delivered as lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of                 100 pM were made in nuclease free water and stored at                 −20° C. The primers included adaptors for Ion Torrent                 sequencing, i.e. an A-key and a P1-key on the forward                 and reverse primer respectively. Additionally the                 forward primers had unique DNA sequences besides the                 primer region and the A-key (the primer sequences are                 listed in table 12). These primers were used to assign                 DNA-barcodes derived from the same sample with a                 sample-identification sequence (Sample-ID barcode) (see                 FIG. 9 for a schematic presentation of this design).                 This enabled distribution of DNA-barcode sequence reads                 according to their originating sample, when DNA-barcodes                 from multiple samples were sequenced in the same                 sequencing reaction. The non-enriched library of the 110                 different Detection Molecules (diluted 100.000× after                 being reduced in volume) were also assigned with a                 sample-ID barcode through PCR (referred to as the                 Detection Molecule input). Information about the                 distribution of Labels within the library of Detection                 Molecules before enrichment would allow normalization of                 the sequence output. Pooled PCR products derived from                 the sample input and from multiple incubations of                 Detection Molecule and sample were purified with the                 MinElute PCR purification Kit (Qiagen, #28006) according                 to standard procedure.             -   ii. Purified DNA was sequenced by GeneDx (U.S.A) on an                 Ion Torrent PGM 314 chip.         -   b. Analysis. Positive sequence reads were aligned to             sequences that read from the sample-barcode-identity at the             5′-end all the way through the DNA-barcode-identity. The             number of reads was normalized according to the total number             of reads that mapped to the same sample-ID barcode and             according to the Detection Molecule input reads.             -   i. Mapping sequencing reads to 1OS DNA-barcodes: A                 sequence database was created consisting of the possible                 combinations of 15 sample-identification barcodes and                 110 1OS DNA-barcodes together with the primer sequences                 from the 1OS system. This accumulated to 1650 sequences                 that could be expected from a sequencing run. Each                 sequencing read was then used to search the database for                 alignments, using the nucleotide BLAST algorithm, with a                 match reward of 1, mismatch reward of −2 and a gap cost                 of 2 for both opening and extending a gap. In this way                 sequencing errors were penalized equally, whether a base                 was miscalled or inserted/deleted in the sequencing read                 compared to the actual sequence. Alignments were                 discarded by the following criteria:                 -   1. E-value >1e-12; insufficient length of alignment                     (should be greater than 60 for the 1OS barcodes).                 -   2. Start position in subject sequence larger than 2,                     i.e. fewer than 5 out of 6 bases in the unique part                     of the sample-identification barcode was included in                     the alignment.             -   ii. If multiple alignments could still be found for any                 sequencing read, only the alignment with the best                 percent identity was kept. Finally, the number of reads                 mapping to each DNA barcode in the database was counted.             -   iii. Identifying overrepresented DNA barcodes: Relative                 read counts were calculated by normalizing each read to                 the total read count mapping to the same sample-ID                 barcode. The relative read counts were then used to                 calculate the fold change per DNA-barcode compared to                 the control DNA-barcode Detection Molecule input (the                 non-enriched Detection Molecule library). Significantly                 overrepresented DNA-barcodes were identified using a                 2-sample test for equality of proportions on the raw                 read counts in a sample versus the DNA-barcode                 input-sample, and p-values were corrected for multiple                 testing using the Benjamini-Hochberg FDR method.

Example 3—Results and Conclusions

FACS sorting of fluorescent labeled cells, specific amplification of DNA-barcode Labels and high-throughput sequencing verified that it was possible to enrich and detect 1OS barcodes from a library of multiple different Detection molecules composed of 110 different 2OS DNA-barcode Labels encoding for 110 different antigen specificities distributed on 6 different HLA-types (FIG. 12). Moreover the number of sequence reads recovered from a given 1OS barcode was sensitive to the frequency of antigen specific T cells in the sample.

This example demonstrates that it is possible to detect antigen specific T cell responses of different frequencies in a panel of 110 different 1OS labeled Detection Molecules.

Example 4

In this example the binding molecules are class I pMHC complexes comprising 6 different HLA alleles, the linker is dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate and the label is a DNA oligonucleotide.

The sample is HPBMC, the isolating and/or detecting is by FACS, and the determining of the identity of the label is by sequencing.

Example 4 Explained

This example was essentially the same as example 3 only another Label system was applied.

This is an example where the Samples (1) were blood from one donor that were HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and another donor that were HLA-B0702 negative which were modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs). These samples were mixed in different ratios to generate new samples with different but known frequencies of T cells specific toward the HLA-B0702:CMV epitope. The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 110 different peptide-antigens comprised within 6 different HLA-types. The MHC molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) were oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels were combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label. The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 110 different Detection Molecules were generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, were encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules were separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to T cells present in the sample.

This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. The number of sequencing reads mapped to a given DNA-barcode and its corresponding Binding Molecule would mirror the frequency of the T cells found by conventional MHC multimer stainings using the same Binding Molecule. Moreover it revealed that Labels, i.e. Detection Molecules, associated with T cells in a sample would be sufficiently enriched to reveal the presence of low frequent T cells binding such Detection Molecules.

Example 4 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example         were obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from one         donor that were HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and from another         donor that were HLA-B0702 negative, as determined by         conventional pMHC-multimer and antibody staining. They were         acquired (a.) and modified (b.) in the same way as described in         example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1-3.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example were class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) were generated as         described in example 1-3. A library of 110 different pMHCs were         generated, comprised of 6 different HLA-types, these are listed         in table 9.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-3         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-3     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 110 different Labels from the 2OS system were applied         (table 2).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1.             -   i. The Label system used in this example was named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This was                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) where annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which were applied as a DNA-barcodes (Labels) (FIG.                 9).By combining 6 unique oligonucleotide-sequences (A                 label precursor) that were all partly complementary to                 20 other unique oligonucleotide sequences (B label                 precursor) a combinatorial library of 120 different                 (AxBy) Labels were produced. Only 110 of these Labels                 were used in this example (table 9).         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-3.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-3.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules were generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached         to a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules were essentially generated in the             same way as described in example 3. The given combination of             Label (2OS DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule (pMHC) of each             Detection Molecule are presented in table 9.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 110 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules. This was done as described in example 2-3.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container to allow         Detection Molecules to bind to T cells.         -   a. Amount of sample: Samples were equivalent to those used             in example 3.         -   b. Amount of Detection Molecule: As described in example 1-3         -   c. Conditions: Samples and Detection Molecules were treated             under the same conditions as described in example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules were enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-3.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific interaction         of the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) with cells, the         identification of the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst         the sorted cells would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to         cells in the PBMC sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes         associated with the enriched Detection Molecules, were amplified         by PCR and identified by high-throughput sequencing.         -   a. Apply. The sorted cell sample which contained             DNA-barcodes derived from the enriched Detection Molecules             were amplified by PCR. See table table 10 for composition of             the PCR and table 11 for the thermal profile. The Taq PCR             Master Mix Kit (Qiagen, #201443) was applied and PCR was run             on the thermal cycler: GeneAmp, PCR System 9700 (Applied             Biosystem). PCR products were visualized after gel             electrophoresis on a Bio-Rad Gel Doc EZ Imager. DNA was             sequenced using the Ion Torrent PGM platform (Life             Technologies)             -   i. Primers were purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark)                 and delivered as lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of                 100 pM were made in nuclease free water and stored at                 −20° C. The primers included adaptors for Ion Torrent                 sequencing, i.e. an A-key and a P1-key on the forward                 and reverse primer respectively. Additionally the                 forward primers had unique DNA sequences besides the                 primer region and the A-key. These primers were used to                 assign DNA-barcodes derived from the same sample with a                 sample-identification sequence (Sample-ID barcode) (the                 primer sequences are listed in table 13). This enabled                 distribution of DNA-barcode sequence reads according to                 their originating sample, when DNA-barcodes from                 multiple samples were sequenced in the same sequencing                 reaction. The non-enriched library of the 110 different                 Detection Molecules (diluted 100.000× after being                 reduced in volume) were also assigned with a sample-ID                 barcode through PCR (referred to as the Detection                 Molecule input)(see FIG. 9 for a schematic overview of                 the primer design). Information about the distribution                 of Labels within the library of Detection Molecules                 before enrichment would allow normalization of the                 sequence output. Pooled PCR products derived from the                 sample input and from multiple incubations of Detection                 Molecule and sample were purified with the MinElute PCR                 purification Kit (Qiagen, #28006) according to standard                 procedure.             -   ii. The purified DNA was sequenced by GeneDx (U.S.A) on                 an Ion Torrent PGM 314 chip.         -   b. Analysis. Positive sequence reads were aligned to             sequences that read from the sample-barcode-identity at the             5′-end all the way through the DNA-barcode-identity. The             number of reads was normalized according to the total number             of reads that mapped to the same sample-ID barcode and             according to the Detection Molecule input reads. The             Analysis was essentially as in example 3 except that another             database of 2OS sequences was generated and sequences were             mapped according to corresponding 2OS DNA-barcodes.             -   i. Mapping sequencing reads to 2OS DNA-barcodes: A                 sequence database was created consisting of the possible                 combinations of 15 sample-identification barcodes and                 120 2OS DNA barcodes (together with the primer and                 annealing sequences from the 2OS system). This                 accumulated to1800 sequences that could be expected from                 a sequencing run. Each sequencing read was then used to                 search the database for alignments, using the nucleotide                 BLAST algorithm, with a match reward of 1, mismatch                 reward of −2 and a gap cost of 2 for both opening and                 extending a gap. In this way sequencing errors were                 penalized equally, whether a base was miscalled or                 inserted/deleted in the sequencing read compared to the                 actual sequence. Alignments were discarded by the                 following criteria:                 -   1. E-value>1e-12; insufficient length of alignment                     (should be greater than 102 for the 2OS barcodes).                 -   2. Start position in subject sequence larger than 2,                     i.e. fewer than 5 out of 6 bases in the unique part                     of the sample-identification barcode was included in                     the alignment.             -   ii. If multiple alignments could still be found for any                 sequencing read, only the alignment with the best                 percent identity was kept. Finally, the number of reads                 mapping to each DNA barcode in the database was counted.             -   iii. Identifying overrepresented DNA barcodes: Relative                 read counts were calculated by normalizing each read to                 the total read count mapping to the same sample-ID                 barcode. The relative read counts were then used to                 calculate the fold change per DNA-barcode compared to                 the control DNA-barcode Detection Molecule input (the                 non-enriched Detection Molecule library). Significantly                 overrepresented DNA-barcodes were identified using a                 2-sample test for equality of proportions on the raw                 read counts in a sample versus the DNA-barcode                 input-sample, and p-values were corrected for multiple                 testing using the Benjamini-Hochberg FDR method.

Example 4—Results and Conclusions

FACS sorting of fluorescent labeled cells, specific amplification of DNA-barcode Labels and high-throughput sequencing verified that it was possible to enrich and detect 2OS barcodes from a library of multiple different Detection molecules composed of 110 different 2OS DNA-barcode Labels encoding for 110 different antigen specificities distributed on 6 different HLA-types (FIG. 13). Moreover the number of sequence reads recovered from a given 2OS barcode was sensitive to the frequency of antigen specific T cells in the sample, also indicating that it will be possible to detect Labels associated with responses of very low frequency (<0.002).

This example demonstrates that it is possible to detect antigen specific T cell responses of different and of low frequencies in a panel of 110 different 2OS labeled Detection Molecules.

Example 5

In this example the binding molecules are class I pMHCs, the linker is streptavidin conjugate and the label is DNA.

The isolating and/or detecting is by FACS, and the determining of the identity of the label is by sequencing.

Example 5 Explained

This is an example where the Samples (1) were blood from six different donors with different HLA-types which were modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 110 different peptide-antigens comprised within 6 different HLA-types. The MHC molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) were single stranded oligonucleotide applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 110 different Detection Molecules were generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, were encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules were separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to T cells present in the sample.

This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. The application of multiple (110) Detection Molecules in one sample enabled detection of T cells with different T cell receptor specificities in parallel.

Example 5 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example         were obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from six         different donors with a number of different peptide-antigen         responsive T cells, as determined by conventional pMHC-multimer         staining.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Blood was obtained from the Danish             Blood Bank, as example 1-4         -   b. Modifying sample: PBMCs were isolated from whole blood as             described in example 1-4.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1-4.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example were class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) were generated as         described in example 1. A library of 110 different pMHCs,         comprised of 6 different HLA-types, were generated, these are         listed in table 9.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-4         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-4     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 110 different Labels from the 1OS system were applied         (table 8).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 2-3.             -   i. The Label system used in this example were named 1OS                 and comprised of single stranded oligonucleotides which                 were applied as a DNA barcodes.         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-4.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-4.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules were generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (1OS DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate) to form Detection Molecules,         in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached to a given         DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules were generated in the same way as             described in example 3. The given combination of Label             (DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule (pMHC) of each Detection             Molecule are presented in table 9.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 110 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules. This was done as described in example 2-4.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-4.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were incubated in the same way as         described in example 1-2.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules were enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-6.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific interaction         of the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) with cells, the         identification of the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst         the sorted cells would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to         cells in the PBMC sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes         associated with the enriched Detection Molecules, were amplified         by PCR and identified by high-throughput sequencing. The         enriched Labels, of the 1OS DNA-barcode system, were identified         as in example 3.

Example 5—Results and Conclusions

FACS sorting of fluorescent labeled cells, specific amplification of DNA-barcode Labels and high-throughput sequencing verified that it was possible to enrich and detect 1OS barcodes from a library of multiple different Detection molecules composed of 110 different 1OS DNA-barcode Labels encoding for 110 different antigen specificities distributed on 6 different HLA-types (FIG. 14). It was verified that several DNA-barcodes, encoding different antigen specificities on different HLA-types, could be enriched for and detected in parallel, indicative for the presence of multiple antigen-specific T cell responses in that sample.

This example demonstrates that it is possible to detect several antigen-specific T cell responses in parallel when applying a library of Detection molecules of increasing complexity.

Example 6

In this example 110 different binding molecules are used, the linker is dextran for all of the detection molecules and 110 different labels are used.

Example 6 Explained

This example was essentially the same as example 5 only another Label system was applied.

This is an example where the Samples (1) were blood from six different donors with different HLA-types which were modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 110 different peptide-antigens comprised within 6 different HLA-types. The MHC molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T cell populations.

The Labels (4) were oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels were combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label. The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 110 different Detection Molecules were generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, were encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) was incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules were separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to T cells present in the sample.

This example thus revealed the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. The application of multiple (110) Detection Molecules in one sample enabled detection of T cells with different T cell receptor specificities in parallel.

Example 6 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example         were obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from six         different donors with a number of different peptide-antigen         responsive T cells, as determined by conventional pMHC-multimer.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Blood was obtained from the Danish             Blood Bank.         -   b. Modifying sample: PBMCs were isolated from whole blood as             described in example 1-2, 5.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1-5.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example were class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) were generated as         described in example 1-5. A library of 110 different pMHCs,         comprised of 6 different HLA-types, were generated, these are         listed in table 9.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-5.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-5     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 110 different Labels from the 2OS system were applied         (table 2).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1, 4.             -   i. The Label system used in this example was named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This was                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) where annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which were applied as a molecular barcodes (Labels)                 (FIG. 9). By combining 6 unique                 oligonucleotide-sequences (A label precursor) that were                 all partly complementary to 20 other unique                 oligonucleotide sequences (B label precursor) a                 combinatorial library of 120 different (AxBy) Labels                 were produced. Only 110 of these Labels were used in                 this example (table 9).         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-5.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-5.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules were generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate) to form Detection Molecules,         in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached to a given         DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules were generated in the same way as             described in example 3, 4, 5. The given combination of Label             (2OS DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule (pMHC) of each             Detection Molecule are presented in table 9.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 110 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules (done as described in example 2-5).         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-5.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were incubated in the same way as         described in example 1-2, 5.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules were enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-5.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific binding of         the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) to cells, the identification of         the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst the sorted cells         would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to cells in the PBMC         sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes associated with the         enriched Detection Molecules, were amplified by PCR and         identified by high-throughput sequencing. The enriched Labels,         of the 2OS DNA-barcode system, were identified as in example 4.

Example 6—Results and Conclusions

FACS sorting of fluorescent labeled cells, specific amplification of DNA-barcode Labels and high-throughput sequencing verified that it was possible to enrich and detect 2OS barcodes from a library of multiple different Detection molecules composed of 110 different 2OS DNA-barcode Labels encoding for 110 different antigen specificities distributed on 6 different HLA-types (FIG. 15). It was verified that several DNA-barcodes, encoding different antigen specificities of different HLA-types, could be enriched for and detected in parallel, indicative for the presence of multiple antigen-specific T cell responses in that sample.

This example demonstrates that it is possible to detect several antigen-specific T cell responses in parallel when applying a library of Detection molecules of increasing complexity.

Example 7

In this example 175 different pMHC complexes are used as binding molecules. The sample is tumor infiltrating Lymphocytes from a resected tumor lesion of a human being.

Example 7 Explained

This is an example where the Samples (1) were resected tumor lesions from 11 HLA-A0201 positive patients with malignant melanoma. The samples were modified (1b) to generate Tumor Infiltrating Lymphocytes (TILs).

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) were peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 175 different peptide-antigens. The MHC molecules were modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules were purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) were oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides were synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and were synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels were combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label. The Detection Molecule (5) was synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 175 different Detection Molecules were generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, were encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, TILs (1b), was incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules were separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the TIL's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the TIL sample.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode Label associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to T cells present in the sample.

This example thus revealed the presence of T cells among the TIL's expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of Detection Molecules. The number of sequencing reads mapped to a given DNA-barcode and its corresponding Binding Molecule would mirror the frequency of the T cells found by conventional MHC multimer stainings using the same Binding Molecules. The application of multiple (175) Detection Molecules in one sample enabled detection of T cells with different T cell receptor specificities in parallel. This is feasible also when the sample, as in present example is TILs that on average basis has a lower avidity of their TCR to their pMHC antigen. Consequently they are more challenging to detect than virus-responsive T cells using traditional fluorescence labelled MHC mulitimers.

Example 7 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The 11 cell samples used in this example         were obtained from resected tumor lesions obtained from patients         with malignant melanoma.         -   a. Acquiring sample. TILs were derived from tumor fragments             from melanoma patients. Tumor lesion were resected following             surgical removal of the given tumor lesion.         -   b. Modifying sample. Tumor fragments (1-3 mm3) were cultured             individually in complete medium (RPMI with 10% human serum,             100 U/ml penicillin, 100 pg/ml streptomycin, 1.25 pg/ml             fungizone [Bristol-Myers Squibb] and 6000 U/ml IL-2) at             37° C. and 5% CO2, allowing TILs to migrate to the medium.             TILs were expanded to reach >50×10⁶ total cells originated             from approximately 24 fragments, which had expanded to             confluent growth in 2-ml wells and eliminated adherent tumor             cells (average of approximately 2×10⁶ cells per well from             each tumor fragment). TIL cultures were expanded on a             clinical scale using a standard rapid expansion protocol             (REP). Briefly, TILs were stimulated with 30 ng/ml anti-CD3             antibody (OKT-3; Ortho Biotech) and 6000 U/ml IL-2 in the             presence of irradiated (40 Gy) allogenic feeder cells (PBMCs             from a healthy donor) at a feeder:TIL ratio of 200:1.             Initially, TILs were rapidly expanded in a 1:1 mix of             complete medium and REP medium (AIM-V [Invitrogen] with 10%             human serum, 1.25 pg/ml fungizone and 6000 U/ml IL-2), but             after seven days complete medium and serum were removed             stepwise from the culture by adding REP medium without serum             to maintain cell densities around 1-2×10⁶ cells/ml. TIL             cultures were cryopreserved at −150° C. in human serum             containing 10% DMSO. All patients were HLA-A0201 positive.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example was         prepared as in example 1-6.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example were class I MHC-peptide complexes         (peptide-HLA-A0201). The individual specificities (allele and         peptide combination) were generated as described in example 1-6.         A library of 175 different pMHCs were generated, these are         listed in table 2.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-6         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-6     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels were synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 175 different Labels from the 2OS system were applied         (table 14).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1.             -   i. The Label system used in this example was named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This was                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) where annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which were applied as a DNA-barcodes (Labels) (FIG. 9).                 By combining 22 unique oligonucleotide-sequences (A                 label precursor) that are all partly complementary to 55                 other unique oligonucleotide sequences (B label                 precursor) a combinatorial library of 1,210 different                 (AxBy) Labels were produced. Only 175 of these Labels                 were used in this example (table 14). Refer to table 2                 for an overview of the different 2OS A and B nucleotide                 sequences.         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-6.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-6.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 175 different Detection         Molecules were generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) were attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC was always attached         to a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules were essentially generated in the             same way as described in example 1-6. The given combination             of Label (2OS DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule (pMHC) of             each Detection Molecule are presented in table 14.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 175 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeded 100 μl this volume was reduced             to reach a desired concentration of specific Binding             Molecules. This was done as described in example 2-6.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-6.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container to allow         Detection Molecules to bind to T cells.         -   a. Amount of sample: Between 0.2×10E6-2.3×10E6 cells in the             form of TILs, were used.         -   b. Amount of Detection Molecule: As described in example 1-6         -   c. Conditions: Samples and Detection Molecules were treated             as described in example 1-2 and 5-6.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules were enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-6.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules were enriched based on specific interaction         of the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) with cells, the         identification of the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst         the sorted cells would also reveal the pMHCs that had bound to         cells in the TIL sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes         associated with the enriched Detection Molecules, were amplified         by PCR and identified by high-throughput sequencing.         -   a. Apply. The sorted cell samples which contained             DNA-barcodes derived from the enriched Detection Molecules             were amplified by PCR. See table table 10 for composition of             the PCR and table 11 for the thermal profile. The Taq PCR             Master Mix Kit (Qiagen, #201443) was applied and PCR was run             on the thermal cycler: GeneAmp, PCR System 9700 (Applied             Biosystem). PCR products were visualized after gel             electrophoresis on a Bio-Rad Gel Doc EZ Imager. DNA was             sequenced using the Ion Torrent PGM platform (Life             Technologies)             -   i. Primers were purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark)                 and delivered as lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of                 100 pM were made in nuclease free water and stored at                 −20° C. The primers included adaptors for Ion Torrent                 sequencing, i.e. an A-key and a P1-key on the forward                 and reverse primer respectively. Additionally the                 forward primers had unique DNA sequences besides the                 primer region and the A-key. These primers were used to                 assign DNA-barcodes derived from the same sample with a                 sample-identification sequence (Sample-ID barcode)                 (refer to table 13 for primer sequences). This enabled                 distribution of DNA-barcode sequence reads according to                 their originating sample, when DNA-barcodes from                 multiple samples were sequenced in the same sequencing                 reaction (see FIG. 9 for a schematic presentation of the                 primer design). If >10.000 cells were sorted in the                 enrichment step, only a volume corresponding to 10.000                 cells were applied as template in the PCR. To further                 examine the potential impact on the number of cells                 selected with associated Detection moleclues, we                 included Enriched Detection Molecules derived from one                 sample (sample 8) multiple times, so that triplicate                 PCRs were run with equivalent to 10.000 sorted cells and                 100 sorted cells respectively. Moreover a single PCR was                 run with 1000 cells from the same sample. The                 non-enriched library of the 175 different Detection                 Molecules (diluted 10.000x after being reduced in                 volume) were also assigned with a sample-ID barcode                 through PCR (referred to as the Detection                 Molecule-input). Triplicate PCRs were run with the                 Detection Molecule-input. Information about the                 distribution of Labels within the library of Detection                 Molecules before enrichment would allow normalization of                 the sequence output. Pooled PCR products derived from                 the Detection Molecule-input and from multiple                 incubations of Detection Molecule and sample were                 separated according to size, by gel-electrophoresis, and                 the excised gel-fragment containing DNA-fragments of                 −200 bp were purified with the QIAquick PCR Purification                 Kit (Qiagen, #28104) according to standard procedure.             -   ii. The purified DNA was sequenced by Amplexa (Denmark)                 on an Ion Torrent PGM 314 chip.         -   b. Analysis. Positive sequence reads were aligned to             sequences that read from the sample-barcode-identity at the             5′-end all the way through the DNA-barcode-identity. The             number of reads was normalized according to the total number             of reads that mapped to the same sample-ID barcode and             according to the Detection Molecule input reads. The             Analysis was essentially as in example 4 and 6 except that             the database of 2OS sequences was expanded to include the             new 175 Labels and sequences were mapped according to             corresponding 2OS DNA-barcodes.             -   i. Mapping sequencing reads to 2OS DNA-barcodes: A                 sequence database was created consisting of the possible                 combinations of 20 sample-identification barcodes and                 192 2OS DNA barcodes (together with the primer and                 annealing sequences from the 2OS system). This                 accumulated to 3840 sequences that could be expected                 from a sequencing run. Each sequencing read was then                 used to search the database for alignments, using the                 nucleotide BLAST algorithm, with a match reward of 1,                 mismatch reward of −2 and a gap cost of 2 for both                 opening and extending a gap. In this way sequencing                 errors were penalized equally, whether a base was                 miscalled or inserted/deleted in the sequencing read                 compared to the actual sequence. Alignments were                 discarded by the following criteria:                 -   1. E-value >1e-12; insufficient length of alignment                     (should be greater than 102 for the 2OS barcodes).                 -   2. Start position in subject sequence larger than 2,                     i.e. fewer than 5 out of 6 bases in the unique part                     of the sample-identification barcode was included in                     the alignment.             -   ii. If multiple alignments could still be found for any                 sequencing read, only the alignment with the best                 percent identity was kept. Finally, the number of reads                 mapping to each DNA barcode in the database was counted.             -   iii. Identifying overrepresented DNA barcodes: Two                 amendments of the analysis performed in example 4 and 6                 (as well as 3 and 5 in respect to the 1OS label system)                 were introduced:                 -   a. The N6 sequence (FIG. 9) were applied to reduce                     the clonality of the amplification product to avoid                     potential biases derived from amplification of                     enriched 2OS sequence Labels.                 -    i. Any repetitive reads that would share a N6 and                     map to a given sample-ID all through the 2OS barcode                     region were virtually removed ensuring that this                     sequence was only accounted for once.                 -   b. The sequencing data was reanalyzed after virtual                     removal of the most high-frequent sequences. This                     ensured that potential biases derived from                     high-percentage enrichment of a given Detection                     Molecule, resulting in large read counts from the                     associated 2OS sequence Label, would not mask the                     presence of lower percentages yet enriched Detection                     Molecules.             -   Collectively this strategy is termed clonality                 reduction. Relative read counts were calculated by                 normalizing each read to the total read count mapping to                 the same sample-ID barcode. The relative read counts                 were then used to calculate the fold change per                 DNA-barcode compared to the control DNA-barcode                 Detection Molecule input (the non-enriched Detection                 Molecule library). Significantly overrepresented                 DNA-barcodes were identified using a 2-sample test for                 equality of proportions on the raw read counts in a                 sample versus the DNA-barcode input-sample, and p-values                 were corrected for multiple testing using the                 Benjamini-Hochberg FDR method. The algorithm applied for                 this analysis is available at:                 www.cbs.dtu.dk/services/Barracoda/

Example 7—Results and Conclusions

FACS sorting of fluorescent labeled cells, specific amplification of DNA-barcode Labels and high-throughput sequencing verified that it was possible to enrich and detect 2OS barcodes from a library of multiple different Detection molecules composed of 175 different 2OS DNA-barcode Labels encoding for 175 different cancer-specificities (FIG. 16). It implied that several DNA-barcodes, encoding different antigen specificities, could be enriched for and detected in parallel, also when the samples, as in the present example, were TILs that on average has a lower avidity of their TCR to their pMHC antigen. The results indicated that the presence of multiple cancer-specific T cell responses could be detected in parallel in a sample.

This example implies that it is possible to detect several cancer-specific T cell responses in parallel when applying a library of Detection molecules of increasing complexity.

Example 8

In this example 1025 different binding molecules are used in the form of pMHC complexes (each with DNA labels).

The sample is a mixture of two different blood samples, the isolating and/or detecting is done by flow cytometry and the determining of the identity of the label is done by sequencing the DNA label.

Example 8 Explained

This example is essentially the same as example 4 but will apply a larger Detection Molecule library (1025) and will include a greater number of different HLA-types (11) to analyze the same samples.

This is an example where the Samples (1) are blood from one donor that is HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and another donor that is HLA-B0702 negative which are modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs). These samples are mixed in different ratios to generate new samples with different but known frequencies of T cells specific toward the HLA-B0702:CMV epitope.

The Linker (2) is a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) are peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 1025 different peptide-antigens. The MHC molecules are modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules are purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) are oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides are synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and are synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels are combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label.

The Detection Molecule (5) is synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contains a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 1025 different Detection Molecules are generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, are encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) is incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules are separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells are subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product will reveal the identity of Detection Molecules that binds to T cells present in the sample.

This example will reveal the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of 1025 Detection Molecules. The number of sequencing reads that will map to a given DNA-barcode and its corresponding Binding Molecule will mirror the frequency of the T cells found by conventional MHC multimer stainings using the same Binding Molecules. The increased complexity of the Detection Molecule library, in terms of the number of different Binding Molecules and Labels, will reflect positively upon the sensitivity for detecting a given Label, i.e. a Detection Molecule, associated with low frequencies of T cells binding such Detection Molecules.

Example 8 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example are         obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from one donor         that is HLA-B0702:CMV pp65 TPR positive and from another donor         that is HLA-B0702 negative, as determined by conventional         pMHC-multimer and antibody staining. They are acquired (a.) and         modified (b.) in the same way as described in example 3-4.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         prepared as in example 1-7.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example are class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) are generated as         described in example 1-7. A library of 1025 different pMHCs are         generated including 11 different HLA-types.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-7         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels are synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 1025 different Labels from the 2OS system were applied         (table 2).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1.             -   i. The Label system used in this example is named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This is                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) are annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which are applied as a DNA-barcodes (Labels) (FIG. 2).                 By combining 22 unique oligonucleotide-sequences (A                 label precursor) that are all partly complementary to 55                 other unique oligonucleotide sequences (B label                 precursor) a combinatorial library of 1210 different                 (AxBy) Labels are produced. Only 1025 of these Labels                 are used in this example.         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-7.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 1025 different Detection         Molecules are generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) are attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC is always attached to         a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules are essentially generated in the same             way as described in example 1-7. The given combination of             Label (2OS DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule (pMHC) of each             Detection Molecule are registered.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 1025 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeds 100 μl this volume is reduced to             reach a desired concentration of specific Binding Molecules.             This is done as described in example 2-7.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules are mixed in one container to allow         Detection Molecules to bind to T cells.         -   a. Amount of sample: Samples are equivalent to those used in             example 3-4.         -   b. Amount of Detection Molecule: As described in example 1-7         -   c. Conditions: Samples and Detection Molecules are treated             under the same conditions as described in example 3-4.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules are enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-7.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules are enriched based on specific interaction         of the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) with cells, the         identification of the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst         the sorted cells will also reveal the pMHCs that bind to cells         in the PBMC sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes associated         with the enriched Detection Molecules, are amplified by PCR and         identified by high-throughput sequencing.         -   a. Apply. The sorted cell samples which contain DNA-barcodes             derived from the enriched Detection Molecules are amplified             by PCR. See table table 10 for composition of the PCR and             table 11 for the thermal profile. The Taq PCR Master Mix Kit             (Qiagen, #201443) is applied and PCR is run on the thermal             cycler: GeneAmp, PCR System 9700 (Applied Biosystem). PCR             products are visualized after gel electrophoresis on a             Bio-Rad Gel Doc EZ Imager. DNA is sequenced using the Ion             Torrent PGM platform (Life Technologies)             -   i. Primers are purchased from DNA Technology (Denmark)                 and delivered as lyophilized powder. Stock dilutions of                 100 pM are made in nuclease free water and stored at                 −20° C. The primers include adaptors for Ion Torrent                 sequencing, i.e. an A-key and a P1-key on the forward                 and reverse primer respectively. Additionally the                 forward primers have unique DNA sequences besides the                 primer region and the A-key. These primers are used to                 assign DNA-barcodes derived from the same sample with a                 sample-identification sequence (Sample-ID barcode)                 (refer to table 13 for primer sequences). This enables                 distribution of DNA-barcode sequence reads according to                 their originating sample, when DNA-barcodes from                 multiple samples are sequenced in the same sequencing                 reaction (see FIG. 9 for a schematic presentation of the                 primer design). The non-enriched library of the 1025                 different Detection Molecules (diluted 100.000× after                 being reduced in volume) are also assigned with a                 sample-ID barcode through PCR (referred to as the                 Detection Molecule input). Triplicate PCRs are run with                 the Detection Molecule-input. Information about the                 distribution of Labels within the library of Detection                 Molecules before enrichment will allow normalization of                 the sequence output. Pooled PCR products derived from                 the sample input and from multiple incubations of                 Detection Molecule and sample are separated according to                 size, by gel-electrophoresis, and the excised                 gel-fragment containing DNA-fragments of ˜200 bp are                 purified with the QIAquick PCR Purification Kit (Qiagen,                 #28104) according to standard procedure.             -   ii. The purified DNA was sequenced on an Ion Torrent PGM                 314 chip.         -   b. Analysis. Positive sequence reads are aligned to             sequences that read from the sample-barcode-identity at the             5′-end all the way through the DNA-barcode-identity. The             number of reads is normalized according to the total number             of reads that maps to the same sample-ID barcode and             according to the Detection Molecule input reads. The             Analysis is essentially as in example 7 except that the             database of 2OS sequences now includes 1025 Labels and             sequences are mapped according to corresponding 2OS             DNA-barcodes.             -   i. Mapping sequencing reads to 2OS DNA-barcodes: A                 sequence database is created consisting of the possible                 combinations of 10 sample-identification barcodes and                 1025 2OS DNA barcodes (together with the primer and                 annealing sequences from the 2OS system). This                 accumulates to 10250 sequences that can be expected from                 a sequencing run. Each sequencing read is then used to                 search the database for alignments, using the nucleotide                 BLAST algorithm, with a match reward of 1, mismatch                 reward of −2 and a gap cost of 2 for both opening and                 extending a gap. In this way sequencing errors are                 penalized equally, whether a base was miscalled or                 inserted/deleted in the sequencing read compared to the                 actual sequence. Alignments are discarded by the                 following criteria:                 -   1. E-value>1e-12; insufficient length of alignment                     (should be greater than 102 for the 2OS barcodes).                 -   2. Start position in subject sequence larger than 2,                     i.e. fewer than 5 out of 6 bases in the unique part                     of the sample-identification barcode was included in                     the alignment.                 -   If multiple alignments can still be found for any                     sequencing read, only the alignment with the best                     percent identity is kept. Finally, the number of                     reads mapping to each DNA barcode in the database is                     counted.             -   ii. Identifying overrepresented DNA barcodes: Is                 essentially performed as described in example 7 with the                 strategy of applying clonality reduction.                 -   Relative read counts are calculated by normalizing                     each read to the total read count mapping to the                     same sample-ID barcode. The relative read counts are                     then used to calculate the fold change per                     DNA-barcode compared to the control DNA-barcode                     Detection Molecule input (the non-enriched Detection                     Molecule library). Significantly overrepresented                     DNA-barcodes are identified using a 2-sample test                     for equality of proportions on the raw read counts                     in a sample versus the DNA-barcode input-sample, and                     p-values are corrected for multiple testing using                     the Benjamini-Hochberg FDR method. The algorithm                     applied for this analysis is available at:                     www.cbs.dtu.dk/services/Barracoda/25

Example 8—Results and Conclusions

The expected outcome of this example is knowledge on the sensitivity for detecting antigen-specific T cell responses of decreasing frequency (<0.002% of CD8 T cells) in a number of similar samples. The sensitivity will expectantly increase with increasing numbers of Detection molecules incubated with a given sample, because any sequencing reads that are caused by background will be distributed on a greater number of Labels, in this example 1025.

Example 9

In this example 1025 different pMHC complexes, comprising 11 different HLA-alleles, are used as binding molecules. The sample is a mixture of blood from 10 different donors.

Example 9 Explained

This example is essentially the same as example 6 but a greater number of samples (10) will be analyzed with a larger Detection Molecule library (1025), which will include a greater number of different HLA-types (11).

This is an example where the Samples (1) are blood from 10 different donors with different HLA-types which are modified (1b) to generate Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs).

The Linker (2) is a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) are peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying one out of 1025 different peptide-antigens. The MHC molecules are modified (3b) by biotinylation to provide a biotin capture-tag for the Linker. The binding molecules are purified (2c) by HPLC and quality controlled in terms of the formation of functional pMHC multimers for staining of control T-cell populations.

The Labels (4) are oligonucleotides applied as DNA-barcodes. The oligonucleotides are synthetized (4a) by DNA Technology A/S (Denmark) and are synthetically modified (4b) with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels are combined oligonucleotide labels arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label.

The Detection Molecule (5) is synthetized (5a) by attaching Binding Molecules in the form of biotinylated pMHC and Labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotides (DNA-barcodes) onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contains a modification (5b) in the form of a fluorochrome. A library of 1025 different Detection Molecules are generated wherein individual Binding Molecules, comprised of different pMHC, are encoded for by corresponding individual Labels, comprised of different DNA-barcodes.

An amount of sample, PBMC's (1b) is incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules (5) under conditions (6c) allowing binding of Detection Molecules to T cells in the sample.

The cell-bound Detection Molecules are separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules (7) by first a few rounds of washing the PBMC's through centrifugation sedimentation of cells and resuspension in wash buffer followed by Fluorescence Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) of fluorochrome labeled cells. T cells that can efficiently bind Detection Molecules will fluoresce because of the fluorochrome comprised within the detection molecules; T cells that cannot bind detection molecules will not fluoresce. FACS-sorting leads to enrichment of fluorescent cells, and hence, enrichment of the detection molecules along with the associated labels that bind T cells of the PBMC sample.

FACS isolated cells are subjected to PCR for specific amplification of the DNA-barcode associated with the Detection Molecules bound to the isolated cells. High throughput sequencing of the resultant PCR product will reveal the identity of Detection Molecules that binds to T cells present in the sample.

This example will reveal the presence of T cells in the blood expressing a T cell receptor that binds to pMHC molecules represented within the library of 1025 Detection Molecules. The number of sequencing reads that will map to a given DNA-barcode and its corresponding Binding Molecule will mirror the frequency of the T cells found by conventional MHC multimer stainings using the same Binding Molecules. The increased complexity of the Detection Molecule library, in terms of the number of different Binding Molecules and Labels, will enable detection of T cells of 1025 different T cell receptor specificities in parallel and will reflect positively upon the sensitivity for detecting a given Label, i.e. a Detection Molecule, associated with low frequencies of T cells binding such Detection Molecules.

Example 9 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this example are         obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from 10 different         donors with a number of different peptide-antigen responsive T         cells, as determined by conventional pMHC-multimer.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Blood is obtained from the Danish Blood             Bank.         -   b. Modifying sample: PBMCs are isolated from whole blood as             described in example 1-2, 5-6.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         prepared as in example 1-7 and example 8.     -   3. Binding Molecules preparation: The Binding Molecules used in         this example are class I MHC-peptide complexes. The individual         specificities (allele and peptide combination) are generated as         described in example 1-7 and example 8. A library of 1025         different pMHCs are generated including 10 different HLA-types.         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1-7 and example 8.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7 and example 8.     -   4. Label preparation: In this example Labels are synthetic         oligonucleotides modified with biotin for coupling to the         Linker. 1025 different Labels from the 2OS system were applied         (table 2).         -   a. Synthesis: As described in example 1.             -   i. The Label system used in this example is named 2OS                 and was developed to increase the complexity of a                 limited number of oligonucleotide sequences. This is                 enabled by applying a combinatorial strategy where two                 partially complementary oligonucleotides (an A                 oligonucleotide with a 5′ biotin tag and a B                 oligonucleotide) are annealed and then elongated to                 produce new unique oligonucleotide-sequences (AxBy)                 which are applied as a DNA-barcodes (Labels) (FIG. 9).                 By combining 22 unique oligonucleotide-sequences (A                 label precursor) that are all partly complementary to 55                 other unique oligonucleotide sequences (B label                 precursor) a combinatorial library of 1210 different                 (AxBy) Labels are produced. Only 1025 of these Labels                 are used in this example.         -   b. Modification: As described in example 1-7 and example 8.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7 and example 8.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: 1025 different Detection         Molecules are generated, each with a different Binding Molecule         encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules (pMHCs) and         Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) are attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC is always attached to         a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules are essentially generated in the same             way as described in example 1-7 and example 8. The given             combination of Label (2OS DNA-barcode) and Binding Molecule             (pMHC) of each Detection Molecule are registered.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of 1025 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeds 100 μl this volume is reduced to             reach a desired concentration of specific Binding Molecules.             This is done as described in example 2-7 and example 8.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-7 and example 8.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules are incubated in the same way as         described in example 1-2, 5-7. The cell sample and the Detection         Molecules are mixed in one container to allow Detection         Molecules to bind to T cells.     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules are enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-7 and example 8.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: Because the         Detection Molecules are enriched based on specific interaction         of the Binding Molecule (the pMHC) with cells, the         identification of the associated Labels (DNA-barcodes) amongst         the sorted cells will also reveal the pMHCs that bind to cells         in the PBMC sample. In this example the DNA-barcodes associated         with the enriched Detection Molecules, are amplified by PCR and         identified by high-throughput sequencing. The enriched Labels,         of the 2OS DNA-barcode system, are identified as in example 8.

Example 9—Results and Conclusions

The expected outcome of this example is knowledge of the potential complexity for detecting multiple antigen-specific T cell responses in parallel in a single sample. Since the sensitivity is expected to increase with increasing numbers of Detection molecules incubated with a given sample (as described in example 8) it is expected that multiple more T cell responses will also be detected in parallel when using a Detection molecule library of the said complexity. The example will thus prove that it is possible to detect multiple antigen-specific T cell responses in parallel when applying a Detection molecule library comprised of 1025 different 2OS Labels encoding 1025 different Binding molecules distributed on 11 HLA-types.

Example 10

In this example it is shown how multiple, single-cell analyses can be rapidly performed using the present invention. The isolating and/or detecting is done by FACS, leading to the identification of a T cell and its TCR, as well as the pMHC complex that recognizes the T cell by binding to the TCR.

Example 10 Explained

This example will describe how the detection of Binding Molecules can be linked to the T cell receptor (TCR) sequence following single cell sorting of T-cells associated with Detection Molecules.

This is an example where the Sample (1) will be a mixture of T cells comprising TCRs of interest. This could e.g. be tumor infiltrating lymphocytes from a cancer patient. The Linker (2) is a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) is peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying a of library peptides that are potentially recognized by the T cells in the Sample. This could be a library of melanoma-associated peptides, as used in example 7, or it could be a library of personally-defined potential epitope sequences based on the characteristics of the given patient's tumor. This could e.g. be mutation-derived T cell epitopes and/or epitopes selected based on the expression pattern in the individual tumor. The Binding Molecules will be modified (3b) by biotinylation and quality controlled as described in example 1-6.

The Labels (4) are oligonucleotides as in example 7-9.

The detection molecule (5) will be synthetized (5a) and modified (5b) as in example 7-9.

An amount of Sample, Tumor infiltrating lymphocytes (1b) will be mixed with detection molecules (5) under conditions (6c) that allow binding of detection molecules to T cells in the sample.

Cells will be FACS sorted based on the attachment of Detection Molecules, transferred to a FLUIDIGM Cl unit (or similar devicde) for single-cell amplification of nucleotide labels and T cell receptor genes.

This example thus reveals the possibility to identify, on a single-cell level, both the antigen-specificity and the T cell receptor sequence. This being done in a mixture of multiple different Binding Molecules (potentially, but not exclusively, >1000). This technology provides a mean for high-throughput identification of TCRs combined with a description of the antigen specificity of the TCR.

Example 10 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell sample to be used in this         example is a collection of T cells with a recognition profile of         interest for determining the sequences of the TCRs associated         with this recognition. The sample could e.g. be tumor         infiltration lymphocytes from a cancer patient. As described in         example 7.         -   c. Acquiring sample: As in example 7.         -   d. Modifying sample: As in example 7.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         prepared as in example 1-10. The fluorochrome co-attachment is         important for the selection process in the example.     -   3. Binding molecule preparation: The binding molecules used in         this example will be a collection of peptide-MHC molecules,         designed to match the T cell reactivity in the sample. This         could be a library of melanoma-associated peptides, as used in         example 7, or it could be a library of personally-defined         potential epitope sequences based on the characteristics of the         given patient's tumor. This could e.g. be mutation-derived T         cell epitopes and/or epitopes selected based on the expression         pattern if the individual tumor.         -   a. Synthesis: as in example 7-9.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: as in example 7-9.     -   4. Label preparation: as in example 7-9.     -   5. Detection Molecules preparation: multiple (<1000) different         Detection Molecules are generated, each with a different Binding         Molecule encoded by a unique Label. The Binding Molecules         (pMHCs) and Labels (2OS DNA-barcodes) are attached to the Linker         (dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate), to form Detection         Molecules, in such a way that a given pMHC is always attached to         a given DNA-barcode.         -   a. Detection Molecules are essentially generated in the same             way as described in example 1-8.         -   b. Modification: Since the total volume of >1000 pooled             Detection Molecules exceeds 100 μl this volume is reduced to             reach a desired concentration of specific Binding Molecules.             This is done as described in example 2-8.         -   c. Purification: As described in example 1-8.     -   6. Incubation of sample and Detection Molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules are incubated in the same way as         described in example 1-2, 5-7. The cell sample and the Detection         Molecules are mixed in one container to allow Detection         Molecules to bind to T cells     -   7. Enrichment of MHC molecules with desired characteristics: The         Detection Molecules are enriched for in the same way as         described in example 1-7. Cells associated with Detection         Molecules are sorted by FACS, through means of the         PE-fluorescence signal. The population of cells holding         Detection Molecules are following injected to the FLUIDIGM Cl         unit allowing for single cell distribution in a micro-well         system. Other similar devices or platforms for single cell         amplification can also be used.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: For each cell         in the FLUIDIGM C1 unit we will amplify a) the label (=DNA         oiligonucleotide barcode) and b) the TCR V-alpha and -beta         chains. In each well specific primers holding cell         identification keys, will be used to amplify DNA oligonucleotide         Label. Likewise specific primers holding cell identification         keys will be used to amplify the TCR-associate genes, the TCR         V-alpha and Beta chains. The complete sequence of the TCR chains         will allow the assembly of a fully functional TCR sequence. In         parallel knowledge about the Binding Molecules associated with         the given T cell, will provide insight o the antigen recognition         of the given TCR. Thus we can obtain paired samples of TCR         sequences and antigen specificities, using the strategy         explained in this example.

Example 10—Results and Conclusions

The expected outcome of this example is knowledge of the TCR receptor coupled to the knowledge of the recognition of Binding Molecules of this given TCR. Single-cell sorting will enable the generation of a correctly paired and fully functional TCR. The association of the labels will explain the recognition motif of this T cell receptor and provide valuable information in this regard. The technique described here will allow the parallel assessment of multiple different T cells while enabling the capture of specific T cells receptor sequences and have paired knowledge about the Binding molecules associated to this. The overall principle of example 10 is schematized in FIG. 6C.

Example 11

In this example all cells carry the same TCR (T cell receptor). A large number of different pMHC complexes (binding molecules) are employed, in order to examine the recognition breadth and affinity of a given T cell receptor (TCR).

Example 11 Explained

This example describes how the detection of Binding Molecules can be used to determine the recognition breadth and affinity of a given T cell receptor (TCR). This is an example where the Sample (1) is a T cell clone or a culture of T cell receptor transduced T cells. Importantly for this example all cells will hold the same T cell receptor.

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) will be peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying a library of peptides that are potentially recognized by the T cell receptor in question. This could ideally be a set of alanine-scanning substituted peptides modified based on the known recognition sequence of the T cell receptor in question. The Binding Molecules will be modified (3b) by biotinylation and quality controlled as described in example 1-6. The Labels (4) are oligonucleotides as in example 7-9.

The detection molecule (5) will be synthetized (5a) and modified (5b) as in example 7-9. Multiple different detection molecules will be generated wherein the individual detection molecules containing different pMHC were encoded by corresponding individual oligonucleotide labels, as in example 7-9.

An amount of Sample, T cell clone (1b) will be mixed with detection molecules (5) under conditions (6c) that allow binding of detection molecules to the T cells in the sample.

Cells will be washed to remove excess Detection Molecules, and following the identity of the Binding Molecules will be revealed through sequencing of the Label. This example thus reveals the possibility to identify the specificity and breadth of specificity of a given T cell receptor. This knowledge is essential for the development of T cell receptor gene therapy strategies, and adoptive transfer of T cell population carrying specific T cell receptors.

Example 11 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell sample to be used in this         example is a T cell clone (carrying a single, defined T cell         receptor) or a culture of T cells transduced with a given T cell         receptor.         -   e. Acquiring sample: Any PBMC sample can be used as a source             to transduce the T cells with a characterized T cell             receptor (TCR), expressed in a retroviral vector.         -   f. Modifying sample: PBMCs modified to express a given TCR             following retroviral transduction using a vector expressing             the selected TCR.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         prepared as in example 1-10. The fluorochrome has no particular         use in this example. Consequently, the fluorochrome attachment         is not needed.     -   3. Binding molecule preparation: The binding molecules used in         this example will be a collection of peptide-MHC molecules,         designed to assess the breadth to recognition of the given TCR.         The peptide library could be alanine substitution libraries of         the known peptide-epitope recognized by the given TCR. Alanine         substitution is used to assess the essential amino acids in         given positions important for TCR recognition.         -   a. Synthesis: as in example 7-9.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: as in example 7-9.     -   4. Label preparation: as in example 7-9.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: as in example 7-9.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container, to         allow the Detection Molecules to bind the T cells that they         recognize.         -   a. Amount of sample: 100.000 cells expressing a given TCR         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: as in example 7-9.         -   c. Conditions: The 100.000 cells will be mixed with             different quantities of Detection Molecules. This being the             standard amount of detection molecules as given in example             7-9, but with parallel detection analysis using e.g. 5x             excess for Detection molecules, as well as 5x, 25x, 125x             fold less Detection Molecules. Such titration is done to             assess the avidity of the selected TCR towards the Binding             Molecule library used.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: In this example, excess Detection molecules are         separated from Sample through centrifugation. All cells are         expected to bind Detection molecules to some extent, and         consequently all cells are used for characterization of Binding         Molecules.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: The         identification of Detection Molecules and analyses of sequencing         results is conducted as described in example 7.

Example 11—Results and Conclusions

The expected outcome of this example is knowledge related to the Detection molecules associated with a given T cell receptor. Through this technology we can gain knowledge on the breadth and the avidity of a given TCR towards a large library of similar, overlapping and/or alanine substituted peptide-epitope sequences. The technique can be used to understand both avidity and ‘fine-specificity’ of a given TCR. This will be of crucial importance for development of TCR receptor-associated therapies, such as TCR gene therapy in cancer treatment. The overall principle of example 11 is schematized in FIG. 6D.

Example 12

In this example it is described how the present invention can be used to identify the specificity of the stimuli that lead to a functional response of certain cells. In the example, the external stimulus is the addition of tumor cells, and the functional response measured is the release of INF-y.

Example 12 Explained

This example will describe how the detection of Binding Molecules can be associated to a functional response to a given stimuli provided to the Sample in vitro. This is an example where the Sample (1) will be tumor infiltrating lymphocytes (TIL) from cancer patients which are modified to determine the reactivity toward tumor cells (1b). The Sample is mixed with tumor cells to allow cytokine release from responding T cells in the Sample. The cytokines are trapped intracellular following Golgi-transport blockade and cellular fixation.

The Linker (2) was a dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorochrome (Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules (3) will be peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes displaying a library of melanoma-associated peptides (as described in Andersen et al. Dissection of T cell antigen specificity in human melanoma. Cancer Research 2012 Apr 1; 72(7):1642-50), and used in example 7. The Binding Molecules will be modified (3b) by biotinylation and quality controlled as described in example 1-6.

The Labels (4) were oligonucleotides as in example 7-9.

The detection molecule (5) will be synthetized (5a) and modified (5b) as in example 7-9. 175 different detection molecules were generated wherein the individual detection molecules containing different pMHC were encoded by corresponding individual oligonucleotide labels, as in example 7.

An amount of Sample, TILs (1b) will mixed with detection molecules (5) under conditions (6c) that allow binding of detection molecules to T cells in the sample. Cells will be selected by FACS based on their cytokine release upon stimulation with the tumor cells. After cellular selection, cells encompassing different cytokine profiles will be analyzed for their binding to the Detection Molecules, consequently describing the T cell receptor specificity of the responding T cells, i.e. T cells recognizing tumor cells.

This example thus reveal the possibility to identify potential differences in T cell specificity among cells responding differently to a given stimuli, here provided be the mixture of T-cells with tumor cells.

Example 12 in Detail

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell sample to be used in this         example is tumor infiltrating lymphocytes (TILs) obtained from         melanoma patients (as example 7).         -   a. Acquiring sample: as in example 7.         -   b. Modifying sample: TILs will be purified and expanded as             in example 7. Following, TILs will be mixed with tumor cell             to assess cytokine release upon T-cell mediated tumor cell             recognition, using the following protocol for intracellular             cytokine staining: Tumor cells will be thawed, washed twice             in culture media (RPMI), and cultured in RPMI+10% FCS (R10)             until they had expanded to a sufficient amount of cells.             TILs will be thawed in 10 ml RPMI+2.5 ul DNase and 50 ul             MgCl2, washed twice in RPMI and rested overnight or at least             4 hr in X-vivo+5% HS+100U/ml IL-2. Following rest, the cells             will be washed, counted and resuspended in X-vivo+5% HS             obtaining a concentration of 3*10⁶ cells/ml. 100 ul of the             cell suspension will then be added to at least two wells in             a 96 well plate—more replicates will be made if enough cells             are available. Thus 3*10⁵ cells will added to each well.             Tumor cells will be trypsinated, washed in R10, counted and             resuspended in RPMI+10% HS to a concentration of 2*10⁶             cells/ml. 50 ul of cell suspension containing 1*10⁵ cells             will be added to the TILs. To every well, 50 ul of Golgi             medium, containing 45 ul RPMI+10% HS, 5 ul BV421 conjugated             CD107a antibody (BD pharmingen) and 0.2 ul Golgi Plug (BD             Bioscience 555029) was added. The cells were then incubated             4-5 hours in 37° C. All samples were cultured in a ratio of             3:1 TIL:tumor cells, with a total of 4*10⁵ cells per well.             After end incubation, the cells were spun and all replicates             were collected into one well. Cell will be washed in PBS+2%             FCS (FACS buffer) and resuspended in 50 uL barcode-buffer             (PBS/0.5% BSA/2 mM EDTA/100 pg/ml herring DNA).     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         prepared as in example 1-8. The fluorochrome has no particular         use in this example. Consequently, the fluorochrome attachment         is not needed.     -   3. Binding molecule preparation: The binding molecules used in         this example will be 175 different class I MHC-peptide         complexes, as in example 7.         -   a. Synthesis: as in example 7.         -   b. Modification: No further modifications         -   c. Purification: as in example 7.     -   4. Label preparation: as in example 7.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: as in example 7.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: The cell sample         and the Detection Molecules were mixed in one container, to         allow the Detection Molecules to bind the T cells that they         recognize.         -   a. Amount of sample: 50 uL cell suspension as described in 1             b.         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: as in example 7.         -   c. Conditions: The Detection molecules were added in the             required amount. If necessary barcode-buffer was added to             reach a total volume of 100 ul and cells were incubated 15             min, 37° C. Following incubation, cells were and stained             with the following surface antibodies: anti-CD3 antibody,             anti-CD8 antibody, anti-CD4 antibody and near-IR-viability             dye (Invitrogen L10119). The cells were then incubated for             30 min at 4° C., after which they were washed twice in             barcode-buffer and incubated in 200 ul fixation buffer (1:4             concentrate, eBioscience 00-5123-43, to diluent eBioscience             00-5223-56) overnight at 4° C. The following day, cells were             washed twice in permeabilization buffer (1:10 buffer to             water, eBioscience 00-8333-56), resuspended in 50 ul             permeabilization buffer and stained with intracellular             antibodies: FITC-conjugated anti-TNF antibody (BD pharmingen             562082), APC-conjugated anti-IFN antibody (BD 341117). After             incubating for 30 min at 4° C. with the antibodies, the             cells were washed twice in permeabilization buffer,             resuspended in 50u1 barcode-buffer.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: In this Example, the Sample is selected based         on the cytokine secretion mediated following incubation with         tumor cells. Cytokines are visualized through intracellular         cytokine staining (ICS). The Sample is following stained with         the Detection Molecules. Cytokine producing cells will be         selected by Fluorescence-Activated-Cell-Sorting (FACS), and the         Detection Molecules carried along with a given cytokine profile         of a given cell population will be assessed through sequencing         of the co-attached oligonucleotide barcodes         -   a. Apply: Cells were sorted on a BD FACSAria, equipped with             three lasers (488 nm blue, 633 nm red and 405 violet). The             flow cytometry data analyses will be performed using the BD             FACSDiva software version 6.1.2. The following gating             strategy will be applied. Lymphocytes were identified in a             FSC/SSC plot. Additional gating on single cells             (FSC-A/FSC-H), live cells (near-IR-viability dye negative),             and CD8, CD3 positive cells, and CD4 negative.         -   From this defined cell population two separate subsets will             be sorted based ion the cytokine secretion in relation to             tumor-cell stimulation. T cells positive for any of the             detected cytokines ‘ICS positive’ is sorted in one tube, and             T cells negative for any of the detected cytokines ‘ICS             negative’ is sorted in another tube.         -   b. Wash: not applicable.         -   c. Separate: Optionally cells were acquired up to one week             after fixation in 1% paraformaldehyde. The ‘ICS positive’             and ‘ICS negative’ cells were sorted by FACS, as described             in 7a, into tubes that had been pre-saturated for 2h-O.N. in             2% BSA and contained 200 μl barcode-buffer to increase the             stability of the oligonucleotides that followed with the             sorted cells. The sorted cells were centrifuged 5 min, 5000             g, to allow removal of all excess buffer. Cells were stored             at −80° C.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecules: The         identification of Detection Molecules and analyses of sequencing         results is conducted as described in example 7. The ‘ICS         positive’ and ‘ICS negative’ cells are treated as two         independents samples. Following these two samples are compared         for the association with Binding Molecules.

Example 12—Results and Conclusions

The expected outcome of this examples is knowledge related to the Detection molecules associated with tumor cell recognition (=‘ICS positive’) as oppose to no recognition (=‘ICS negative’). In other terms, we will gain knowledge on the T cell recognition elements associated with tumor cell recognition, among a large pool of different Detection Molecules, here peptide-MHC molecules. Knowledge of T cell mediated recognition of tumor cells has major impact on the design and development of immunotherapeutic strategies for cancer. The overall principle of example 12 is schematized in FIG. 6A.

Cell could likewise be selected based on e.g. phenotypic characteristics, to assess what T specificities are associated with selected phenotypic characteristics as schematized in FIG. 6B.

Tables for Examples 1-12:

TABLE 1 BCs used in Examples 1-7 with indicated frequencies of peptide-antigen specific T cells as identified by conventional MHC multimer staining: Epitope Freq. (%) BC171 A11 EBV-EBNA4 0.32 A3 CMV pp150 TVY 0.015 BC254 A2 FLU MP 58-66 GIL 0.0522 A2 EBV LMP2 FLY 0.014 A2 CMV pp65 NLV 1.128 BC261 A2 FLU MP 58-66 GIL 0.125 A3 EBV EBNA 3a RLR 0.0258 A2 EBV LMP2 FLY 0.0075 BC266 A1 CMV pp65 YSE 0.0859 A1 FLU BP-VSD 0.0628 BC268 A2 FLU MP 58-66 GIL 0.2523 A2 CMV pp65 NLV 0.5445 BC260 A2 FLU MP 58-66 GIL 0.0456 A2 CMV pp65 NLV 0.134 B7 CMV pp65 TPR 4.5395 BC262 A11 EBV-EBNA4 0.0872

TABLE 2 Structure and sequences of 2OS A oligonucleotides and 2OS B oligonucleotides, used to produce 2OS DNA-barcodes: Oligo name 5′modification Forward primer region 6xN region 2OS-1-Oligo-A1 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A2 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A3 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A4 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A5 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A6 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A7 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A8 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A9 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A10 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A11 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A12 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A13 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A14 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A15 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A16 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A17 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A18 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A19 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A20 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A21 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-A22 Biotin-C6- GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTCACAGTTT NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B1 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B2 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B3 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B4 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B5 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B6 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B7 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B8 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B9 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B10 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B11 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B12 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B13 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B14 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B15 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B16 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B17 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B18 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B19 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B20 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B21 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B22 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B23 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B24 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B25 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B26 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B27 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B28 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B29 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B30 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B31 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B32 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B33 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B34 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B35 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B36 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B37 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B38 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B39 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B40 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B41 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B42 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B43 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B44 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B45 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B46 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B47 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B48 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B49 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B50 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B51 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B52 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B53 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B54 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN 2OS-1-Oligo-B55 CTGTGACTATGTGAGGCTTTCTCGA NNNNNN Oligo name Coding region Annealing region 2OS-1-Oligo-A1 CGAGGGCAATGGTTAACTGACACGT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A2 CAGAAAGCAGTCTCGTCGGTTCGAA GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A3 TAAGTAGCGGGCATAATGTACGCTC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A4 GGATCCAGTAAGCTACTGCGTTTAT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A5 GGGCTGCGGAGCGTTTACTCTGTAT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A6 AAACGTATGTGCTTTGTCGGATGCC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A7 ATATCATCATAGGCTTAGCGACGTA GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A8 AGGAAAATCTGCTACCGCCAATGAT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A9 CTGATTGACTGCATGGAGGCTATAC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A10 GTGGCGACTTCACGATTATCTGAAC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A11 CCTGTATTGAAGGTTCAGTCCTGTT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A12 GGCTCTATAAGGTTTCCTCAAAGGT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A13 TTGGGAGCTTTCCTATGTACAGTCC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A14 AGAGAATATGTCGCTCCCGTTATGT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A15 GCAGTTAGATATGCAGTTACCTGAC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A16 CTTCACCCGAACATGCAGTGTTATT GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A17 AAAGCCGTTGCAGTATCGTCTGAGC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A18 GCTGGATGTTAATAACTGCGGTCCG GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A19 ACGAGTTGACATGGACGGATCCCTC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A20 TTCATCACTCATTGTTCTGAGTAGG GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A21 ATGTTTAATCTAACTTGATGCCTCC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-A22 TAATACGCCTGAGGTGTTGGGTTGC GGTCAGCATCATTTCC 2OS-1-Oligo-B1 GCCTGTAGTCCCACGCGATCTAACA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B2 CAACCATTGATTGGGGACAACTGGG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B3 ACGTTTAAGCATCTGTACTCCAGAT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B4 GAATTGAAGCCATCGTTTCGCGCAA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B5 CGTAGCTTTTGTAGCGTCTGAGGGC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B6 AATCGTCAGTCCCTGTTTCGACATC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B7 CGGTGGTAGGTGATACTTCTGTACC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B8 TGACTATCGGGGCGTGACATGAGCT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B9 GTTGGTGAAACTACCGACGCTTTAC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B10 AATGGAGGTGCAGGAATACTCTCGT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B11 AAAACGCACCACAACTCGGACGTGA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B12 GCCATATAGCACAGCACGCAATCC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B13 CCTATGCGAACTTGGTTTATCCTGC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B14 AAGCTGCGTATCCTCGAACTAGCAG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B15 ATGGCGCAGACATTCTGTAGTCGCA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B16 CTTATGGACTGGTTGGGGACAATCC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B17 GTCCTTCCTTACGAAATATTGGTC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B18 TGATGAACCAATCCTCCGATTTCTT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B19 ACCGAATGTGGGCCACGAGTCATTC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B20 CGGGTGAGCATATAACTTGCAATTC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B21 AGAATTGTGCTTGGGGCGATTCATA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B22 AATTGGTGACATGCTTAACTACCGT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B23 GAGACGCCTAGAAAGTGATTAACTC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B24 ATTACAGTTACAGTGCTGGTCGCAG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B25 CGTTACGTTGGTGGGCTCTTGGTAC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B26 GTTATTATCGGTGTCCCGACTAGTT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B27 AGAAATGATTCCCGAGTCGCCTTTT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B28 TGCTCTCGGATGTGGTTCTATGGAT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B29 GAGTTAAAACCGTCGCCGTAGCACT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B30 TGTACGCGATAGTACTCGGGTCCTG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B31 AACTTACGCCCAGCAAGGCATTCAT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B32 AGCATGGCACAAGAGGAGCACTTCA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B33 CGATCGTGAGTTTGCAGCGTGACGA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B34 ACAGCTCCAGCCTCCCTTTGTTTGT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B35 AAACCTTTGTTCGGGCGTCTACCAT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B36 TCTTTCAAAACAGCGGGAGTCATCG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B37 GCGGTTTATCCGAATCTCACGCTAA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B38 GCATATGCTACAGGCTGGGGTGAAC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B39 GGAGGTCTAAACGTCCGGAGCTATT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B40 AAGAATAAGATTGCGTGCGCCTTAA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B41 CATCATCGTCGTCCAAATATGTGAT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B42 CACGTGTAGCTGTGGGCCAAGTCTA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B43 CAGTTGTCAAATCTCCGCATTGGTA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B44 ACTGGTAATGCCATTGGTCTAAATG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B45 GTCTTTGGTCGTAACGAATCTCCGT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B46 CTTAGGCATGACGGGGTTGTCCATG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B47 CCGGTGAATTTTGGGTGTCCATGTA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B48 CCTTTATCTCCTCCACCTATAAGGT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B49 GATACTATATGACGGCCTGTAATCG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B50 ATTGGTTGGCCGAAAGACTACATCT GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B51 CGTAGTTATGGGGTGGGTCACCTGC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B52 AAGTTTCCAGGCACTGATTCGTTCC GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B53 TTCCTTATTTCCCGGTTGAGATACA GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B54 AGGTATCATGCGGGCCGAATCTTGG GGAAATGATGCTGACC 2OS-1-Oligo-B55 ATACCCGTAGGCCAGTACCCTCTCC GGAAATGATGCTGACC

TABLE 3 The reagents used for annealing (left) and elongation (right) of partly complementary oligonucleotides. Reagents marked in italic are from the Sequenase Version 2.0 DNA Annealing reaction (μl) Elongation reaction (μl) Oligo A (100 μM) 2.6 Annealing reaction 10 μl Oligo B (100 μM) 5.4 0.1M DTT 1 μl Sequenase reaction 2 H₂O 0.5 μl buffer Total 10 8x diluted 2 μl Sequenase polymerase 5x diluted Sequence 2 μl extension mixture Total 15.5

TABLE 4 Overview of reagents required for production of Binding Molecules produced from 100 μg/ml pMHC exchange reaction. The amounts of Detection Molecule used for staining 1 × 106-2 × 106 cells in 100 μl are also specified. Amount Exchanged pMHC/ul per SA conjugate D-biotin End: pMHC staining PE dex 1.32 μl 12.6 μM 44 ug/ml 3 ul

TABLE 5 The components of the antibody mixture added while Detection Molecules are incubated with sample. The amount listed is for incubation of 1 × 10⁶-2 × 10⁶ cells in 100 ul. Target Conjugate Amount (μl) Source CD8 PerCP 2 Invitrogen MHCD0831 CD4 FITC 1.25 BD bioscience 345768 CD14 FITC 3.13 BD bioscience 345784 CD16 FITC 6.25 BD bioscience 335035 CD19 FITC 2.50 BD bioscience 345776 CD40 FITC 1.56 Serotec MCA1590F

TABLE 6 The Master mix applied for recovery of DNA-barcodes by QPCR. The template was drawn from the residual fluid (5-9.25 ul) containing the sorted cells. Nuclease free H₂O was added to a final volume of 25 ul per PCR Component Volume per sample (μl) Master mix 12.5 Probe/SYBR (10 uM/100x) 0.25 (0.1 uM/1x) Forward primer (5 uM) 1.5 (300 nM) Reverse primer (5 uM) 1.5 (300 nM) Template 5-9.25 Nuclease free H₂O 0-4.25 Total 25

TABLE 7 The thermal profile applied for qPCR amplification of barcodes associated with sorted cells. Temperature (° C.) Time No. of cycles 95 10 min 1 95 30 s 60 60 s 40

TABLE 8 Structure and sequences of 1OS oligonucleotides applied as DNA barcodes (1OS-1-Oligo-1 to 1OS-1-Oligo-110) Oligo name 5 modif Forward primer region 6 × N 1OS-1-Oligo-1 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-2 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-3 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-4 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-5 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-6 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-7 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-8 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-9 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-10 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-11 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-12 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-13 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-14 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-15 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-16 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-17 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-18 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN Coding region Reverse primer region TATGAGGACGAATCTCCCGCTTATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTCTTGACAAACGTGTGCTTGTAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTTTATCGGGCGTGGTGCTCGCATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CCGATGTTGACGGACTAATCCTGAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TAGTAGTTCAGACGCCGTTAAGCGC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CCGTACCTAGATACACTCAATTTGT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGGTTCCGTTTTACATTCCAGGAA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TATCCCGTGAAGCTTGAGTGGAATC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGACGTGTGAGGCGCTAGAGCATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTATGGCACGCCTAATCTGGACAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGATGCATGATCTAGGGCCTCGTCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GAGGTCTTTCATGCGTATAGTCACA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GATTCAATATGTGTCGTCTATCCTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTAACTGCGCATAGTTGGCTCTAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCGTTTAAGGTCACATCGCATGAAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCCCGGGAAGTGTGAGGATATACCC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTCTTAAAACTGGTATCACCTGAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGTGGTTAGTGATTTGCCCGTCAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG 1OS-1-Oligo-19 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-20 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-21 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-22 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-23 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-24 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-25 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-26 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-27 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-28 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-29 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-30 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-31 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-32 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-33 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-34 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-35 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-36 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-37 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-38 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN TAGTTGGTGGGTTTCCCTACCGTGT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTACAGTAAGTGAGAATCCTCTCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTTCTAAGTTTAGCGTAGCCGGTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTTTAGGTGGGTGCGATTGCCAGTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCCACCTTAACACGCGATGATATTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTATTACGAGCGCTTGGATCCCGT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TATGTTGTGCCTTACGCCTCGATTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TTAACCGAACTGACGGCCATCAAGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGTACATGCGCCTTACTCCTTGTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TTCTATTCTAAGCCGGCGGTCATAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTTGATGCTTTACAAGATCGCGTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCCAAGTTAGCTTACTCCATGCCCC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGAACTATTTCCTGGCTGTTACGCG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCGGTTTCAAGGATGATCCGCGCTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGAGACTGCCCGACACATCTTAGTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGTTAATTAGGCTCGGTCGGCCTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGGTAGTCCTATGCGGGCTTTCTCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGCTTGGACTATAGTCATCGCGTTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CACTGTTTAACAAGCCCGTCAGTAG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ACGTCGTATTATACCCGCCATGGAA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG 1OS-1-Oligo-39 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-40 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-41 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-42 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-43 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-44 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-45 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-46 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-47 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-48 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-49 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-50 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-51 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-52 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-53 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-54 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-55 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-56 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-57 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-58 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN TGCTTAATTTACGACCGATGCTGCG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCCATAGATTTCTCCGTGAGTCTTT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTGCCGCAGACATTGCATACGATAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCAGGTCCTAACCCGCAACCATTTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TGCACCGTTCATATGTTATCGGGAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGAGACTTACACCCGTAGACGTCGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ATAAAAGAAACCCTCCGCATTGTGT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTCCCATCCGAGCAGATTTGACTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ATGAGCTGTCTCGAACCGAAGGCAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCGGGCGGTTCAACTTACTGGTAGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGGAAATAACGGATGCGCTCTTGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ACTTCTTCTCGGTCGCATGAGGCTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGATACATATACGCTCGTCGGGACT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CCGGGAAGTGTCATAACTTGAAGCG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTCAGCCTGCCTCGCTTCTGATATT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGGGCCAAGTCGACCTAGATGGCTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTAGGGCTACTGTTATCCTCCGTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CGTACGGCTGGAGAGCTGTATGTGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ACAGGTTGTATTACTTCGCGCCTTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGGGCTCATTACAAGTGTTGCATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG 1OS-1-Oligo-59 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-60 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-61 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-62 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-63 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-64 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-65 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-66 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-67 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-68 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-69 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-70 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-71 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-72 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-73 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-74 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-75 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-76 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-77 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-78 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN CTAAGTGGCGCCGATTGTTTGTCCA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTATATTTTGCTCCCGGCGACGAGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCAATTTGCGCTTGTTCGGCATAGC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GAGTCGAATATCCACCACCGTATGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TTGTGGTTTGGGTCCTCAGAGGAGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGTACCTAGTCTCGTAATCATAGGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCGGCATGATCTACCTTAAAGCTTG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CCGGCGCAGAAGTTTGAACGAAAAG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ATGCACTATTTTACGTATCCCGTGC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GATAGGGTGACTGCTTTCGCGTACA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TATCTGGTAGACATCTCGGCACAGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCGGGGTGCAATAATCACTAGTGCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TAGTTCTGGCTATACACACTTCGGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCATAGAGTTACCCGATGGATTCGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTTCATGGTACAGGCTTCTTTACGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CGATCTCGGGCCTGGGTTTTGAGTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ATTATTCGTGACCCAACTCATCAGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGAATGGTGAATAATGCGTTCGCC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTATTAGTTGCTACCCCAAGAATC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGAAAGTCTTGGATACACGGCCGGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG 1OS-1-Oligo-79 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-80 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-81 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-82 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-83 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-84 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-85 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-86 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-87 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-88 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-89 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-90 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-91 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-92 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-93 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-94 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-95 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-96 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-97 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-98 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN GTGTGTTCCTATGCACAATTTCATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TACATGGTAGGGGTCTCCGAACCGT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TAGGGATAACTTTCCTCCCACTTGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TCTGGTGTCTCACCCATGGGATGTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TAACGATTTTCTCGCGGGAGTTTCG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CGAGCCTGGTTAGCGCCTACAAGAG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CGTAGTAAGATATGTAGTCCACGTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TGTTAGTTGCCCCATATCTTTACGC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTGGATTGTGATTGTCCGGATCCG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGAGGACTGCGGTTCAGCTTACAA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCGTAGGTCTAGTTCAGATTCTATA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTCTACGTGGTTCTATACCATTCGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGGCTTTACTACAATGCGTGGGCTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGCTTGCTGTATGGGTCATGTTCCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TGCTCTAAAGACGCGAGGACTACCT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TGTACATGTCATACTCAAGGCTTTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TTGACATGTACGCCATTTGGGTCGC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCAATTCAGTACGATCGTGTAGCGG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CGCTGTCCAAAGGTTCTTCGTAACG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG TTAGACGAGCAGGTTTCTTGCCTAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG 1OS-1-Oligo-99 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-100 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-101 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-102 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-103 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-104 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-105 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-106 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-107 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-108 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-109 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN 1OS-1-Oligo-110 Biotin-C6- AGATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCCTT NNNNNN TCGTTTGGAGCCGTTCACACATGAA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGATCAACTTGCGCCCAGCGTTAT GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GACGATGTTGCCTGTTTTGATACGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GGGTAGTCGTGAGGTGAACTCTTCC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG AGCCATTTTACGATTCTATTCGATG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GTGGTTTATATAATCCCACCTCCTA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCGAAGAACATCCCGGCATTTCATG GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTGGGACAATGCCGAAAACTCTTC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG ATTCCGTACCAACCCGCGTCTTAGA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG CTGCAGGAGGCTCTAATGCACTCAA GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCGTTCAGCATTCATTACGTCTCAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG GCTGAGGAAGCCCAATGTTCAGTAC GGTACGGCGCTATCATGTACTCATG

TABLE 9 Listing of the 110 combinations of peptide-HLA Binding Molecules and the respective Labels, 1OS and 2OS DNA-barcodes, that were used to encode the given specificity of all Detection Molecules applied in experiments 3-6. 1OS Barcode 2OS Barcode HLA code Peptide Sequence 1 A1B1 A1 CMV pp65 YSE YSEHPTFTSQY 2 A1B2 A1 CMV pp50 VTE VTEHDTLLY 3 A1B3 A1 FLU BP-VSD VSDGGPNLY 4 A1B4 A11 EBV-EBNA4 AVFDRKSDAK 5 A1B5 A11 HCMV pp65 GPISGHVLK 6 A1B6 A11 VP1 DLQGLVLDY 7 A1B7 A11 VP1 VLGRKMTPK 8 A1B8 A11 VP1 VTLRKRVVVK 9 A1B9 A11 VP1 LVLDYQTEY 10 A1B10 A11 VP1 GQEKTVYPK 11 A2B1 A11 VP1 VTFQSNQQDK 12 A2B2 A11 VP1 LKGPQKASQK 13 A2B3 A11 VP1 NVASVPKLLVK 14 A2B4 A11 VP1 TSNWYTYTY 15 A2B5 A11 VP1 LVLDYQTEYPK 16 A2B6 A11 VP1 TLRKRVVVKNPY 17 A2B7 A11 VP1 AVTFQSNQQDK 18 A2B8 A11 VP1 PLKGPQKASQK 19 A2B9 A2 VP1 RIYEGSEQL 20 A2B10 A11 VP1 SLFSNLMPK 21 A3B1 A2 VP1 KLLVKGGVEV 22 A3B2 A11 VP1 SLINVHYWDMK 23 A3B3 A2 HPV E6 29-38 TIHDIILECV 24 A3B4 A2 FLU MP 58-66 GIL GILGFVFTL 25 A3B5 A2 EBV LMP2 CLG CLGGLLTMV 26 A3B6 A2 EBV BMF1 GLC GLCTLVAML 27 A3B7 A2 EBV LMP2 FLY FLYALALLL 28 A3B8 A2 CMV pp65 NLV NLVPMVATV 29 A3B9 A2 EBV BRLF1 YVL YVLDHLIVV 30 A3B10 A2 HPV E7 11-20 YMLDLQPETT 31 A4B1 A2 CMV IE1 VLE VLEETSVML 32 A4B2 A2 VP1 GCCPNVASV 33 A4B3 A2 VP1 SITQIELYL 34 A4B4 A2 VP1 LQMWEAISV 35 A4B5 A2 VP1 AISVKTEVV 36 A4B6 A2 VP1 KMTPKNQGL 37 A4B7 A2 VP1 TVLQFSNTL 38 A4B8 A2 VP1 GLFISCADI 39 A4B9 A2 VP1 LLVKGGVEVL 40 A4B10 A2 VP1 ELYLNPRMGV 41 A5B1 A2 VP1 NLPAYSVARV 42 A5B2 A2 VP1 TLQMWEAISV 43 A5B3 A2 VP1 QMWEAISVKT 44 A5B4 A2 VP1 VVGISSLINV 45 A5B5 A2 VP1 SLINVHYWDM 46 A5B6 A2 VP1 HMFAIGGEPL 47 A5B7 A2 VP1 FAIGGEPLDL 48 A5B8 A2 VP1 NLINSLFSNL 49 A5B9 A2 VP1 FLFKTSGKMAL 50 A5B10 A2 VP1 ALHGLPRYFNV 51 A6B1 A2 VP1 NLINSLFSNLM 52 A6B2 A2 VP1 FLDKFGQEKTV 53 A6B3 A2 VP1 VKGGVEVLSV 54 A6B4 A24 HCMV 248-256 AYAQKIFKIL 55 A6B5 A24 EBV LM P2 IYVLVMLVL 56 A6B6 A24 EBV BRLF1 TYPVLEEMF 57 A6B7 A24 EBV BMLF1 DYNFVKQLF 58 A6B8 A3 CMV pp150 TTV TTVYPPSSTAK 59 A6B9 A3 FLU NP 265-273 ILR ILRGSVAHK 60 A6B10 A3 EBV EBNA 3a RLR RLRAEAQVK 61 A1B11 A3 CMV pp150 TVY TVYPPSSTAK 62 A1B12 A3 EBV BRLF1 148-56 RVRRVRAYTYSK 63 A1B13 A3 VP1 ASVPKLLVK 64 A1B14 A3 VP1 CCPNVASVPK 65 A1B15 A3 VP1 ITIETVLGR 66 A1B16 A3 VP1 NTLTTVLLD 67 A1B17 A3 VP1 ALHGLPRYF 68 A1B18 A3 VP1 VASVPKLLVK 69 A1B19 A3 VP1 VSGQPMEGK 70 A1B20 A3 VP1 KASSTCKTPK 71 A2B11 A3 VP1 KTPKRQCIPK 72 A2B12 A3 VP1 YTYTYDLQPK 73 A2B13 A3 VP1 PITIETVLGR 74 A2B14 B7 VP1 SVARVSLPM 75 A2B15 A3 VP1 NSLFSNLMPK 76 A2B16 A3 VP1 KVSGQPMEGK 77 A2B17 A3 VP1 TVYPKPSVAP 78 A2B18 A3 VP1 SLINVHYWDMK 79 A2B19 A3 VP1 GVEVLSVVT 80 A2B20 A3 VP1 PLDLQGLVL 81 A3B11 A3 VP1 GLDPQAKAK 82 A3B12 A3 VP1 EVWCPDPSK 83 A3B13 A3 VP1 ADIVGFLFK 84 A3B14 A3 VP1 KTSGKMALH 85 A3B15 A3 VP1 KMALHGLPR 86 A3B16 A3 VP1 RYFNVTLRK 87 A3B17 A3 VP1 TLRKRVVVKN 88 A3B18 B7 CMV pp65 TPR TPRVTGGGAM 89 A3B19 B7 CMV pp65 RPH-L RPHERNGFTV 90 A3B20 B7 EBV EBNA RPP RPPIFIRLL 91 A4B11 B7 VP1 KPGCCPNVA 92 A4B12 B7 VP1 QPIKENLPA 93 A4B13 B7 VP1 LPRYFNVTL 94 A4B14 B7 VP1 MPKVSGQPM 95 A4B15 B7 VP1 YPKPSVAPA 96 A4B16 B7 VP1 KPSVAPAAV 97 A4B17 B7 VP1 APLKGPQKA 98 A4B18 B7 VP1 APKRKASSTC 99 A4B19 B7 VP1 SVARVSLPML 100 A4B20 B7 VP1 YPKTTNGGPI 101 A5B11 B7 VP1 YPKPSVAPAA 102 A5B12 B7 VP1 KPGCCPNVASV 103 A5B13 B7 VP1 NPRMGVNSPDL 104 A5B14 B7 VP1 LPAYSVARVSL 105 A5B15 B7 VP1 TPTVLQFSNTL 106 A5B16 B7 VP1 LPRYFNVTLRK 107 A5B17 B7 VP1 YPVVNLINSLF 108 A5B18 B7 VP1 YPKPSVAPAAV 109 A5B19 B7 VP1 KPSVAPAAVTF 110 A5B20 B7 VP1 APKRKASST In the table, HLA code ‘A1’ refers to HLA-A0101. HLA code ‘A2’ refers to HLA-A0201. HLA code ‘A3’ refers to HLA-A0301. HLA code ‘A11’ refers to HLA-A1101. HLA code ‘A24’ refers to HLA-A2402. HLA code ‘67’ refers to HLA-B0702.

TABLE 10 The PCR Master mix applied prior to sequencing of DNA-barcodes associated with sorted cells. The forward and reverse primer included adaptors for the sequencing reaction (A-key and P1-key respectively). Moreover the forward primer carried a sample- identification barcode (table 12 and 13). The template was drawn from the residual fluid (10-19 ul) containing the sorted cells. Nuclease free H2O was added to a final volume of 50 ul per PCR Component Volume per sample (μl) Master mix 25 Forward primer (5 μM)  3 (300 nM) Reverse primer (5 μM)  3 (300 nM) Template 10-19 Nuclease free H₂O  0-9 Total 50

TABLE 11 The thermal profile applied for amplification of DNA-barcodes associated with sorted cells. 36 cycles were applied if >1,000 cells were sorted while 38 cycles were applied if <1,000 cells were sorted. Temperature (° C.) Time No. of cycles −95 10 min 1 −95 30 s 36-38 −60 45 s −72 30 s −72 4 min 1 −4 ∞

TABLE 12 Forward and reverse primers applied for amplification of enriched Detection Molecules prior to sequencing. Primers carry Ion Torrent adaptors, A- key and P1-key. Moreover the forward primer encodes a unique sample-ID barcode (6 × N). Compatible with the 1OS Label system (F1 = forward primer, R1 = reverse primer) Primer name Forward primer region 6 × N Ion Torrent region (A Key) A-Key 1OS- F1-1 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC GAAGAT CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-2 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC TCCTGA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-3 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC TGTGGA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-4 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC CATTTA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-5 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC TTACCC CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-6 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC ATTCTC CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-7 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC AGACCC CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-8 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC CGCATG CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-9 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC TCCTCG CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-10 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC ATTCCT CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-11 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC CGTCGA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-12 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC GCCAAT CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-13 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC ATACGG CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-14 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC GTCAGA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 1OS- F1-15 GATTCTATAAACTGTGCGGTCC CGAGTT CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG Primer name Ion Torrent (P1 Key) Reverse primer region P1-key 1OS- R1 CCTCTCTATGGGCAGTCGGTGAT GAGTACATGATAGCGCCGTAC

TABLE 13 Forward and reverse primers applied for amplification of enriched Detection Molecules prior to sequencing. Primers carry Ion Torrent adaptors, A- key and P1-key. Moreover the forward primer encodes a unique sample-ID barcode. A-key 2OS-F1-1-15 have a 6 × N sample-ID barcode region (applied in experiment 4 and 6) while A-key 2OS-F1-16-40 have a 8 × N sample-ID and a 2 × N spacer (used in all other experiments applying the 2OS system). Compatible with the 2OS Label system (F1 = forward primer, R1 = reverse primer) Primer name Forward primer region 6N region 8N region 2N spacer A-Key 2OS-F1-1 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTGGGG A-Key 2OS-F1-2 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTCCAC A-Key 2OS-F1-3 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTTACC A-Key 2OS-F1-4 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGGCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-5 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGAGTA A-Key 2OS-F1-6 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ATTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-7 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGAGCT A-Key 2OS-F1-8 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GGCGTG A-Key 2OS-F1-9 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC AAATTG A-Key 2OS-F1-10 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCTGAC A-Key 2OS-F1-11 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TTCTTA A-Key 2OS-F1-12 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGGTGG A-Key 2OS-F1-13 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCAGTC A-Key 2OS-F1-14 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TCGTGA A-Key 2OS-F1-15 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TACAGT A-Key 2OS-F1-16 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TTGCGTTA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-17 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGAGCGAG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-18 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGACTCTG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-19 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ATCCGTCC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-20 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TTAAACGA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-21 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TAGCTTTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-22 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CACATGTA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-23 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GATAGCCA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-24 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ACCTGTTA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-25 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGCGAATT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-26 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GTACATTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-27 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTATTGCA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-28 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ACGATACA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-29 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTTAGCGC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-30 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGGAAACC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-31 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GATGTTGG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-32 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ATCGGCGT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-33 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TAGTACGA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-34 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GACGTGAT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-35 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGAGCCAA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-36 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CCTCGCAG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-37 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC AGATCCAG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-38 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TTGGCTGA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-39 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GACCGCTA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-40 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GAGCTTAA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-41 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GGACTGGT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-42 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGGGAGTC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-43 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCGATGGC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-44 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ACTTGGTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-45 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ATACTCAT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-46 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TAGTGTCC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-47 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCATATAA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-48 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GGCGATTG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-49 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GGGCTGTA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-50 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGCTATTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-51 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GTACTGCA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-52 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TGTCTATG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-53 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGAATCAC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-54 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGTCCTAA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-55 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ACAAATGG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-56 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TCTACTTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-57 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC AATTCGAG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-58 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GAACTCGG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-59 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCGGACGC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-60 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CTTGTCCA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-61 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GTCGCGGT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-62 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CAGGTCGT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-63 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TCTCATCC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-64 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCTTCGTG TG A-Key 2OS-F1-65 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGTGATAA TG A-Key 2OS-F1-66 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC TTGCTCAC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-67 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC CGCTCTCC TG A-Key 2OS-F1-68 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC ATTCTACT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-69 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC AAGGCGTT TG A-Key 2OS-F1-70 GAAGTTCCAGCCAGCGTC GCGGGATT TG Primer name Ion Torrent region (A Key) A-Key 2OS-F1-1 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-2 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-3 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-4 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-5 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-6 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-7 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-8 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-9 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-10 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-11 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-12 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-13 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-14 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-15 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-16 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-17 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-18 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-19 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-20 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-21 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-22 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-23 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-24 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-25 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-26 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-27 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-28 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-29 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-30 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-31 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-32 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-33 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-34 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-35 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-36 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-37 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-38 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-39 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-40 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-41 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-42 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-43 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-44 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-45 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-46 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-47 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-48 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-49 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-50 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-51 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-52 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-53 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-54 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-55 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-56 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-57 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-58 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-59 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-60 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-61 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-62 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-63 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-64 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-65 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-66 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-67 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-68 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-69 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG A-Key 2OS-F1-70 CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAG

TABLE 14 Listing of the 175 combinations of peptide-HLA Binding Molecules and the respective 2OS DNA-barcodes that were used to encode the given specificity of all Detection Molecules applied in experiments 7. 168 of the peptide-ligands are associated with melanoma while the remaining 7 are different virus specific peptides. All are HLA-A0201 peptide antigens. Barcode 2OS HLA allele Peptide Sequence A7B1 HLA-A0201 707-AP RVAALARDAP A7B2 HLA-A0201 ATIC (AICRT) RLDFNLIRV A7B3 HLA-A0201 ATIC (AICRT) MVYDLYKTL A7B4 HLA-A0201 BA46 (MFGE8) NLFETPVEA A7B5 HLA-A0201 BA46 (MFGE8) GLQHWVPEL A7B6 HLA-A0201 BcI-2 PLFDFSWLSL A7B7 HLA-A0201 BcI-2 WLSLKTLLSL A7B8 HLA-A0201 BcI-xL YLNDHLEPWI A7B9 HLA-A0201 BING-4 CQWGRLWQL A7B10 HLA-A0201 B-RAF LATEKSRWSG A7B11 HLA-A0201 cyclophilin B (Cyp-B) VLEGMEVV A7B12 HLA-A0201 Cadherin 3/P-cadherin FILPVLGAV A7B13 HLA-A0201 Cadherin 3/P-cadherin FIIENLKAA A7B14 HLA-A0201 CDCA1/NUF2 YMMPVNSEV A7B15 HLA-A0201 CDCA1/NUF2 KLATAQFKI A7B16 HLA-A0201 CDK4 ACDPHSGHFV A7B17 HLA-A0201 CML28 (EXOSC5) ALVDAGVPM A7B18 HLA-A0201 COA-1 (UBXN11) FMTRKLWDL A7B19 HLA-A0201 COA-1 (UBXN11) RLLASLQDL A7B20 HLA-A0201 CPSF KVHPVIWSL A7B21 HLA-A0201 CPSF LMLQNALTTM A7B22 HLA-A0201 Cyclin I LLDRFLATV A7B23 HLA-A0201 cyclin B1 AGYLMELCC A7B24 HLA-A0201 cyclin B1 AKYLMELTM A8B1 HLA-A0201 B-RAF LATEKSRWS A8B2 HLA-A0201 cyclophilin B (Cyp-B) KLKHYGPGVVV A8B3 HLA-A0201 DAM-6, -10 (MAGE-B1, -B2) FLWGPRAYA A8B4 HLA-A0201 EphA2 IMNDMPIYM A8B5 HLA-A0201 EphA2 VLAGVGFFI A8B6 HLA-A0201 EphA2 VLLLVLAGV A8B7 HLA-A0201 EphA2 TLADFDPRV A8B8 HLA-A0201 EZH2 FINDEIFVEL A8B9 HLA-A0201 EZH2 FMVEDETVL A8B10 HLA-A0201 GnTV VLPDVFIRCV A8B11 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 YLEPGPVTA A8B12 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 LLDGTATLRL A8B13 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 ITDQVPFSV A8B14 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 VLYRYGSFSV A8B15 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 RLMKQDFSV A8B16 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 RLPRIFCSC A8B17 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 AMLGTHTMEV A8B18 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 SLADTNSLAV A8B19 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 KTWGQYWQV A8B20 HLA-A0201 HERV-K-MEL MLAVISCAV A8B21 HLA-A0201 hsp70 LLLLDVAPL A8B22 HLA-A0201 IDO1 ALLEIASCL A8B23 HLA-A0201 LAGE-1 MLMAQEALAFL A8B24 HLA-A0201 Livin (ML-IAP) RLASFYDVVLP A9B1 HLA-A0201 Livin (ML-IAP) SLGSPVLGL A9B2 HLA-A0201 Livin (ML-IAP) QLCPICRAPV A9B3 HLA-A0201 M2BP RIDITLSSV A9B4 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A1 KVLEYVIKV A9B5 HLA-A0201 GnTV VLPDVFIRC A9B6 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 IMDQVPFSV A9B7 HLA-A0201 gp100/Pme117 MLGTHTMEV A9B8 HLA-A0201 hsp70 LLDVAPLSL A9B9 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A10 GLYDGMEHL A9B10 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A2 LVHFLLLKY A9B11 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A2 LVQENYLEY A9B12 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A2 YLQLVFGIEV A9B13 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A2 KMVELVHFL A9B14 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A3 LVFGIELMEV A9B15 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A4 GVYDGREHTV A9B16 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A1 YLEYRQVPV A9B17 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A8 GLMDVQIPT A9B18 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A8 KVAELVRFL A9B19 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A9 ALSVMGVYV A9B20 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 ALKDVEERV A9B21 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 LLFGLALIEV A9B22 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 VIWEVLNAV A9B23 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 TLDEKVAELV A9B24 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 KVLEFLAKL A10B1 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A3 KVAELVHFL A10B2 HLA-A0201 MC1R TILLGIFFL A10B3 HLA-A0201 Melan-A/MART-1 ELAGIGILTV A10B4 HLA-A0201 Melan-A/MART-1 ILTVILGVL A10B5 HLA-A0201 Meloe-1 TLNDECWPA A10B6 HLA-A0201 MG50 CMHLLLEAV A10B7 HLA-A0201 MG50 VLSVNVPDV A10B8 HLA-A0201 NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2 QLSLLMWIT A10B9 HLA-A0201 NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2 SLLMWITQCFL A10B10 HLA-A0201 P Polypeptide IMLCLIAAV A10B11 HLA-A0201 p53 VVPCEPPEV A10B12 HLA-A0201 p53 KTCPVQLVVV A10B13 HLA-A0201 p53 RMPEAAPPV A10B14 HLA-A0201 p53 LLPENNVLSPV A10B15 HLA-A0201 p53 KLCPVQLVVV A10B16 HLA-A0201 p53 SMPPPGTRV A10B17 HLA-A0201 p53 LLGRNSFEV A10B18 HLA-A0201 p53 GLAPPQHLIRV A10B19 HLA-A0201 p53 SLPPPGTRV A10B20 HLA-A0201 p53 YLGSYGFRL A10B21 HLA-A0201 PGK1 IIGGGMAFT A10B22 HLA-A0201 PRAME ALYVDSLFFL A10B23 HLA-A0201 PRAME SLLQHLIGL A10B24 HLA-A0201 SOX10 SAWISKPPGV A11B1 HLA-A0201 PRAME SLYSFPEPEA A11B2 HLA-A0201 PRAME VLDGLDVLL A11B3 HLA-A0201 PRDX5 LLLDDLLVSI A11B4 HLA-A0201 NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2 SLLMWITQC A11B5 HLA-A0201 RAB38/NY-MEL-1 VLHWDPETV A11B6 HLA-A0201 RAGE-1 LKLSGVVRL A11B7 HLA-A0201 RAGE-1 PLPPARNGGL A11B8 HLA-A0201 Replication protein A YLMDTSGKV A11B9 HLA-A0201 SART-3 LLQAEAPRL A11B10 HLA-A0201 SART-3 RLAEYQAYI A11B11 HLA-A0201 secernin 1 KMDAEHPEL A11B12 HLA-A0201 SOX10 AWISKPPGV A11B13 HLA-A0201 SSX-2 RLQGISPKI A11B14 HLA-A0201 SSX-2 KASEKIFYV A11B15 HLA-A0201 STAT1-alpha/II KLQELNYNL A11B16 HLA-A0201 STEAP1 FLYTLLREV A11B17 HLA-A0201 STEAP1 LLLGTIHAL A11B18 HLA-A0201 STEAP1 MIAVFLPIV A11B19 HLA-A0201 Survivin LMLGEFLKL A11B20 HLA-A0201 Survivin ELTLGEFLKL A11B21 HLA-A0201 Survivin TLPPAWQPFL A11B22 HLA-A0201 TAG-1 SLGWLFLLL A11B23 HLA-A0201 Telomerase RLFFYRKSV A11B24 HLA-A0201 TRP-2 VYDFFVWLHY A12B1 HLA-A0201 NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2 SLLMWITQA A12B2 HLA-A0201 Telomerase RLVDDFLLV A12B3 HLA-A0201 Telomerase ILAKFLHWL A12B4 HLA-A0201 Topoisomerase II FLYDDNQRV A12B5 HLA-A0201 TRAG-3 ILLRDAGLV A12B6 HLA-A0201 TRP-2 FVWLHYYSV A12B7 HLA-A0201 TRP-2 SLDDYNHLV A12B8 HLA-A0201 TRP-2 TLDSQVMSL A12B9 HLA-A0201 TRP-2 SVYDFFVVVL A12B10 HLA-A0201 TRP2-6b ATTNILEHY A12B11 HLA-A0201 tyrosinase CLLWSFQTSA A12B12 HLA-A0201 tyrosinase MLLAVLYCL A12B13 HLA-A0201 tyrosinase YMDGTMSQV A12B14 HLA-A0201 XBP-1 LLSGQPASA A12B15 HLA-A0201 MG50 LLLEAVPAV A12B16 HLA-A0201 MG50 TLKCDCEIL A12B17 HLA-A0201 MG50 VVLPKILGEV A12B18 HLA-A0201 MG50 RLGPTLMCL A12B19 HLA-A0201 Meloe-2 RCPPKPPLA A12B20 HLA-A0201 PRDX5 AMAPIKVRL A12B21 HLA-A0201 cyclin B1 ILIDWLVQV A12B22 HLA-A0201 Melan-A/MART-1 EAAGIGILTV A12B23 HLA-A0201 adipophilin SVASTITGV A12B24 HLA-A0201 alpha-actinin-4 FIASNGVKLV A13B1 HLA-A0201 Meloe-2 RLPPKPPLA A13B2 HLA-A0201 CDKN1A LMAGCIQEA A13B3 HLA-A0201 CDKN1A GLGLPKLYL A13B4 HLA-A0201 CDKN1A FAWERVRGL A13B5 HLA-A0201 CLP (coactosin-like protein) NLVRDDGSAV A13B6 HLA-A0201 CLP (coactosin-like protein) RLFAFVRFT A13B7 HLA-A0201 CLP (coactosin-like protein) VVQNFAKEFV A13B8 HLA-A0201 c-MET YVDPVITSI A13B9 HLA-A0201 CYP1B1 WLQYFPNPV A13B10 HLA-A0201 IMP-3 NLSSAEVVV A13B11 HLA-A0201 IMP-3 RLLVPTQFV A13B12 HLA-A0201 KIF20A LLSDDDVVV A13B13 HLA-A0201 KIF20A CIAEQYHTV A13B14 HLA-A0201 KIF20A AQPDTAPLPV A13B15 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A10 SLLKFLAKV A13B16 HLA-A0201 MAGE-A12 FLWGPRALV A13B17 HLA-A0201 MAGE-C2 FLAKLNNTV A13B18 HLA-A0201 Melan-A/MART-1 AAGIGILTV A13B19 HLA-A0201 Survivin QMFFCFKEL A13B20 HLA-A0201 Telomerase LLTSRLRFI A13B21 HLA-A0201 TYMS LMALPPCHAL A13B22 HLA-A0201 FLU MP 58-66 GIL GILGFVFTL A13B23 HLA-A0201 EBV LMP2 CLGCLGGLLTMV A13B24 HLA-A0201 EBV BMF1 GLCGLCTLVAML A14B1 HLA-A0201 cyclin D1 LLGATCMFV A14B2 HLA-A0201 HIV pol TPRVTGGGAM A14B3 HLA-A0201 EBV LMP2 FLY FLYALALLL A14B4 HLA-A0201 CMV pp65 NLV NLVPMVATV A14B5 HLA-A0201 EBV BRLF1 YVL YVLDHLIVV A14B6 HLA-A0201 BAP31 KLDVGNAEV A14B7 HLA-A0201 CMV IE1 VLE VLEETSVML

Example 20

This is an example where the Sample is a whole blood sample. Instead of being a mix of two PBMC donor materials as described in e.g. example 3 it is a mix of two whole blood samples. Except for the sample preparation the example is performed as example 3

Thus, the Linker is a dextrane conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE Dextramer backbone from Immudex ApS).

The Binding Molecules are peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. In this example a panel of 110 labeled pMHC-multimers, constituting a library of Detection Molecules, are tested. Apart from 26 virus epitopes that are commonly found in healthy donors (derived from EBV, CMV, FLU and HPV), is included a number of polyomavirus capsid protein (VP1)-derived epitopes that has previously led to detection of T cells in healthy donors.

110 different Labels are generated as example 3. Detection Molecules are synthetized as in example 3.

Sample, whole blood, was incubated with an amount of a library of detection molecules as described in example 3.

The cell-bound detection molecules are separated from the non-cell bound detection molecules as described in example 3.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR amplification of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to cells. Subsequent extensive sequencing of PCR products revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to the T cells present in the sample.

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this experiment         are obtained by mixing whole blood from two different donors to         obtain a cell sample where a number of T-cell specificities are         known prior to the experiment. Thus, the sensitivity of the         method as well as the relevance of the results obtained in the         experiment can be evaluated at the end of the experiment, by         comparison with data obtained previously, using other methods         but cell samples prepared from the same donors.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Blood is obtained from the Danish Blood             Bank.         -   b. Modifying sample:             -   i. Blood is drawn into BD Vacutainer® Plus Plastic                 K2EDTA Tubes according to manufacturer's protocol.             -   ii. Anti-coagulated blood samples are diluted 1:1 in                 RPMI (RPMI 1640, GlutaMAX, 25 mM Hepes; gibco-Life                 technologies).             -   iii. The samples used in the experiment are obtained by                 mixing blood from a donor (e.g. BC260) with 5% of the T                 cells specific for HLA-B7/CMV pp65 TPR into blood from a                 donor (e.g. BC262) without HLA-B7/CMV pp65 TPR specific                 T cells in fivefold dilutions, creating seven samples                 (with 5%, 1%, 0.2%, 0.04%, 0.008%, 0.0016% and 0.00032%                 HLA-B7/CMV pp65 TPR-specific T cells). The CMV pp65 TPR                 negative sample preparation instead has a population of                 HLA-A11/EBV-EBNA4 specific T cells.             -   iv. The remaining of the example is as for example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         dextrane conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE         Dextramer backbone from Immudex) as described in 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: The 110 different Binding         Molecules are prepared as in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: The 110 different DNA oligo Labels are         prepared as in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules are prepared as in example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules:         -   a. Amount of sample: 0.2 mL anti-coagulated blood diluted             1:1 in RPMI.         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: As for e.g. example 3.         -   c. Conditions: Sample is incubated with dasatinib (50 nM             final concentration), 30 min, 37° C. Subsequently, sample             and Detection Molecule is mixed and incubated as e.g.             example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: Detection Molecules are isolated with their         associated cells by FACS as described in example 3.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: By identifying         the Label (in this Example, the oligonucleotide label), the         pMHCs that bound separated cells can be identified. Therefore,         the oligonucleotide labels that were comprised within the         Detection Molecule that were recovered with the cells, were         sequenced. This allowed the identification of pMHCs that bound         cells of the cell sample. Labels associated with FACS isolated         cells are sequenced as described in example 3.

Example 21

This is an example where the Sample is mononuclear cells derived from bone marrow (BM MNCs). Instead of being a mix of two PBMC donor materials as described in example 3 it is a mix of two whole blood samples. Except for the sample preparation the example is performed as example 3.

Thus, the Linker is a dextrane conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE Dextramer backbone from Immudex).

The Binding Molecules are peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. In this example a panel of 110 labeled pMHC-multimers, constituting a library of Detection Molecules, are tested. Apart from 26 virus epitopes that are commonly found in healthy donors (derived from EBV, CMV, FLU and HPV), is included a number of polyomavirus capsid protein (VP1)-derived epitopes that has previously led to detection of T cells in healthy donors.

110 different Labels are generated as in example 3. Detection Molecules are synthetized as in example 3.

Sample, whole blood, was incubated with an amount of a library of detection molecules as described in example 3.

The cell-bound detection molecules are separated from the non-cell bound detection molecules as described in example 3.

FACS isolated cells were subjected to PCR amplification of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to cells. Subsequent extensive sequencing of PCR products revealed the identity of Detection Molecules that bound to the T cells present in the sample.

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The cell samples used in this experiment         was obtained by mixing bone marrow from two different donors to         obtain a cell sample where a number of T-cell specificities were         known prior to the experiment. Thus, the sensitivity of the         method as well as the relevance of the results obtained in the         experiment could be evaluated at the end of the experiment, by         comparison with data obtained previously, using other methods         but cell samples prepared from the same donors.         -   a. Acquiring sample: Collect bone marrow from the upper             iliac crest or the sternum by using an aspiration needle.         -   b. Modifying sample:             -   i. Dilute aspirated human bone marrow at a ratio of 7:1                 with buffer (phosphate buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.2,                 and 2 mM EDTA), e.g., dilute 30 mL of bone marrow with 5                 mL of buffer to a final volume of 35 mL.             -   ii. Pass cells through a 100 μm filter to remove bone                 fragments and cell clumps.             -   iii. Carefully layer 35 mL of diluted cell suspension                 over 15 mL of Ficoll-Paque in a 50 mL conical tube.                 Centrifuge at 445×g for 35 minutes at 20° C. in a                 swinging bucket rotor without brake. Aspirate the upper                 layer leaving the mononuclear cell layer undisturbed at                 the interphase. Carefully transfer the BM MNCs at the                 interphase to a new 50 mL conical tube. Wash cells by                 adding up to 40 mL of buffer, mix gently and centrifuge                 at 300×g for 10 minutes at 20° C. Carefully remove                 supernatant completely. For removal of platelets,                 resuspend the cell pellet in 50 mL of buffer and                 centrifuge at 200×g for 10-15 minutes at 20° C.                 Carefully remove the supernatant completely. Resuspend                 cell pellet in 5 mL buffer for downstream                 applications. iv. The samples used in the experiment is                 obtained by mixing BM MNCs from a donor (e.g. BC260)                 with 5% of the T cells specific for HLA-B7/CMV pp65 TPR                 into BM MNCs from a donor (e.g. BC262) without                 HLA-B7/CMV pp65 TPR specific T cells in fivefold                 dilutions, creating seven samples (with 5%, 1%, 0.2%,                 0.04%, 0.008%, 0.0016% and 0.00032% HLA-B7/CMV pp65                 TPR-specific T cells). The CMV pp65 TPR negative BM MNC                 preparation instead has a population of                 HLA-A11/EBV-EBNA4 specific T cells.             -   v. The remaining of the example is as for example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this example is         dextrane conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE         Dextramer backbone from Immudex) as described in 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: The 110 different Binding         Molecules are prepared as in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: The 110 different DNA oligo Labels are         prepared as in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: 110 different Detection         Molecules are prepared as in example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules:         -   a. Amount of sample: 0.2 mL anti-coagulated blood diluted             1:1 in RPMI.         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: As for example 3.         -   c. Conditions: Sample is incubated with dasatinib (50 nM             final concentration), 30 min, 37° C. Subsequently, sample             and Detection Molecule is mixed and incubated as e.g.             example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: Detection Molecules are isolated with their         associated cells by FACS as described in example 3.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: By identifying         the Label (in this Example, the oligonucleotide label), the         pMHCs that bound separated cells can be identified. Therefore,         the oligonucleotide labels that were comprised within the         Detection Molecule that were recovered with the cells, were         sequenced. This allowed the identification of pMHCs that bound         cells of the cell sample. Labels associated with FACS isolated         cells are sequenced as described in example 3.

Example 60

This is an example where the binding molecules (BM) are MHC-like antigen-presenting molecules such as e.g. CD1a, CD1b, CD1c and CD1d.

The Linker used in this example is dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE Dextramer backbone from Immudex), the label used is a DNA oligonucleotide and the Sample is PBMC's.

Isolation and identification of detection molecules capable of binding to cells of the cell sample is done by FACS of cells with PE labeled dextran conjugate, and the identity and amount of associated labels are determined by DNA sequencing.

-   -   1. Sample preparation.     -   The sample used in this example can be any type of cell sample,         for example one PBMC sample from a human being, as described in         Example 1.     -   2. Linker preparation:     -   The linker used in this experiment is a dextran molecule,         prepared as described in Example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation         -   a. Synthesis: CD1a, CD1b, CD1c and CD1d is produced as             described by Khurana A, et.al, J Vis Exp. 2007; (10): 556.             and as performed by a person skilled in the art.         -   b. Modification: CD1a, CD1b, CD1c and CD1d is loaded with 15             potential lipid antigens (GMM, glucose monomycolate;             Sulfolipid, diacylated sulfoglycolipid; PIM's,             phosphatidylinositol mannosides; Man-LAM, mannosylated             lipoarabinomannan; MPM, mannosyl-b1-phosphomycoketide; MPP,             mannosyl-b1-phosphoheptaprenol; DDM, dideoxymycobactin;             GSL-1, a-glucoronsylceramide; GaIDAG,             a-galactosyldiacylglycerol; LPG, lipophosphoglycan; PI,             phosphatidylinositol; PG, phosphatidylglycerol; PE,             phosphatidylethanolamine; iGb3, isoglobotrihexosylceramide;             Alpha-GC, a-galactosylceramide). Lipids are dissolved to 2             mg/mL in DMSO, heated to 50° C. for 2 min and diluted             further 1:10 in PBS+0.1% Tween20. Lipids are mixed             individually with the four different CD1 molecules giving             rise to 4×15=60 combinations. Briefly 10 uL 1 ug/uL CD1             protein is mixed with 2 uL 0.2 mg mL lipid in PBS+0.1%             Tween20+10% DMSO. Load lipids into CD1 4h at 30° C.         -   c. Purification: The CD1a-lipid, CD1b-lipid, CD1c-lipid and             CD1d-lipid complexes are not purified further.     -   4. Label preparation: Labels as described in example 3 are used.         -   a. Synthesis: The first 60 Labels in table 8 are used.         -   b. Modification: no further         -   c. Purification: no further     -   5. Detection molecules preparation         -   a. Synthesis: The detection molecules are prepared as in             example 3 except that the 60 different CD1 and lipid             combinations are mixed with 60 individual DNA             oligonucleotide labels (labels 1-60 from table 8).         -   b. Modification: no further modifications         -   c. Purification: no further     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules The sample and         detection molecules of step 1 and 5, respectively, are mixed and         incubated as described in Example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristic: Cells positive for PE fluorochrome on the Linker         is isolated by FACS as described in example 3.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: The detection         molecules recovered in step 7 are identified by sequencing, as         described in Example 3.

Example 61

This is an example where the binding molecules (BM) are MHC class II proteins.

The Linker used in this example is dextran conjugate with streptavidin and fluorocrome (PE Dextramer backbone from Immudex), the label used is a DNA oligonucleotide and the Sample is PBMC's.

Isolation and identification of detection molecules capable of binding to cells of the cell sample is done by FACS of cells with PE labeled dextran conjugate, and the identity and amount of associated labels are determined by DNA sequencing.

-   -   1. Sample preparation: The sample used in this example can be         any type of cell sample, for example one PBMC sample from a         human being, as described in Example 1.     -   2. Linker preparation: The linker used in this experiment is a         dextran molecule, prepared as described in Example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation         -   a. Synthesis: MHC class II protein in the form of             biotinylated monomers are obtained from The NIH Tetramer             Core Facility, at Emory University, US. The following eight             MHC Class II monomers are used (DPB1*04:01 C. tetani TT             948-968 FNNFTVSFWLRVPKVSASHLE, DPB1*04:01 human MAGE3             243-258 KKLLTQHFVQENYLEY, DPB1*04:01 human oxytocinase             272-284 KKYFAATQFEPLA, DPB1*04:01 human CLIP 87-101             PVSKMRMATPLLMQA, DPB1*04:01 human CTAG1 157-170             SLLMWITQCFLPVF, DPB1*04:01 HIV env 31-45 TEKLWVTVYYGVPVW,             DQB1*03:02 human CLIP 87-101 PVSKMRMATPLLMQA, DQB1*03:02             human FcR2 104-119 QDLELSWNLNGLQADL         -   b. Modification: Monomers are obtained ready folded and             biotinylated from The NIH Tetramer Core Facility.         -   c. Purification: No further modification     -   4. Label preparation         -   a. Synthesis: The first 8 labels from Table 8 are used         -   b. Modification: No further         -   c. Purification: No further     -   5. Detection molecules preparation         -   a. Synthesis: The detection molecules are prepared as in             example 3 except that the 8 different MHC class II molecules             are are combined with 8 different DNA oligonucleotide labels             as described in example 3.         -   b. Modification: No further         -   c. Purification: No further     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: The sample and         detection molecules of step 1 and 5, respectively, are mixed and         incubated as described in Example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics: Cells positive for PE fluorochrome on the         Linker is isolated by FACS as described in example 5.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: The detection         molecules recovered in step 7 are identified by sequencing, as         described in Example 3.

Example 79

In this example, 20 different pMHC complexes (e.g. corresponding to 20 known cancer epitopes) are used as binding molecules, the linker is dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate, and 20 different DNA oligonucleotides are used as labels.

The detection of detection molecules capable of binding to cells of the sample, is by immobilization on an array of anti-sense DNA oligonucleotides.

20 different pMHC complexes (all A*02-01, but each of the 20 complexes carrying one specific peptide epitope commonly found in cancer patients) (e.g epitopes from antigens such as WT-1, survivin, and NY-ESO-1) are prepared using standard procedures, and as described in other examples above. The pMHC complexes are preferably mono-biotinylated.

Dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate is used as linker, as described in several examples above. PE is a strong fluorochrome, and a given conjugate carries e.g. 1-3 PE molecules.

The labels are 20 different DNA oligonucleotides of different sequences, of approximately 50 nt in length. The oligonucleotides are biotinylated at one terminus. Detection molecules are generated by mixing the dextran-streptavidin-PE conjugate with the 20 different biotinylated pMHC complexes and the 20 different biotinylated DNA oligonucleotides from above, using standard conditions, as described in several examples above. This leads to generation of 20 detection molecules, each of which carries a specific pMHC complex and a specific DNA label.

Whole blood from e.g. a cancer patient is then mixed with the detection molecules generated immediately above, and incubated for 15 minutes. Then the cells are spun down and supernatant removed, and the centrifugation and resuspension repeated 0-3 times. Finally, the cells are resuspended in an appropriate binding buffer that allows specific hybridization of complementary DNA strands.

After incubation and washing the solution of cells and detection molecules is applied to an array, comprising 20 different anti-sense DNA oligos, each of which is confined to a specific area in the array. In other words, each of the 20 different anti-sense DNA oligonucleotides are located in a small area of the array—the array therefore consists of 20 areas each of which comprise antisense oligonucleotides of a given sequence. Each of these 20 anti-sense DNA oligonucleotides comprise a sequence of 10-15 nt that is complementary to the DNA label of one of the 20 detection molecules. Therefore, cells that are bound by a certain detection molecule will become immobilized to the array, through hybridization between the DNA oligonucleotide label of said certain detection molecule and the anti-sense DNA oligonucleotide of the array at that position. The hybridization conditions may be adjusted so that hybridization between just one detection molecule and one anti-sense DNA leads to inefficient immobilization of the corresponding cell, whereas hybridization of several detection molecules to several anti-sense DNA leads to efficient immobilization of the corresponding cell.

As a result, the cells bound by a certain kind of detection molecules (i.e. bound to a certain specificity of detection molecule) will become immobilized to one of the 20 areas of the array, defined by the sequence of the detection molecule bound to the cell and the position in the array of the antisense DNA oligonucleotide that is complementary to said detection molecule's label. Several cells, each bound by a large number of detection molecules, may become immobilized in a certain area of the array. Because of the fluorescent PE molecules attached to the detection molecule, this will give rise to a fluororescent signal from this area of the array. Moreover, at higher resolution (using a microscope) it will be possible to count the number of cells immobilized in the specific area of the array, and finally, the fluorescence of each cell and therefore the relative number of detection molecules bound to each cell, may be determined. See the figure below showing an example where the cell sample comprises two cell specificities that are bound by detection molecules; one of the specificities are represented by 12 cells, the other is represented by 5 cells. In FIG. 17, hatched areas represent fluorescent light above a certain threshold.

In this example, the fluid cell sample could be of any kind (e.g. synovial fluid, blood, bone marrow, environmental sample (e.g. comprising bacterial cells, in which case the binding molecules could be antibodies binding to proteins of different bacterial surfaces), etc.

The number of different detection molecules could be expanded to much larger numbers, e.g. 100, 1.000 or 10.000.

Rather than having the detection molecules carry the fluorescent molecules directly, a system of primary and secondary antibodies and a corresponding staining system could be used, like standard secondary labelling systems, in order to increase the signal strength.

Example 80

In this example, the labels used are DNA oligonucleotides of different length. The identity of the individual label is based on its mass, by either mass spectrometry or differential migration in a gel electrophoresis analysis.

1. Sample Preparation.

Blood comprising different kinds of blood cells is drawn from a person, and used directly in the incubation, step E below. Alternatively, any type of sample described in the examples above can be used.

3. Binding Molecules Preparation

The binding molecules used in this study are 10 different antibodies, recognizing 10 different cell differentiation markers (CDs) respectively, namely CD3, CD4, CD8, CD16, CD56, . . . **. Each of these are commercially available.

4. Label Preparation

10 DNA oligonucleotides of length 50 nt, 100 nt, 150 nt, 200 nt, 250 nt, 300 nt, 350 nt, 400 nt, 450 nt, and 500 nt, respectively, with a terminal N-succinimidyl ester moiety are prepared by standard means.

5. Detection Molecules Preparation

Each of the 10 antibodies mentioned under (B) are incubated in appropriate buffer (e.g. PBS pH 8) together with one of the 10 oligonucleotides mentioned in step (C) above, allowing the N-succinimidyl ester to react with free amines on the surface of the antibody, to form a covalent link between the antibody and the oligonucleotide. In this way, 10 detection molecules are generated, each of which comprise one specific antibody (e.g. anti-CD3 antibody) and one specific oligonucleotide (e.g. 50 nt DNA oligo).

6. Incubation of Sample and Detection Molecules

The sample of step (A) is incubated with the 10 detection molecules under appropriate conditions (e.g. appropriate buffer, e.g. Tris pH 7.5 is added, or the oligonucleotides from step (D) in e.g. PBS pH 8 is simply mixed with sample without further addition of buffer. Incubation can be at 0, 4, 10, 20, 30, or 40 degrees celcius.

7. Isolating Bound and Unbound Detection Molecules

The incubation mixture of step (E) is centrifuged, to recover all cells of the sample. Supernatant is removed, the cells resuspended and buffer added. Centrifugation is repeated 1-3 times, and the cells finally resuspended. The suspension of cells will contain detection molecules that are capable of binding to one or more cells. Thus, the detection molecules of the suspension are representative of the distribution of receptors on the cell surface of the cells of the original sample.

8. Determining the identity and amount of the recovered detection molecules. 1 μL of the mixture of cells and bound detection molecules are transferred to a 100 μL PCR reaction comprising forward and reverse primers that can anneal to each of the 10 oligonucleotide labels described in step (C) above, and comprising all other components for an efficient PCR reaction. The PCR reaction is performed under standard conditions, and aliquots are taken out after 25, 30 and 35 cycles are performed.

The PCR product is applied to a gel capable of resolving the individual oligonucleotide fragments (e.g. a 2.5% agarose gel), and electrophoresis is performed. Once the fastest moving product (corresponding to the 50 nt oligonucleotide) has migrated about ¾ of the gel length, eletrophoresis is terminated. The position of a band in the gel reflects its size and therefore identifies the corresponding oligonucleotide label; the uppermost band represents the largest fragment (500 nt), and the lowermost band represents the smallest fragment (50 nt). The intensity of each of the 10 bands, corresponding to each of the 10 different oligonucleotide fragments, is indicative of the relative amount recovered of each oligonucleotide label and therefore, of each detection molecule.

Example 81

This example is as example 80, except that the labels used here are PNA fragments rather than DNA oligonucleotides, and the identity of the labels of the recovered detection molecules are determined by mass spectrometry analysis rather than gel electrophoresis.

Sample and binding molecules are as described in example 80.

Labels are prepared as follows. 10 different PNAs are prepared, of different size (e.g. comprising 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, and 23 bases). During synthesis, N-succinimidyl ester is introduced at one of the PNA fragment. Further, also during its synthesis, a disulfide bond (S-S) is introduced between the ester and the rest of the PNA fragment. Thus, in the label a disulfide bond links the N-succinimidyl ester with the remainder of the PNA fragment.

Detection molecules are prepared as in example 80, except that the PNA labels are used instead of the DNA oligonucleotide labels of example 80. Each of the resulting 10 detection molecules therefore consists of a specific binding molecule (a specific antibody, e.g. CD3) and a specific PNA label (e.g. PNA comprising 5 bases). Isolation of detection molecules capable of binding to cells of the sample is done by centrifugation as decribed in example 80, and the final cell suspension thus contains cells plus detection molecules capable of binding to cells of the sample. Finally, the identity and amount of the recovered detection molecules is determined in the following way: First, the PNA labels are cleaved off from the detection molecules (and therefore, released from the cells that the detection molecule is bound to) by addition of DTT, which cleaves the disulfide bond. The cells are spun down by centrifugation, and the supernatant (comprising the relased PNA labels but not the cells) is then subjected to a mass spectrometry analysis.

The mass spectrometry analysis will reveal the relative amount of each of the 10 PNA labels (corresponding to the relative amount of each of the 10 detection molecules recovered by centrifugation of the cells).

Example 82

This example is as example 81, except that the labels used here are peptide fragments rather than PNA fragments

Labels are prepared as follows. 10 different peptides are prepared, of different size (e.g. comprising 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, and 23 amino acids). During synthesis, N-succinimidyl ester is introduced at one of the peptide fragment. Further, also during its synthesis, a disulfide bond (S-S) is introduced between the ester and the rest of the peptide fragment. Thus, in the label a disulfide bond links the N-succinimidyl ester with the remainder of the peptide fragment.

Detection molecules are prepared as in example 81, except that the peptide labels are used instead of the PNA labels of example 81. Each of the resulting 10 detection molecules therefore consist of a specific binding molecule (a specific antibody, e.g. CD3) and a specific peptide label (e.g. peptide comprising 5 amino acids). The mass spectrometry analysis will reveal the relative amount of each of the 10 peptide labels (corresponding to the relative amount of each of the 10 detection molecules recovered by centrifugation of the cells).

Example 120

This is an example where the samples are three buffy coats (BC's), the Linker is PE and streptavidin conjugated dextran, and the Binding Molecules are biotinylated peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. The Labels are synthetic oligonucleotides modified with a terminal biotin capture-tag. The labels are combined oligonucleotide label arising by annealing an A oligonucleotide (modified with biotin) to a partially complimentary B oligonucleotide label followed by enzymatic DNA polymerase extension of Oligo A and Oligo B to create a fully double stranded label.

The Detection Molecules are created by combining biotinylated pMHC and labels in the form of biotin-modified oligonucleotide onto a streptavidin-modified dextran linker. The detection molecule further contained a fluorochrome (PE). 30 different Detection Molecules are generated wherein the individual detection molecules containing different pMHC are encoded by corresponding individual oligonucleotide labels. Two versions (Set 1 and Set 2, see table x) of each of the 30 different Detection Molecules are created in the way that all Detection molecules are generated in two forms with different labels. Three samples, PBMC's, were incubated with an amount of mixed Detection Molecules.

In this example CD8+ T cell-bound Detection Molecules are separated from the non-cell bound Detection Molecules by capture of CD8+ T cells using anti CD8-coated magnetic Dynabeads. Magnetic bead-isolated CD8-positive T cells are subjected to PCR amplification of associated Label and the PCR product is analyzed as a read of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells thus revealing the identity of detection molecules bound to the T cells present in the sample.

-   -   1. Sample preparation.         -   a. Acquiring sample: The cell sample used in this experiment             is obtained by preparing PBMC's from blood drawn from three             donors (D131, D149 and D158) that, by conventional             MHC-multimer staining, are characterized for their specific             T cells towards a number of virus antigens.         -   b. Modifying sample: The PBMC's are prepared as described in             example 1.     -   2. Linker preparation: The Linker is PE and streptavidin         conjugated dextran (Dextramer from Immudex) which is prepared as         in example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: Binding Molecules are         biotinylated pMHC complexes with peptide/HLA combination as         described in table below

Labels set 1 Labels set 2 HLA Antigen Peptide 2OS-A1-B2 2OS-A1-B12 A2 CMV pp65 NLVPMVATV 2OS-A1-B3 2OS-A1-B13 A2 EBV-E3B LLDFVRFMGV 2OS-A1-B4 2OS-A1-B14 A2 HPV E6 TIHDIILECV 2OS-A1-B5 2OS-A1-B15 A2 HSV-1gB RMLGDVMAV 2OS-A1-B6 2OS-A1-B16 A2 Neg Control ALIAPVHAV 2OS-A2-B2 2OS-A2-B12 A2 CMV-IE1 VLEETSVML 2OS-A2-B3 2OS-A2-B13 A2 EBV-BALF4 FLDKGTYTL 2OS-A2-B4 2OS-A2-B14 A2 FLU GILGFVFTL 2OS-A2-B5 2OS-A2-B15 A2 MART-1 ELAGIGILTV 2OS-A2-B6 2OS-A2-B16 A3 Cancer-gp100 ALLAVGATK 2OS-A3-B2 2OS-A3-B12 A2 EBV-EBMAC3 CLGGLLTMV 2OS-A3-B3 2OS-A3-B13 A2 EBV-BMRF1 TLDYKPLSV 2OS-A3-B4 2OS-A3-B14 A2 FLU-BNP KLGEFYNQMM 2OS-A3-B5 2OS-A3-B15 A2 HIV-gag SLYNTVATL 2OS-A3-B6 2OS-A3-B16 B07 Neg Control GPAESAAGL 2OS-A4-B2 2OS-A4-B12 A2 EBV-BMLF1 GLCTLVAML 2OS-A4-B3 2OS-A4-B13 A2 EBV-BRLF1 YVLDHLIVV 2OS-A4-B4 2OS-A4-B14 A2 HSV1gB GIFEDRAPV 2OS-A4-B5 2OS-A4-B15 A2 HIV ILKEPVHGV 2OS-A4-B6 2OS-A4-B16 B08 Neg Control AAKGRGAAL 2OS-A5-B2 2OS-A5-B12 A2 EBV-LMP1 YLLEMLWRL 2OS-A5-B3 2OS-A5-B13 A2 HPV-E7 YMLDLQPETT 2OS-A5-B4 2OS-A5-B14 A2 Hsv1gB YLANGGFLI 2OS-A5-B5 2OS-A5-B15 A2 HIV FLGKIWPS 2OS-A5-B6 2OS-A5-B16 H2Kb Neg Control AYAGSAGSI 2OS-A6-B2 2OS-A6-B12 A2 EBV-LMP1 YLQQNV\ANTL 2OS-A6-B3 2OS-A6-B13 A2 HPV-E7 LLMGTLGIVC 2OS-A6-B4 2OS-A6-B14 A2 HSV-UI25 FLWEDQTLL 2OS-A6-B5 2OS-A6-B15 A1 Neg Control STEGGGLAY 2OS-A6-B6 2OS-A6-B16 Neg Control no peptide

-   -   4. Label preparation: Label is generated as described in example         4 except that in this example only 2×60 labels are used (See         table above)     -   5. Detection molecules preparation         -   a. Synthesis             -   i. According to table below transfer the required volume                 Dextran conjugate to an Eppendorf tube. Centrifuge                 (10.000 g, 10 min, 4° C.).             -   ii. Transfer the supernatant containing dextrane                 conjugate without precipitates to 2*30 wells on two                 plates.             -   iii. In a 96 well format add the 2×30 Label oligos in                 2:1 molar concentration to PE-Dextramer conjugate.             -   iv. Mix well and incubate 30 min, 4° C.             -   v. Thaw pMHC binding molecules on ice, dilute to 100                 pg/mL in PBS and centrifuge (2000 g, 5 minutes, 18° C.).             -   vi. Transfer the pMHC monomers to wells of the 96 well                 plate according to the above table to allow the                 combination of pMHC with labeled linker.             -   vii. Mix well and incubate 30 minutes at r.t. and PBS                 subsequently.

Detection molecule preparation Concentration Dextran conjugate 16 * 10{circumflex over ( )}-8M Oligo lable 54.25 * 10{circumflex over ( )}-8M Detection molecules/samples Number of Detection molecules 30 Number of samples 20 Volumes needed Assembling Label and Linker 1: Transfer Dextran to Eppendorf 630 μl tube and centrifuge 10000 g, 5 min,4 C. 2: Transfer the supernatant to wells 20 μl/well on a plate according to setup 3: Add oligo labels to wells according 11.8 μl/well to setup, Mix and incubate 30 min,4 C. Preparation of binding molecules: 1: Thaw pMHC monomers on ice 2: Dilute monomers in PBS to 100 μg/ml = 2 μM Vtotal needed per pMHC per plate 40 μl/pMHC Preparation of Detection Molecules 1: Centrifuge pMHC monomers 2000 g, 10 min 18 C. 2: Transfer supernatant to the 96well 26.4 μl/well plate (To the Dextran-MHC control is an equal volume of PBS added) 3: Mix well and incubate 30 min at RT 4: Add PBS 1.8 μl/well 5: Store at 4 C. Vtotal in each well 60.0

-   -   -   a. Modification: No further         -   b. Purification: No further

    -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules         -   a. Amount of sample: 2 million PBMC's per sample         -   b. Amount of detection molecule: According to table below.             Each donor sample is incubated with 4 different amounts of             Detection Molecule         -   c. Conditions:             -   i. PBMC's are thawed in 10 ml RPMI-10% FCS and washed                 twice in 2 mL RPMI-10% FCS. Cells are then washed in 2                 mL PBS w. 0.5% BSA, 100 μg/ml Herring DNA, 2 mM EDTA.                 (All washing of cells in this experiment refers to                 centrifuge for 5 min at 800 g to collect cells followed                 by discarding of wash buffer)             -   ii. Resuspend cells in 500 μl PBS w. 0.5% BSA, 100 μg/ml                 Herring DNA, 2 mM EDTA to a concentration 20million/ml.             -   iii. Add 25 μl 1 pM Dasatinib and incubate 30 min at                 37° C. (Final Dasatinib conc. 50 nM).             -   iv. Centrifuge Detection Molecules (2000 g, 5 minutes,                 18° C.)             -   v. Add 166.5 μl 10 μM biotin to an Eppendorf tube.             -   vi. Pool 25 μl of each Detection Molecule from each of                 the two sets into the Eppendorf tube (Detection Molecule                 library) Vtot=1666.5 μl which is enough for 3 donors in                 4 concentrations.             -   vii. Centrifuge the library of Detection Molecules                 (10000 g, 10 min) and transfer 1550 μl to a new tube                 avoiding aggregates.             -   viii. Transfer from new tube to 5 ml tubes according to                 setup/volumes below.             -   ix. To all twelve tubes add 100 μl cells (2 million                 cells) of the respective donors, to a VTot in each                 sample of 300p1. Incubate 15 minutes at 37° C.             -   x. Wash cells twice in 2 ml PBS w. 0.5% BSA, 100 μg/ml                 Herring DNA, 2 mM EDTA (Centrifuge 5 min at 800 g)

Sample/Detect Mol 3 μl 1.5 μl 0.75 μl 0.375 μl D131 S1: 200 μl  S2: 100 μl  S3: 50 μl  S4: 25 μl D149 S5: 200 μl  S6: 100 μl  S7: 50 μl  S8: 25 μl D158 S9: 200 μl S10: 100 μl S11: 50 μl S12: 25 μl PBS w. 0.5% BSA, 100 μg/ml Herring DNA, 2 mM EDTA D131 S1: 0 μl  S2: 100 μl  S3: 50 μl  S4: 25 μl D149 S5: 0 μl  S6: 100 μl  S7: 50 μl  S8: 25 μl D158 S9: 0 μl S10: 100 μl S11: 50 μl S12: 25 μl

-   -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics         -   a. Apply: In this example Detection Molecules are isolated             by capturing CD8+ cells using anti CD8 antibody coated             magnetic beads (DYNABEADS CD8, #11147D, Life Technologies).             Detection molecules associated with captured CD8+ cells are             isolated. Dynabeads used according to manufacturer's             protocol.             -   i. Briefly; Dynabeads are vortex>30 sec and transfer                 50p1/sample=600 μl to a 5 ml tube and add 1 ml PBS+0.1%                 BSA+2 mM EDTA. Re-suspended dynabeads are placed in                 magnet 1 min, supernatant is discarded and dynabeads are                 re-suspended in 600 μl PBS+0.1% BSA+2 mM EDTA.             -   ii. To all samples add 50 μl washed beads+950 μl                 Isolation buffer=>Vtot=1 ml. Incubate 20 min 4C on a                 tilting plate.         -   b. Wash:             -   i. Place tubes in magnet (Dynal, Life Technologies) for                 2 min and carefully remove supernatant             -   ii. Wash twice: Add 2 ml PBS+0.1% BSA+2 mM EDTA, vortex,                 place in magnet 2 min, remove supernatant.             -   iii. Re-suspend beads in 500 μl PBS w. 0.5% BSA, 100                 μg/ml Herring DNA, 2 mM EDTA, transfer to Eppendorf                 tubes.             -   iv. Centrifuge tubes 5 min at 5000 g, remove supernatant                 final volume app. 20 μl→Store at −80 C or store on ice                 at 4C O.N for PCR         -   c. Separate: Is done during washing.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: Separated         Detection Molecules are analyzed by PCR amplification of the         attached labels followed by sequencing of the PCR products to         reveal the identity of isolated detection molecules and thus the         identity of those antigens for which specific T cells were         present in the sample. The PCR amplification and sequencing of         PCR product is done as for example 3 using the same sets of         primers and the same sequencing service and sequencing         de-convolution service.

Example 121

This is an example where the samples are PBMC's prepared as three buffy coats (BC's), the Linker is PE and streptavidin conjugated dextran, and the Binding Molecules are biotinylated peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. The Labels are synthetic oligonucleotides modified with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

In this example CD8+ T cell-bound Detection Molecules are separated from non-cell bound Detection Molecules by capture of CD8+ T cells by magnetic labeling of CD8+ cells with CD8 MicroBeads (CD8 MicroBeads, human, #130-045-201, Miltenyi, Germany). Magnetic bead-isolated CD8-positive T cells are subjected to PCR amplification of associated Label (as described in example 3) and the PCR product is analyzed as a read of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells thus revealing the identity of detection molecules bound to the T cells present in the sample (as example 3).

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The samples are PBMC's from three donor         materials prepared as described in example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The Linker is PE and streptavidin         conjugated dextran (Dextramer from Immudex) which is prepared as         in example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: Binding Molecules are         biotinylated pMHC complexes with peptide/HLA combination as         described in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: Labels are biotin modified DNA         oligonucleotides as described in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: Detection Molecules are         prepared by combining 110 aliquots of Linker with individual         Labels followed by adding pMHC Binding Molecules as described in         Example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: PBMC's are         mixed with the 110 member library of Detection Molecules as         described in example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics:         -   a. Apply: In this example Detection Molecules are isolated             by capturing CD8+ cells using anti CD8 antibody coated             magnetic beads (CD8 MicroBeads, human, #130-045-201,             Miltenyi, Germany). Detection molecules associated with             captured CD8+ cells are isolated. CD8 MicroBeads are used             according to manufacturer's protocol. Briefly;             -   i. Centrifuge cell suspensions at 300×g for 10 minutes.                 Aspirate supernatant completely.             -   ii. Resuspend cell pellets in 80 μL of buffer                 (phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.2, 0.5% bovine                 serum albumin (BSA), and 2 mM EDTA).             -   iii. Add 20 μL of CD8 MicroBeads. Mix well and incubate                 for 15 minutes in the refrigerator (2-8)             -   iv. Wash cells by adding 1-2 mL of buffer and centrifuge                 at 300×g for 10 minutes. Aspirate supernatant                 completely. Resuspend cells in 500 μL of buffer.             -   v. Place an MS column (Miltenyi, Germany) in the                 magnetic field of a OctoMACS column stand Separator.                 Prepare column by rinsing with 500 μL of buffer:             -   vi. Apply cell suspension onto the column. Collect                 unlabeled cells that pass through and wash column with                 500 μL of buffer. Collect total effluent; this is the                 unlabeled cell fraction. Perform washing steps by adding                 buffer three times. Only add new buffer when the column                 reservoir is empty.             -   vii. Remove column from the separator and place it on a                 suitable collection tube.             -   viii. Pipette 1 mL of buffer onto the column.             -   ix. Immediately flush out the magnetically labeled cells                 by firmly pushing the plunger into the column.             -   x. Centrifuge tubes 5 min at 500 g, remove supernatant.                 The final volume of app. 20 μl containing collected CD8+                 cells and their associated Detection Molecules are store                 at −80C for later analysis.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: Separated         cells and their associated Detection Molecules are analyzed by         PCR amplification of the attached labels followed by sequencing         of the PCR products to reveal the identity of isolated Detection         Molecules and thus the identity of those antigens for which         specific T cells were present in the sample. The identification         is done as for example 3.

Example 122

This is an example where the samples are PBMC's prepared as three buffy coats (BC's), the Linker is PE and streptavidin conjugated dextran, and the Binding Molecules are biotinylated peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. The Labels are synthetic oligonucleotides modified with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

In this example, though, all cells and their bound Detection Molecules are first separated, by centrifugation, from the supernatant containing Detection Molecules not bound to cells. Secondly, remaining Detection Molecules are captured by their PE modification on the Linker using anti PE MicroBeads (anti PE MicroBeads, #130-048-801, Miltenyi, Germany). Magnetic bead-isolated cells are subjected to PCR amplification of Detection-Molecule associated Labels (as described in example 3) and the PCR product is analyzed as a read of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells thus revealing the identity of detection molecules bound to the T cells present in the sample as in example 3.

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The samples are PBMC's from three donor         materials prepared as described in example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The Linker is PE and streptavidin         conjugated dextran (Dextramer from Immudex) which is prepared as         in example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: Binding Molecules are         biotinylated pMHC complexes with peptide/HLA combination as         described in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: Labels are biotin modified DNA         oligonucleotides as described in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: Detection Molecules are         prepared by combining 110 aliquots of Linker with individual         Labels followed by adding pMHC Binding Molecules as described in         Example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: PBMC's are         mixed with the 110 member library of Detection Molecules as         described in example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics         -   a. Apply: In this example Detection Molecules are isolated             by centrifugation separation of cells and their bound             Detection Molecules from the supernatant containing             Detection Molecules not bound to cells followed by magnetic             capture of cells with bound PE-labeled Detection Molecules             thereby separating from cells without bound PE-labeled             Detection Molecules using anti PE MicroBeads (anti PE             MicroBeads, #130-048-801, Miltenyi, Germany). MicroBeads are             used according to manufacturer's protocol. Briefly;             -   i. Centrifuge cell suspensions at 300×g for 10 minutes.                 Aspirate supernatant completely.             -   ii. Wash cells twice by adding 2 mL of buffer                 (phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.2, 0.5% bovine                 serum albumin (BSA), and 2 mM EDTA) and centrifuge at                 300×g for 10 minutes. Aspirate supernatant completely.             -   iii. Resuspend cell pellets in 80 μL of buffer.             -   iv. Add 20 μL of anti PE MicroBeads. Mix well and                 incubate for 15 minutes in the refrigerator (2-8)             -   v. Wash cells by adding 1-2 mL of buffer and centrifuge                 at 300×g for 10 minutes. Aspirate supernatant                 completely. Resuspend cells in 500 μL of buffer.             -   vi. Place an MS column (Miltenyi, Germany) in the                 magnetic field of a OctoMACS column stand Separator.                 Prepare column by rinsing with 500 μL of buffer:             -   vii. Apply cell suspension onto the column. Collect                 unlabeled cells that pass through and wash column with                 500 μL of buffer. Collect total effluent; this is the                 unlabeled cell fraction. Perform washing steps by adding                 buffer three times. Only add new buffer when the column                 reservoir is empty.             -   viii. Remove column from the separator and place it on a                 suitable collection tube.             -   ix. Pipette 1 mL of buffer onto the column.             -   x. Immediately flush out the magnetically labeled cells                 by firmly pushing the plunger into the column.             -   xi. Centrifuge tubes 5 min at 500 g, remove supernatant.                 The final volume of app. 20 μl containing collected CD8+                 cells and their associated Detection Molecules are store                 at −80 C for later analysis.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: Separated         cells and their associated Detection Molecules are analyzed by         PCR amplification of the attached labels followed by sequencing         of the PCR products to reveal the identity of isolated Detection         Molecules and thus the identity of those antigens for which         specific T cells were present in the sample. The identification         is done as for e.g. example 6.

Example 123

This is an example where the samples are PBMC's prepared as three buffy coats (BC's), the Linker is PE and streptavidin conjugated dextran, and the Binding Molecules are biotinylated peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. The Labels are synthetic oligonucleotides modified with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

In this example, cells and their bound Detection Molecules are separated, by centrifugation, from the supernatant containing Detection Molecules not bound to cells. The DNA oligonucleotide Labels on Detection Molecules associated with captured cells are subjected to PCR amplification (as example 3) and the PCR product is analyzed as a read of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells thus revealing the identity of detection molecules bound to the T cells present in the sample (as example 3).

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The samples are PBMC's from three donor         materials prepared as described in example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The Linker is PE and streptavidin         conjugated dextran (Dextramer from Immudex) which is prepared as         in example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: Binding Molecules are         biotinylated pMHC complexes with peptide/HLA combination as         described in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: Labels are biotin modified DNA         oligonucleotides as described in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: Detection Molecules are         prepared by combining 110 aliquots of Linker with individual         Labels followed by adding pMHC Binding Molecules as described in         Example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: PBMC's are         mixed with the 110 member library of Detection Molecules as         described in example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics         -   b. Apply: Detection Molecules are isolated by             centrifugation-separation of cells and their bound Detection             Molecules from the supernatant containing Detection             Molecules not bound to cells. Briefly;             -   i. Centrifuge cell suspensions at 300×g for 10 minutes.                 Aspirate supernatant completely.             -   ii. Wash cells twice by adding 2 mL of buffer                 (phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), pH 7.2, 0.5% bovine                 serum albumin (BSA), and 2 mM EDTA) and centrifuge at                 300×g for 10 minutes.             -   iii. Aspirate supernatant completely. The final volume                 of app. 20 μl containing collected cells and their                 associated Detection Molecules are store at -80C for                 later analysis.     -   8. Identification of enriched Detection Molecule: Separated         cells and their associated Detection Molecules are analyzed by         PCR amplification of the attached labels followed by sequencing         of the PCR products to reveal the identity of isolated Detection         Molecules and thus the identity of those antigens for which         specific T cells were present in the sample. The identification         is done as for example 3.

Example 124

This is an example where the samples are PBMC's prepared as three buffy coats (BC's), the Linker is PE and streptavidin conjugated dextran, and the Binding Molecules are biotinylated peptide-MHC (pMHC) complexes. The Labels are synthetic oligonucleotides modified with a terminal biotin capture-tag.

In this example, INFγ producing cells and their bound Detection Molecules are separated from Detection Molecules not bound to INFγ producing cells by magnetic labeling and capture of INFγ producing cells using the MicroBead based INFγ Secretion Assay (INFγ Secretion Assay, #130-054-201, Miltenyi, Germany). Magnetic bead-isolated INFg producing cells are subjected to PCR amplification of associated DNA oligonucleotide Label (as described in example 3) and the PCR product is analyzed as a read of the oligonucleotide label associated with the detection molecules bound to the isolated cells thus revealing the identity of detection molecules bound to the INFγ producing cells present in the sample (as example 3).

-   -   1. Sample preparation. The samples are PBMC's from three donor         materials prepared as described in example 3.     -   2. Linker preparation: The Linker is PE and streptavidin         conjugated dextran (Dextramer from Immudex) which is prepared as         in example 1.     -   3. Binding molecules preparation: Binding Molecules are         biotinylated pMHC complexes with peptide/HLA combination as         described in example 3.     -   4. Label preparation: Labels are biotin modified DNA         oligonucleotides as described in example 3.     -   5. Detection molecules preparation: Detection Molecules are         prepared by combining 110 aliquots of Linker with individual         Labels followed by adding pMHC Binding Molecules as described in         Example 3.     -   6. Incubation of sample and detection molecules: PBMC's are         mixed with the 110 member library of Detection Molecules as         described in example 3.     -   7. Enrichment of detection molecules with desired         characteristics         -   i. Apply: In this example Detection Molecules are isolated             by capturing INF γ producing cells using anti INF γ catch             antibody in combination with anti INF γ detection antibody.             All reagents and procedures as described by Miltenyi (INF γ             Secretion Assay, #130-054-201, Miltenyi, Germany). Finally             INFγ producing cells are captured using anti PE Microbeads.         -   ii. Centrifuge tubes 5 min at 500 g, remove supernatant. The             final volume of app. 20 μl containing collected INFγ             producing cells and their associated Detection Molecules are             store at −80 C for later analysis.     -   8. Identification of enriched detection molecule: Separated         cells and their associated Detection Molecules are analyzed by         PCR amplification of the attached labels followed by sequencing         of the PCR products to reveal the identity of isolated Detection         Molecules and thus the identity of those antigens for which         specific T cells were present in the sample. The identification         is done as for example 3.

All patent and non-patent references cited in the present application are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

Items Set #1

-   1. A method comprising the following steps:     -   a. Combining at least one cell with at least one detection         molecule, where the detection molecule comprises a binding         molecule (BM), a linker (Li), and a label (La);     -   b. Allowing the detection molecules to recognize and bind cells         through their binding molecule entity;     -   c. Detecting or isolating pairs of cell-detection molecule         complexes formed in step (b);     -   d. Identifying detection molecules capable of binding to a cell         in step (b). -   2. The method of item 1 where the binding molecule (BM) is a     peptide-MHC complex, an antibody or an oligonucleotide. -   3. The method of item 1 or 2 where the label (La) is an antibody, a     nucleic acid, a particle comprising an electronic or electromagnetic     signal, or a particle comprising a radio signal. -   4. The method of any of items 1-3 where the linker (Li) is a     streptavidin, polysaccharide, dextran, peptide, or carbon-based     polymer. -   5. The method of any of items 1-4 where step c is carried out by     immobilization of the cell-detection molecule pairs -   6. The method of item 5 where said immobilization is by     precipitating cells by centrifugation, immunoprecipitation of the     cells optionally involving centrifugation, or any other means that     precipitates the cells, leading to co-precipitation of detection     molecules bound to cells. -   7. The method of item 6 where said immobilization is by binding one     or more cells to a bead, particle or surface, or any other means     that immobilizes said one or more cells, leading to     co-immobilization of the detection molecules bound to said one or     more cells. -   8. The method of any of items 5-7 where said immobilization involves     the use of an antibody or other molecule, capable of specifically     binding a subset of cells -   9. The method of item 8 where said antibody or other molecule     specifically recognizes the T cell receptor (TCR) or the CD4 or CD8     proteins of T cells. -   10. The method of any of the preceding items where a label uniquely     identifies individual detection molecules or identifies specific     subsets of detection molecules -   11. The method of any of the preceding items where the Label is an     oligonucleotide. -   12. The method of any of the preceding items where the binding     molecule is a pMHC complex, an antibody or an oligonucleotide     aptamer. -   13. The method of any of the preceding items where the linker is a     dextran molecule, polysaccharide, oligonucleotide, streptavidin,     peptide, carbon-based molecule, carbohydrate or an organic molecule. -   14. A multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) comprising     -   a. two or more MHC's linked by a backbone molecule; and     -   b. at least one nucleic acid molecule linked to said backbone,         wherein said nucleic acid molecule comprises a central stretch         of nucleic acids (barcode region) designed to be amplified by         e.g. PCR. -   15. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex according to     item 14, wherein the backbone molecule is selected from the group     consisting of polysaccharides, such as glucans such as dextran, a     streptavidin or a streptavidin multimer. -   16. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex according to     item 14 or 15, wherein the MHC's are coupled to the backbone through     a streptavidin-biotin binding, streptavidin-avidin. -   17. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex according to any     of the preceding items, wherein the MHC's are linked to the backbone     via the MHC heavy chain. -   18. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the MHC is artificially     assembled. -   19. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, composed of at least four MHC's, such     as at least eight, such as at least ten, 2-30, 2-20, such as 2-10 or     such as 4-10 MHC's. -   20. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the at least one nucleic acid     molecule is composed of at least a 5′ first primer region, a central     region (barcode region), and a 3′ second primer region. -   21. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the at least one nucleic acid     molecule has a length in the range 20-100 nucleotides, such as     30-100, such as 30-80, such as 30-50 nucleotides. -   22. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the at least one nucleic acid     molecule is linked to said backbone via a streptavidin-biotin     binding and/or streptavidina-avidin binding. -   23. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the at least one nucleic acid     molecule comprises or consists of DNA, RNA, and/or artificial     nucleotides such as PLA or LNA. -   24. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the MHC is selected from the     group consisting of class I MHC, a class II MHC, a CD1, or a     MHC-like molecule. -   25. The multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC) according     to any of the preceding items, wherein the backbone further     comprises one or more linked fluorescent labels. -   26. A composition comprising a subset of multimeric major     histocompatibility complexes (MHC's) according to any of items     14-25, wherein each set of MHC's has a different peptide decisive     for T cell recognition and a unique “barcode” region in the DNA     molecule. -   27. The composition according to item 26, wherein the primer regions     in the DNA molecule are identical for each set of MHC's. -   28. A) The composition according to item 26 or 27, comprising at     least 10 different sets of MHC's such as at least 100, such as at     least 500, at least 1000, at least 5000, such as in the range     10-50000, such as 10-1000 or such as 50-500 sets of MHC's. -   28. B) A kit of parts comprising     -   a. a composition according to any of items 26 to 28; and     -   b. one or more sets of primers for amplifying the nucleic acid         molecules. -   29. A method for detecting antigen responsive cells in a sample     comprising: i) providing one or more multimeric major     histocompatibility complexes (MHC's) according to any of items 1-12     or a composition according to any of items 14-16; ii) contacting     said multimeric MHC's with said sample; and detecting binding of the     multimeric MHC's to said antigen responsive cells, thereby detecting     cells responsive to an antigen present in a set of MHC's, wherein     said binding is detected by amplifying the barcode region of said     nucleic acid molecule linked to the one or more MHC's. -   30. The method according to item 29, wherein unbound MHC's are     removed before amplification, e.g. by washing and/or spinning. -   31. The method according to item 29 or 30, wherein the sample is a     blood sample, such as an peripheral blood sample, a blood derived     sample, a tissue biopsy or another body fluid, such as spinal fluid,     or saliva. -   32. The method according to any of items 29-31, wherein said sample     has been obtained from a mammal, such as a human, mouse, pigs,     and/or horses. -   33. The method according to any of item 30-32, wherein the method     further comprises cell sorting by e.g. flow cytometry such as FACS. -   34. The method according to any of items 29-33, wherein said binding     detection includes comparing measured values to a reference level,     e.g. a negative control and/or total level of response. -   35. The method according to any of item 29-34, wherein said     amplification is PCR such as QPCR. -   36. The method according to any of items 29-35, wherein the     detection of barcode regions includes sequencing of said region such     as deep sequencing or next generation sequencing. -   37. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC)     according to any of items 14-25 or a composition according to any of     items 26-29 for the detecting of antigen responsive cells in a     sample. -   38. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC)     according to any of items 14-25 or a composition according to any of     items 26-29 in the diagnosis of diseases or conditions, preferably     cancer and/or infectious diseases. -   39. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC)     according to any of items 14-25 or a composition according to any of     items 26-29 in the development of immune-therapeutics. -   40. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC)     according to any of items 14-25 or a composition according to any of     items 26-29 in the development of vaccines. -   41. Use of a multimeric major histocompatibility complex (MHC)     according to any of items 14-25 or a composition according to any of     items 26-29 for the identification of epitopes.

REFERENCES

-   1. Altman J D, Moss P A, Goulder P J, Barouch D H, McHeyzer-Williams     M G, Bell J I, et al. Phenotypic analysis of antigen-specific T     lymphocytes. Science. 1996; 274:94-6. -   2. Davis M M, Bjorkman P J. T-cell antigen receptor genes and T-cell     recognition. Nature. 1988; 334:395-402. -   3. Robins H S, Campregher P V, Srivastava S K, Wacher A, Turtle C J,     Kahsai O, et al. Comprehensive assessment of T-cell receptor     beta-chain diversity in alphabeta T cells. Blood. 2009;     114:4099-107. -   4. Hadrup S R, Bakker A H, Shu C J, Andersen R S, van V J, Hombrink     P, et al. Parallel detection of antigen-specific T-cell responses by     multidimensional encoding of MHC multimers. Nature Methods. 2009;     6:520-6. -   5. Andersen R S, Kvistborg P, March T F, Pedersen N W, Lyngaa R,     Bakker A H, et al. Parallel detection of antigen-specific T-cell     responses by combinatorial encoding of MHC multimers. NatProtoc.     2012 -   6. Newell E W, Sigal N, Nair N, Kidd B a, Greenberg H B, Davis M M.     Combinatorial tetramer staining and mass cytometry analysis     facilitate T-cell epitope mapping and characterization. Nat     Biotechnol. 2013; 1-9. -   7. Soen Y, Chen D S, Kraft D L, Davis M M, Brown P O. Detection and     characterization of cellular immune responses using peptide-MHC     microarrays. PLoSBiol. 2003; 1:429-38. -   8. Stone J D, Demkowicz Jr. W E, Stern L J. HLA-restricted epitope     identification and detection of functional T cell responses by using     MHC-peptide and costimulatory microarrays. ProcNatlAcadSciUSA. 2005;     102:3744-9. -   9. Newell E W, Davis M M. Beyond model antigens: high-dimensional     methods for the analysis of antigen-specific T cells. Nat     Biotechnol. 2014; 32. -   10. Dossinger G, Bunse M, Bet J, Albrecht J, Paszkiewicz P J,     Weillbrich B, et al. MHC multimer-guided and cell     culture-independent isolation of functional T cell receptors from     single cells facilitates TCR identification for immunotherapy. PLoS     One. 2013; 8:e61384. -   11. Cha E, Klinger M, Hou Y, Cummings C, Ribas A, Faham M, et al.     Improved Survival with T Cell Clonotype Stability After Anti-CTLA-4     Treatment in Cancer Patients. Sci Transl Med. 2014; 6:238ra70. -   12. Robert L, Tsoi J, Wang X, Emerson R O, Homet B, Chodon T, et al.     CTLA4 blockade broadens the peripheral T cell receptor repertoire.     Clin Cancer Res. 2014 -   13. Morgan R A, Dudley M E, Wunderlich J R, Hughes M S, Yang J C,     Sherry R M, et al. Cancer Regression in Patients After Transfer of     Genetically Engineered Lymphocytes. Science. 2006. -   14. Pannetier C, Even J, Kourilsky P. T-cell repertoire diversity     and clonal expansions in normal and clinical samples. ImmunolToday.     1995; 16:176-81. -   15. Cameron B J, Gerry A B, Dukes J, Harper J V, Kannan V, Bianchi F     C, et al. Identification of a Titin-derived HLA-A1-presented peptide     as a cross-reactive target for engineered MAGE A3-directed T cells.     Sci Transl Med. 2013; 5:197ra103. -   16. Linette G P, Stadtmauer E a, Maus M V, Rapoport A P, Levine B L,     Emery L, et al. Cardiovascular toxicity and titin cross-reactivity     of affinity-enhanced T cells in myeloma and melanoma. Blood. 2013;     122:863-71.     Items Set #2 -   1. A detection molecule comprising     -   a. at least one binding molecule (BM),     -   b. at least one linker (Li), and     -   c. at least one label (La). -   2. A cell-detection molecule complex comprising     -   a. At least one detection molecule comprising a binding molecule         (BM), a linker (Li) and a label (La), and     -   b. at least one cell. -   3. A composition comprising two or more different detection     molecules, or two or more sets of different detection molecules,     each detection molecule comprising at least one binding molecule     (BM), at least one linker (Li) and at least one label (La),     -   wherein each of the two or more detection molecules, or two or         more sets of detection molecules, comprises a label which is         unique to and specific for the binding molecule of each of said         two or more different detection molecules. -   4. The composition according to item 3, said composition comprising     2 to 1,000,000 different detection molecules, such as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,     7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,     25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40     different detection molecules or sets of different detection     molecules; for example 1-3, 3-5, 5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30,     30-35, 35-40, 40-50, 50-60, 60-70, 70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110,     110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150, 150-175, 175-200, 200-250,     250-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900,     900-1000, 1000-1500, 1500-2000, 2000-3000, 3000-4000, 4000-5000,     5000-7500, 7500-10,000, 10,000-20,000, 20,000-50,000,     50,000-100,000, 100,000-200,000, 200,000-500,000, 500,000-1,000,000     different detection molecules, or sets of different detection     molecules. -   5. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is capable of specifically associating     with, recognizing and/or binding to a structure belonging to or     associated with an entity in a sample, such as a target structure. -   6. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule associates with, recognizes and/or     binds to a marker molecule specific for a given cell or cell type. -   7. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is capable of specifically associating     with, recognizing and/or binding to a specific cell type, such as     selected from the group consisting of immune cells, lymphocytes,     monocytes, dendritic cells, T-cells, B-cells, NK cells, CD4+ T     cells, CD8+ T cells, αβ T cells, invariant yi5 T cells,     antigen-specific T-cells, cells comprising TCRs, cells comprising     BCRs, a specific cancer cell -   8. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is capable of specifically associating     with, recognizing and/or binding to a target specifically associated     with an organ selected from the group consisting of lymph nodes,     kidney, liver, skin, brain, heart, muscles, bone marrow, skin,     skeleton, lungs, the respiratory tract, spleen, thymus, pancreas,     exocrine glands, bladder, endocrine glands, reproduction organs     including the phallopian tubes, eye, ear, vascular system, the     gastroinstestinal tract including small intestines, colon, rectum,     canalis analis and prostate gland. -   9. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is peptide-based or protein-based. -   10. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is an anti-target molecule capable of     specifically associating with, recognizing and/or binding to a     predetermined target structure. -   11. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is an anti-target-molecule. -   12. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is selected from the group consisting     of an antibody, an antibody mimetic, an antibody-like molecule, a     peptide, an oligonucleotide, a peptide aptamer, a nucleic acid     aptamer, a DNA aptamer, an RNA aptamer, an XNA aptamer, a ligand, a     natural ligand, a variant or fragment of a natural ligands, a     synthetic ligand and a small organic molecule. -   13. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said antibody mimetic is selected from the group consisting     of affibody molecules, affilinns, affimers, affitins, alphabodies,     anticalins, avimers, DARPins, fynomers, Kunitz domain peptides and     monobodies. -   14. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is an antibody selected from the group     consisting of a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody, a     bi-specific antibody, an antibody-like molecule, a Fc-molecule, a     KIR-molecule, a ScFv and a Fab. -   15. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a peptide of 1-100 amino acid     residues without tertiary structure. -   16. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a MHC molecule or MHC complex. -   17. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a MHC class I complex. -   18. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a MHC class II complex. -   19. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a MHC-like molecule. -   20. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is CD1, wherein said CD1 is selected     from the group consisting of CD1 CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d and CD1e. -   21. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a MHC Class I-like proteins;     including MICA, MIC B, CD1d, HLA E, HLA F, HLA G, HLA H, ULBP-1,     ULBP-2, and ULBP-3. -   22. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a cell-surface target. -   23. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is an intracellular     target. -   24. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a receptor, such as a     cell-surface receptor, an intracellular receptor, a soluble receptor     or an extracellular receptor. -   25. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a T-cell receptor. -   26. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a B-cell receptor. -   27. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is CD4 of T cells. -   28. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is CD8 of T cells. -   29. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is CD20 of B cells. -   30. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is selected from the     group consisting of cancer cell markers, developmental markers, cell     cycle markers, proliferation markers, activation markers, hormones,     hormone receptors, intracellular markers, cluster of differentiation     (CD), cell surface markers, cytokines and cytokine receptors. -   31. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is selected from the     group consisting of CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD9, CD27, CD28, CD30,     CD69, CD134 (OX40), CD137 (4-1BB), CD147, CDw150 (SLAM), CD152     (CTLA-4), CD153 (CD3OL), CD40L (CD154), NKG2D, ICOS, HVEM, HLA Class     II, PD-1, Fas (CD95), FasL, CD40, CD48, CD58, CD70, CD72, B7.1     (CD80), B7.2 (CD86), B7RP-1, B7-H3, PD-L1, PD-L2, CD134L, CD137L,     ICOSL, LIGHT CD16, NKp30, NKp44, NKp46, NKp80, 2B4, KIR, LIR,     CD94/NKG2A, CD94/NKG2C, LFA-1, CD11a/18, CD54 (ICAM-1), CD106     (VCAM), CD49a,b,c,d,e,f/CD29 (VLA-4), CD11a, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD25,     CD30, CD37, CD49a, CD49e, CD56, CD27, CD28, CD45, CD45RA, CD45RO,     CD45RB, CCR7, CCRS, CD62L, CD75, CD94, CD99, CD107b, CD109, CD152,     CD153, CD154, CD160, CD161, CD178, CDw197, CDw217, Cd229, CD245,     CD247 and Foxp3. -   32. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a cytokine selected     from the group consisting of TNFα, TNFβ, TNF, IFNα, IFNβ, IFNγ,     IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10,     IL-10-20, IL-20-30, IL-30, IL-31, IL-32, IL-33, IL-34, IL-35, IL-36,     IL-37, IL-38, IL-39, IL-40, NFκB, chemokines including CC chemokines     (CCL1 to CCL-28), CXC chemokines (CXCL1 to CXCL17) C chemokines     (XCL-1 and -2) and CX3X chemokines (CX3CL1). -   33. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a cancer cell marker     selected from the group consisting of HER2, CA125, Tyrosinase,     Melanoma-associated antigen (MAGE), abnormal products of Ras or p53,     Carcinoembryonic antigen, Muc-1, Epithelial tumor antigen, Carbonic     Anhydrase, VEGFR, EGFR, TRAIL and RANKL. -   34. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a stem cell marker     selected from the group consisting of Stro-1, CD146, CD105, CD44,     c-kit, Oct4, Sox-2, Klf4, EphB, Nestin and TWIST-1. -   35. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a developmental marker     selected from the group consisting of Nanog, Oct4, Sox2, TEKT-1,     NANOS, c-kit, Sox9, Notch, Msx1, Msx2 and Coll. -   36. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a proliferation marker     selected from the group consisting of CyclinA, CyclinB, PCNA, PC10,     p53, Mdm2, Cyclin D, Cyclin E, Rb, ARF and HDM2. -   37. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is an activation marker     selected from the group consisting of CD28, Tbet, Eomes, Blimp,     Bcl-6, CD27, MHC-II, TNF, IFN, Fizz1, ARG1 and CCL22R. -   38. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is an hormone selected     from the group consisting of estrogen, PTH, ADH, T3, ANP,     Epinephrine, Norepinephrine, Cortisol, Corticosterone, Aldosterone,     Progestin, EPO, Leptin, Insulin, Glucagon, T4, ACTH, FSH, oxytocin     and Calcitriol. -   39. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is an hormone receptor     selected from the group consisting of EstrogenR (ER), GLP-1R,     Thyroid receptor, Leptin receptor, Epinephrine receptor, Insulin     receptor and Glucagon receptor. -   40. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is a cluster of     differentiation (CD) molecule selected from the group consisting of     CD1-10, CD10-20, CD20-30, CD30-40, CD40-50, CD50-100, CD100-200,     CD200-300 and CD300-364. -   41. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is an intracellular     marker selected from the group consisting of Cyclins, Cytokines and     organelle markers (for example Apg12, Syntaxin, PAF-46, Histones,     Early endosome antigen, clathrin, tubulins, PAF49, FTCD). -   42. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is selected from the     group consisting of CD1, CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d, and MR1. -   43. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the target of the binding molecule is selected from the     group consisting of targets included in Table 4 of the examples. -   44. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said binding molecule is a surface-molecule receptor to a     cytokine receptor selected from the group consisting of interleukins     and TNF-like molecules. -   45. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is any molecule, atom or signal the identity of     which can be determined. -   46. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is unique to and/or specifies the binding     molecule or a group of binding molecules. -   47. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detection molecule comprises one label. -   48. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detection molecule comprises more than one label. -   49. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detection molecule comprises two or more labels, such     as 3 labels, 4 labels, 5 labels, 6 labels, 7 labels, 8 labels, 9     labels, 10 labels, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 20-25,     25-30, 30-40, 40-50, 50-75, 75-100 labels. -   50. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detection molecule comprises two or more labels and     each of said labels are identical to each other. -   51. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detection molecule comprises two or more labels and at     least two of said labels are different. -   52. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is attached to the linker of the detection     molecule. -   53. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is attached to the binding molecule of the     detection molecule. -   54. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises a connector molecule (attachment     molecule) for attachment to the detection molecule. -   55. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label. -   56. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label selected from the group     consisting of a DNA label, an RNA label, and an artificial nucleic     acid label. -   57. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising one or more     nucleotides individually derived from one or more of DNA, RNA, and     an artificial nucleic acid. -   58. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said artificial nucleic acid is selected from the group     consisting of XNA, LNA, PNA, GNA, TNA, HNA, CeNA, and     morpholino-nucleic acids. -   59. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a DNA label. -   60. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said nucleic acid label comprises 1 to 1,000,000 nucleic     acids, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,     16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,     33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 nucleic acids; for example 1-3, 3-5,     5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-35, 35-40, 40-50, 50-60, 60-70,     70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150,     150-175, 175-200, 200-250, 250-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600,     600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000-1500, 1500-2000,     2000-3000, 3000-4000, 4000-5000, 5000-7500, 7500-10,000,     10,000-100,000, 100,000-1,000,000 nucleic acids. -   61. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising one or more of     -   a. barcode region,     -   b. 5′ first primer region (forward)     -   c. 3′ second primer region (reverse),     -   d. random nucleotide region,     -   e. connector molecule     -   f. stability-increasing components     -   g. short nucleotide linkers in between any of the         above-mentioned components     -   h. adaptors for sequencing     -   i. annealing region -   62. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising at least a     barcode region. -   63. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising at least a     barcode region, wherein said barcode region comprises a sequence of     consecutive nucleic acids. -   64. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the barcode region of said nucleic acid comprises 1-3, 3-5,     5-10, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-35, 35-40, 40-50, 50-60, 60-70,     70-80, 80-90, 90-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130, 130-140, 140-150,     150-175, 175-200, 200-250, 250-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600,     600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000 nucleic acids. -   65. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said barcode region comprises or consists of 5-10, 10-15,     15-20, 20-25, 25-30, 30-40, 40-45, 45-50 nucleic acids. -   66. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising at least a 3′     primer region, a barcode region, and a 5′ primer region. -   67. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising at least a 3′     primer region, a barcode region, and a 5′ primer region, wherein     said barcode region is designed to be amplified by e.g. PCR and     identified by e.g. sequencing. -   68. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the primer regions of said nucleic acid label are identical     for subsets of detection molecules comprising different labels. -   69. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nucleic acid label comprising a connector     molecule which is able to interact with a component on the linker     and/or binding molecule of the detection molecule. -   70. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said nucleic acid label comprises a connector molecule which     is biotin. -   71. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said nucleic acid label comprises a random nucleotide region     comprising 3-20 nucleotides, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,     12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 nt. -   72. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said nucleic acid label comprises one or more     stability-increasing components, such as HEG or TEG. -   73. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein a sample identifying sequence is attached to the nucleic     acid label such as by attachment to one of the primers capable of     binding to the primer regions of the nucleic acid label. -   74. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a peptide label. -   75. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said peptide label comprises a stretch of consecutive amino     acid residues (coding region). -   76. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said peptide label comprises a stretch of consecutive amino     acid residues (coding region) and a protease cleavage site. -   77. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said peptide label comprises a stretch of consecutive amino     acid residues (coding region) and a protease cleavage site. -   78. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said protease cleavage site in said peptide label is located     proximal to the linker that connects the label to the binding     molecule. -   79. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said peptide label comprising a protease cleavage site     allows for cleavage of the stretch of consecutive amino acid     residues (coding region) and release thereof from the detection     molecule. -   80. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a peptide label comprising 2 or more     consecutive amino acids, such as 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6, 6-7, 7-8, 8-9,     9-10, 10-11, 11-12, 12-13, 13-14, 14-15, 15-16, 16-17, 17-18, 18-19,     19-20, 20-21, 21-22, 22-23, 23-24, 24-25, 25-26, 26-27, 27-28,     28-29, 29-30, 30-31, 31-32, 32-33, 33-34, 34-35, 35-36, 36-37,     37-38, 38-39, 39-40, 40-45, 45-50, 50-55, 55-60, 60-65, 65-70,70-75,     75-80, 80-85, 85-90, 90-95, 95-100, 100-110, 110-120, 120-130,     130-140, 140-150, 150-160, 160-170,170-180, 180-190, 190-200,     200-225, 225-250, 250-275, 275-300, 300-350, 350-400, 400-450,     450-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000-1500,     1500-2000, or more than 2000, consecutive amino acids. -   81. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said peptide label comprises proteinogenic and/or     non-proteinogenic amino acids. -   82. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a fluorescent label (fluorophore label). -   83. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a fluorescent label selected from the group     consisting of fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC), fluorescein (Flu)     derivates, rhodamine, tetramethylrhodamine, phycoerythrin,     R-phycoerythrin (RPE), allophycoerythrin, phycocyanin,     allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde, fluorescamine;     2-(4′-maleimidylanilino)naphthalene-6-sulfonic acid;     5-((((2-iodoacetyl)amino)ethyl)amino) naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid;     Pyrene-1-butanoic acid; AlexaFluor 350 (7-amino-6-sulfonic     acid-4-methyl coumarin-3-acetic acid); AMCA (7-amino-4-methyl     coumarin-3-acetic acid); 7-hydroxy-4-methyl coumarin-3-acetic acid;     Marina Blue (6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxy-4-methyl coumarin-3-acetic     acid); 7-dimethylamino-coumarin-4-acetic acid; Fluorescamin-N-butyl     amine adduct; 7-hydroxy-coumarine-3-carboxylic acid; CascadeBlue     (pyrene-trisulphonic acid acetyl azide); Cascade Yellow; Pacific     Blue (6,8 difluoro-7-hydroxy coumarin-3-carboxylic acid);     7-diethylamino-coumarin-3-carboxylic acid;     N-(((4-azidobenzoyl)amino)ethyl)-4-amino-3,6-disulfo-1,8-naphthalimide;     Alexa Fluor 430; 3-perylenedodecanoic acid;     8-hydroxypyrene-1,3,6-trisulfonic acid;     12-(N-(7-nitrobenz-2-oxa-1,3-diazol-4-yl)amino)dodecanoic acid;     N,N′-dimethyl-N-(iodoacetyl)-N′-(7-nitrobenz-2-oxa-1,3-diazol-4-yl)ethylenediamine;     Oregon Green 488 (difluoro carboxy fluorescein);     5-iodoacetamidofluorescein; propidium iodide-DNA adduct; Carboxy     fluorescein; 5- or 6-carboxyfluorescein; 6-(fluorescein)-5-(and     6)-carboxamido hexanoic acid; Texas Red, Princeton Red, Green     fluorescent protein (GFP) and analogues thereof; PerCP;     AlexaFluor®(AF), AF405, AF488,AF500, AF514, AF532, AF546, AF555,     AF568, AF594, AF610, AF633, AF635, AF647, AF680, AF700, AF710,     AF750, AF800; Quantum Dot based dyes, Qdot®525, Qdot®565, Qdot®585,     Qdot®605, Qdot®655, Qdot®705, Qdot®800; DyLight™ Dyes (Pierce) (DL);     DL549, DL649, DL680, DL800; Cy-Dyes, Cy2, Cy3, Cy3.5, Cy5, Cy5.5,     Cy7; Fluorescent Proteins, RPE, PerCp, APC, Green fluorescent     proteins; GFP and GFP derivated mutant proteins; BFP,CFP, YFP,     DsRed, T1, Dimer2, mRFP1,MBanana, mOrange, dTomato, tdTomato,     mTangerine, mStrawberry, mCherry; Tandem dyes, RPE-Cy5, RPE-Cy5.5,     RPE-Cy7, RPE-AlexaFluor® tandem conjugates; RPE-Alexa610, RPE-TxRed,     APC-Aleca600, APC-Alexa610, APC-Alexa750, APC-Cy5 and APC-Cy5.5. -   84. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a phosphorescence label. -   85. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a bioluminescence label or chemoluminescence     label. -   86. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said chemoluminiscence label is selected from luminol,     isoluminol, acridinium esters, acridinium salt, theromatic     acridinium ester, 1,2-dioxetanes, oxalate ester, imidazole and     pyridopyridazines. -   87. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said bioluminiscence label is selected from the group     luciferin, luciferase and aequorin. -   88. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is an enzymatic label. -   89. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is an enzymatic label, wherein the enzyme     catalyze a reaction between chemicals in the near environment of the     labeling molecules, which results in one or more of producing a     light signal (chemi-luminescence) and precipitation of chromophor     dyes. -   90. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is an enzymatic label selected from peroxidases,     malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-5-steroid     isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate,     dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase,     alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase,     beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase,     glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and     acetylcholinesterase. -   91. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is an enzymatic label selected from horse radish     peroxidase (HRP), alkaline phosphatase (AP), beta-galactosidase     (GAL), glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase,     beta-N-acetylglucosaminidase, β-glucuronidase, invertase, Xanthine     Oxidase, firefly luciferase and glucose oxidase (GO). -   92. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is capable of reflection of light, such as gold,     plastic, glass, polystyrene and pollen. -   93. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is capable of capable of absorption of light,     such as a chromophore or a dye. -   94. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is capable of emission of light after excitation,     such as a fluorochrome. -   95. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a nanoparticle label. -   96. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is an element. -   97. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is selected from the group consisting of heavy     metal labels, isotope labels, radiolabels, radionuclide, stable     isotopes, chains of isotopes and single atoms. -   98. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a single atom selected from the group     consisting of zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), magnesium (Mg), any of the     lanthanides (Ln) including La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy,     Ho, Er, Tm, Yb and Lu; scandium (Sc) and yttrium (Y). -   99. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said radioactivity labels comprises incorporated isotopes of     iodide, cobalt, selenium, tritium and/or phosphor. -   100. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label is a DNA fluorescing stain, such as Propidium     iodide, Hoechst stain, DAPI, DraQ5 or Acridine orange. -   101. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises a nucleic acid label and at least a     second label. -   102. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises a nucleic acid label and at least a     second label according to any of the preceding items. -   103. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises a nucleic acid label and a fluorophore     label. -   104. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises one type of label. -   105. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said label comprises more than one type of label, such as     comprising 2 types of labels, for example comprising 3 types of     labels, such as comprising 4 types of labels, for example comprising     5 types of labels. -   106. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said linker is a molecular entity and/or bond that connects     the binding molecule and the label. -   107. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein one or more of the binding molecules are covalently     associated with the one or more linkers. -   108. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein one or more of the binding molecules are non-covalently     associated with the one or more linkers. -   109. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein one or more labels are covalently associated with the one or     more linkers. -   110. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein one or more of labels are non-covalently associated with the     one or more linkers. -   111. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more labels and/or one or more binding molecules     are associated with a molecule in the one or more linkers, such as a     connector molecule, a sugar residue, a protein, an antibody, a DNA,     an aptamer, reactive groups, nucleophilic group, electrophilic     groups, radicals, or conjugated double bonds. -   112. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more     multimerization domains. -   113. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more scaffolds. -   114. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more connectors. -   115. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more multimerization domains comprises at least     one scaffold and at least one connector. -   116. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the binding molecule and/or the label is attached to the     linker via a streptavidin-biotin linkage. -   117. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprise one or more optionally     substituted organic molecules. -   118. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the optionally substituted organic molecule comprises one or     more functionalized cyclic structures. -   119. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more functionalized cyclic structures comprises     one or more benzene rings. -   120. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the optionally substituted organic molecule comprises a     scaffold molecule comprising at least three reactive groups, or at     least three sites suitable for non-covalent attachment. -   121. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more biological     cells and/or cell-like structures, such as antigen presenting cells     or dendritic cells. -   122. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more membranes. -   123. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more membranes comprises liposomes or micelles. -   124. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more polymers such     as one or more synthetic polymers. -   125. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein reactive groups involved in forming an association between     the multimerization domain and the binding molecule are located on     glutamate or aspartate residues, or on a vinyl sulfone activated     dextran. -   126. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker polymers are selected from the group     consisting of polysaccharides. -   127. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker comprises one or more dextran moieties. -   128. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more dextran moieties are covalently attached to     one or more binding molecules. -   129. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more dextran moieties are non-covalently attached     to one or more binding molecules. -   130. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more dextran moieties are covalently attached to     one or more labels. -   131. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more dextran moieties are non-covalently attached     to one or more labels. -   132. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein reactive groups of the multimerization domains include     hydroxyls of polysaccharides such as dextrans. -   133. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties are modified. -   134. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties are activated. -   135. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties are activated by     reaction of the dextran hydroxyls with divinyl sulfon. -   136. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein dextran is activated by a multistep reaction that results in     the decoration of the dextran with maleimide groups. -   137. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties comprises one or     more amino-dextrans. -   138. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties comprises one or     more amino-dextrans modified with divinyl sulfone. -   139. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties comprises one or     more dextrans with a molecular weight of from 1,000 to 50,000, such     as from 1,000 to 5,000, for example 5,000 to 10,000, such as from     10,000 to 15,000, for example 15,000 to 20,000, such as from 20,000     to 25,000, for example 25,000 to 30,000, such as from 30,000 to     35,000, for example 35,000 to 40,000, such as from 40,000 to 45,000,     for example 45,000 to 50,000. -   140. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties comprises one or     more dextrans with a molecular weight of from 50,000 to 150,000,     such as from 50,000 to 60,000, for example 60,000 to 70,000, such as     from 70,000 to 80,000, for example 80,000 to 90,000, such as from     90,000 to 100,000, for example 100,000 to 110,000, such as from     110,000 to 120,000, for example 120,000 to 130,000, such as from     130,000 to 140,000, for example 140,000 to 150,000. -   141. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties comprises one or     more dextrans with a molecular weight of from 150,000-270,000 such     as from 150,000 to 160,000, for example 160,000 to 170,000, such as     from 170,000 to 180,000, for example 180,000 to 190,000, such as     from 190,000 to 200,000, for example 200,000 to 210,000, such as     from 210,000 to 220,000, for example 220,000 to 230,000, such as     from 230,000 to 240,000, for example 240,000 to 250,000, such as     from 250,000 to 260,000, for example 260,000 to 270,000, such as     from 270,000 to 280,000, for example 280,000 to 290,000, such as     from 290,000 to 300,000, for example 300,000 to 310,000 such as from     310,000 to 320,000, for example 320,000 to 330,000 such as from     330,000 to 340,000, for example 340,000 to 350,000 such as from     350,000 to 360,000, for example 360,000 to 370,000 such as from     370,000 to 380,000, for example 380,000 to 390,000, such as from     390,000 to 400,000. -   142. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties are linear. -   143. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker dextran moieties are branched. -   144. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a carboxy methyl dextran     and/or a dextran polyaldehyde and/or a carboxymethyl dextran lactone     and/or a cyclodextrin. -   145. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linker synthetic polymers are selected from     the group consisting of PNA, polyamide and PEG. -   146. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises one or more entities     selected from the group consisting of an IgG domain, a coiled-coil     polypeptide structure, a DNA duplex, a nucleic acid duplex, PNA-PNA,     PNA-DNA, DNA-RNA. -   147. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers, such as one or more multimerization     domains, comprises one or more avidins, such as one or more     streptavidins. -   148. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more streptavidins comprises one or more     tetrameric streptavidin variants. -   149. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more streptavidins comprises one or more     monomeric streptavidin variants. -   150. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises an antibody. -   151. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker antibody is selected from the group consisting of     polyclonal antibody, monoclonal antibody, IgA, IgG, IgM, IgD, IgE,     IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1, IgA2, IgM1, IgM2, humanized antibody,     humanized monoclonal antibody, chimeric antibody, mouse antibody,     rat antibody, rabbit antibody, human antibody, camel antibody, sheep     antibody, engineered human antibody, epitope-focused antibody,     agonist antibody, antagonist antibody, neutralizing antibody,     naturally-occurring antibody, isolated antibody, monovalent     antibody, bispecific antibody, trispecific antibody, multispecific     antibody, heteroconjugate antibody, immunoconjugates,     immunoliposomes, labeled antibody, antibody fragment, domain     antibody, nanobody, minibody, maxibody, diabody, fusion antibody. -   152. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the detection molecule comprises one or more organic     molecules selected from the group consisting of small organic     scaffold molecules, small organic molecules, steroids, peptides,     aromatic organic molecules, monocyclic structures, functionalized or     substituted benzene rings, dicyclic structures, polycyclic     structures, aliphatic molecules, monocyclic molecules, dicyclic     molecules, polycyclic molecules. -   153. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the detection molecule comprises one or more monomeric     molecules able to polymerize; one or more biological polymers such     as one or more proteins; one or more small molecule scaffolds; one     or more supramolecular structure(s) such as one or more     nanoclusters; and/or one or more protein complexes. -   154. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker of the detection molecule comprises one or more     beads. -   155. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker is a bead coated with streptavidin, such as     streptavidin monomers or tetramers, and the one or more binding     molecules are biotinylated. -   156. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker is a bead coated with polysaccharide, such as a     polysaccharide comprising dextran moieties. -   157. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more beads are selected from the groups     consisting of beads that carry electrophilic groups e.g. divinyl     sulfone activated polysaccharide, polystyrene beads that have been     functionalized with tosyl-activated esters, magnetic polystyrene     beads functionalized with tosyl-activated esters, and beads where     binding molecules have been covalently immobilized to these by     reaction of nucleophiles comprised within the binding molecules with     the electrophiles of the beads. -   158. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more beads is selected from the groups consisting     of sepharose beads, sephacryl beads, polystyrene beads, agarose     beads, polysaccharide beads, polycarbamate beads and any other kind     of beads that can be suspended in an aqueous buffer. -   159. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the linker comprises one or more compounds selected from the     group consisting of agarose, sepharose, resin beads, glass beads,     pore-glass beads, glass particles coated with a hydrophobic polymer,     chitosan-coated beads, SH beads, latex beads, spherical latex beads,     allele-type beads, SPA bead, PEG-based resins, PEG-coated bead,     PEG-encapsulated bead, polystyrene beads, magnetic polystyrene     beads, glutathione agarose beads, magnetic bead, paramagnetic beads,     protein A and/or protein G sepharose beads, activated carboxylic     acid bead, macroscopic beads, microscopic beads, insoluble resin     beads, silica-based resins, cellulosic resins, cross-linked agarose     beads, polystyrene beads, cross-linked polyacrylamide resins, beads     with iron cores, metal beads, dynabeads, Polymethylmethacrylate     beads activated with NHS, streptavidin-agarose beads, polypropylene,     polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified     celluloses, nitrocellulose, polyacrylamides, gabbros, magnetite,     polymers, oligomers, non-repeating moieties, polyethylene glycol     (PEG), monomethoxy-PEG, mono-(C₁-C₁₀)alkoxy-PEG, aryloxy-PEG,     poly-(N-vinyl pyrrolidone)PEG, tresyl monomethoxy PEG, PEG     propionaldehyde, bis-succinimidyl carbonate PEG, polystyrene bead     crosslinked with divinylbenzene, propylene glycol homopolymers, a     polypropylene oxide/ethylene oxide co-polymer, polyoxyethylated     polyols (e.g., glycerol), polyvinyl alcohol, dextran, aminodextran,     carbohydrate-based polymers, cross-linked dextran beads,     polysaccharide beads, polycarbamate beads, divinyl sulfone activated     polysaccharide, polystyrene beads that have been functionalized with     tosyl-activated esters, magnetic polystyrene beads functionalized     with tosyl-activated esters, streptavidin beads,     streptaivdin-monomer coated beads, streptaivdin-tetramer coated     beads, Streptavidin Coated Compel Magnetic beads, avidin coated     beads, dextramer coated beads, divinyl sulfone-activated dextran,     Carboxylate-modified bead, amine-modified beads, antibody coated     beads, cellulose beads, grafted co-poly beads, poly-acrylamide     beads, dimethylacrylamide beads optionally crosslinked with     N-N′-bis-acryloylethylenediamine, hollow fiber membranes,     fluorescent beads, collagen-agarose beads, gelatin beads,     collagen-gelatin beads, collagen-fibronectin-gelatin beads, collagen     beads, chitosan beads, collagen-chitosan beads, protein-based beads,     hydrogel beads, hemicellulose, alkyl cellulose, hydroxyalkyl     cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, sulfoethylcellulose, starch,     xylan, amylopectine, chondroitin, hyarulonate, heparin, guar,     xanthan, mannan, galactomannan, chitin and chitosan. -   160. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the multimerization domain comprises one or more beads     further comprises a linker moiety. -   161. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the multimerization domain comprises one or more beads     comprising a linker moiety which is a flexible linker, a rigid     linker, a water-soluble linker or a cleavable linker. -   162. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a dimerization domain. -   163. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a trimerization domain. -   164. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a tetramerization domain. -   165. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a pentamerization domain. -   166. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the pentamerization domain comprises a coiled-coil     polypeptide structure. -   167. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a hexamerization domain,     such as a hexamerization domain comprises three IgG domains. -   168. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers comprises a polyamide and/or a     polyethylene glycol and/or a polysaccharide and/or a sepharose. -   169. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers have a molecular weight of less than     1,000 Da. -   170. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers have a molecular weight of from     1,000 Da to preferably less than 10,000 Da. -   171. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers have a molecular weight of from     10,000 Da to preferably less than 100,000 Da. -   172. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers have a molecular weight of from     100,000 Da to preferably less than 1,000,000 Da. -   173. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the one or more linkers have a molecular weight of more than     1,000,000 Da. -   174. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items     further comprising one or more scaffolds, carriers, connectors     and/or linkers selected from the group consisting of streptavidin     (SA) and avidin and derivatives thereof, biotin, immunoglobulins,     antibodies (monoclonal, polyclonal, and recombinant), antibody     fragments and derivatives thereof, leucine zipper domain of AP-1     (Jun and fos), hexa-his (metal chelate moiety), hexa-hat GST     (glutathione S-tranferase) glutathione affinity, Calmodulin-binding     peptide (CBP), Strep-tag, Cellulose Binding Domain, Maltose Binding     Protein, S-Peptide Tag, Chitin Binding Tag, Immuno-reactive     Epitopes, Epitope Tags, E2Tag, HA Epitope Tag, Myc Epitope, FLAG     Epitope, AU1 and AU5 Epitopes, Glu-Glu Epitope, KT3 Epitope, IRS     Epitope, Btag Epitope, Protein Kinase-C Epitope, VSV Epitope,     lectins that mediate binding to a diversity of compounds, including     carbohydrates, lipids and proteins, e.g. Con A (Canavalia     ensiformis) or WGA (wheat germ agglutinin) and tetranectin or     Protein A or G (antibody affinity). -   175. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the binding molecule and/or the label comprises a connector     molecule, such as biotin, and the linker comprises a connector such     as streptavidin or another avidin connector. -   176. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the binding molecule is linked to at least one of the one or     more multimerization domains by a non-covalent linker moiety, such     as natural dimerization or protein-protein interactions. -   177. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the binding molecule is linked to at least one of the one or     more multimerization domains by a protein-protein interaction     selected from the group consisting of Fos/Jun interactions,     Acid/Base coiled coil structure based interactions, antibody/antigen     interactions, polynucleotide-polynucleotide interactions, synthetic     molecule-synthetic molecule interactions and protein-small molecule     interactions. -   178. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the binding molecule is linked to at least one of the one or     more multimerization domains by natural dimerization selected from     the group consisting of antigen-antibody pairs, DNA-DNA     interactions, natural interactions, biotin and streptavidin. -   179. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein the detection molecule further comprises an enzyme capable     of catalysing the transfer of a cell surface moiety (e.g. a peptide     fragment or ‘peptide tag’) from a cell surface protein to the     binding molecule of the detection molecule, when said surface moiety     binds to the binding molecule. -   180. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     comprising     -   a. a monomeric or a multimeric major histocompatibility complex         (MHC) molecule, such as a monomeric or multimeric peptide MHC         complex,     -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label. -   181. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     comprising     -   a. a monomeric or a multimeric major histocompatibility complex         (MHC) molecule, such as a monomeric or multimeric peptide MHC         complex,     -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a peptide label. -   182. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     comprising     -   a. CD1, wherein said CD1 is selected from the group consisting         of CD1

CD1a, CD1b, CD1c, CD1d and CD1e,

-   -   b. a linker comprising a multimerization domain and optionally         one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label.

-   183. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     comprising     -   a. an anti-target molecule capable of associating with,         recognizing and/or binding to a predetermined marker molecule         (or target) on a cell type, wherein said marker molecule is         specific for a certain cell type     -   b. a linker (Li) comprising a multimerization domain and         optionally one or more connectors, and     -   c. a nucleic acid label.

-   184. The detection molecule according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said linker comprising a multimerization domain and     optionally one or more connectors is a dextran optionally comprising     streptavidin or avidin, and said binding molecule and/or label     optionally comprises biotin.

-   185. A kit of parts comprising     -   a. One or more detection molecules according to any of the         preceding items, and     -   b. one or more additional components.

-   186. The kit of parts according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said one or more additional components comprise reagents for     detecting and/or amplifying the label of the detection molecule.

-   187. The kit of parts according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said one or more additional components comprise reagents for     detecting and/or amplifying the nucleic acid label of the detection     molecule.

-   188. The kit of parts according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said reagents for detecting the nucleic acid label of the     detection molecule comprises one or more primer sets capable of     amplifying the nucleic acid label.

-   189. A detection method comprising the steps of     -   a. Combining a sample with at least one detection molecule;         wherein the detection molecule comprises a binding molecule         (BM), a linker (Li), and a label (La) according to any of the         preceding items; and wherein said sample comprises at least one         cell and/or entity,     -   b. Incubating the at least one detection molecule and the         sample;     -   c. Isolating and/or detecting the at least one detection         molecule of step b), and     -   d. Optionally determining the identity of the at least one         detection molecule of step c).

-   190. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step b) the one or more detection molecules are allowed     to associate with, recognize, and/or bind to said at least one cell     and/or entity through their binding molecule.

-   191. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) and d) said detection molecule is comprised in a     cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule     complex.

-   192. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) and d) said detection molecule is not comprised     in a cell-detection molecule complex or an entity-detection molecule     complex.

-   193. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) and d) said detection molecule is no longer     comprised in a cell-detection molecule complex or an     entity-detection molecule complex, wherein said detection molecule     has previously interacted with a cell-detection molecule complex or     an entity-detection molecule complex.

-   194. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said cell-detection molecule complexes comprises a cell,     such as an immune cell, associated with or bound to a detection     molecule having a binding molecule specific for the immune cell.

-   195. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein step c) comprises isolating and detecting the at least one     detection molecule.

-   196. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein step c) comprises first isolating and then detecting the at     least one detection molecule.

-   197. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein step c) comprises detecting the at least one detection     molecule.

-   198. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein step c) comprises isolating the at least one detection     molecule.

-   199. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein step c) comprises first detecting and then isolating the at     least one detection molecule.

-   200. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises flow cytometry and/or FACS     sorting

-   201. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises one or more steps of washing,     centrifugation and/or precipitation.

-   202. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises one or more steps of     filtration.

-   203. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises one or more steps of     application on an affinity column.

-   204. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises sorting of cell populations     based on the functional response to a stimuli (responsive or     non-responsive population), such as cytokine secretion,     phosphorylation, calcium release.

-   205. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises sorting of cell populations     based on phenotype, such as by linking a certain set of phenotypic     characteristics to the antigen-responsiveness.

-   206. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein in step c) isolating comprises immobilization of the     detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes.

-   207. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said immobilization of the cell-detection molecule complexes     comprises precipitating cells, such as by centrifugation, by     immunoprecipitation, or any other means that precipitates the cells.

-   208. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said immobilization of the cell-detection molecule complexes     comprises binding the cell-detection molecule complexes to a bead, a     particle, another surface, an antibody or an MHC complex.

-   209. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or     cell-detection molecule complexes comprises hybridization onto an     array.

-   210. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or     cell-detection molecule complexes by hybridization onto an array     comprises a nucleic acid/nucleic acid-interaction between the     nucleic acid label of the detection molecule and an antisense     nucleic acid sequence in the array.

-   211. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said immobilization of the detection molecule and/or     cell-detection molecule complexes by hybridization onto an array     comprises a DNA/DNA-interaction between the DNA label of the     detection molecule and an antisense DNA in the array.

-   212. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises one or more steps of adding primary antibodies     that bind to the immobilized detection molecule and/or     cell-detection molecule complexes and detecting said primary     antibodies directly wherein the primary antibody is labelled, or     indirectly by adding labelled secondary antibodies.

-   213. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises one or more steps of detecting the immobilized     detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes by     monitoring read-out from a second label such as a fluorophore.

-   214. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises one or more steps of determining the identity of     said label.

-   215. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises interaction between ‘coating DNA’ on the cell     surface and the DNA label of the detection molecule.

-   216. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises protease cleavage of the peptide label of the     detection molecule.

-   217. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises transfer of a cell surface moiety to the detection     molecule (e.g. a ‘peptide tag’).

-   218. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises detection of the label based on the physical     characteristics of the label, including mass, sequence, charge,     volume, size, dimensions, fluorescence, absorption, emission, NMR     spectra and others.

-   219. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises amplification of the label.

-   220. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises sequencing of the label (e.g. DNA sequencing,     peptide sequencing).

-   221. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises amplification of the barcode sequence of a nucleic     acid label by PCR and/or sequencing of the barcode sequence.

-   222. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said sequencing comprises deep sequencing or next generation     sequencing.

-   223. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises mass spectrometry.

-   224. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said detecting in step c) and/or determining the identity in     step d) comprises one or more of gel electrophoresis, gel     filtration, PAGE, column fractionation, PCR and QPCR.

-   225. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of providing a     sample, preferably a sample comprising at least one entity and/or at     least one cell.

-   226. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of pre-treatment of     the sample, and/or pre-treatment of cells of the sample.

-   227. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of separating     unbound detection molecules from cell- or entity-detection molecule     complexes.

-   228. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of removing unbound     detection molecules by washing and/or centrifuging.

-   229. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of single-cell     sorting and sequencing.

-   230. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     said method further comprising one or more steps of single-cell T     cell sorting of and single-cell TCR sequencing.

-   231. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said sample comprises one or more cells.

-   232. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said sample comprises at least one cell and/or entity to     which the binding molecule of the detection molecule is able to     associate with, recognize and/or bind.

-   233. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said sample is selected from the group consisting of a solid     sample, a fluid sample, a semifluid sample, a liquid sample, a     solubilised sample and a sample comprising dissociated cells of a     solid sample.

-   234. The detection method according to any of the preceding items,     wherein said sample is selected from the group consisting of a     biofilm, a biopsy, a surgical sample, a tissue sample, a     microarray-fixed sample, a section such as a fresh section, a frozen     section and a FFPE section.

-   235. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said sample is selected from the group consisting of blood,     whole blood, plasma, serum, Peripheral blood mononuclear cells     (PBMC), human PBMN (HPBMC), buffy coat, synovial fluid, bone marrow,     cerebrospinal fluid, saliva, lymph fluid, seminal fluid, urine,     stool, exudate, transdermal exudates, pharyngeal exudates, nasal     secretions, sputum, sweat, bronchoalveolar lavage, tracheal     aspirations, fluid from joints, vitreous fluid, vaginal or urethral     secretions or semen.

-   236. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said sample comprises cell populations isolated from a     fluid, a semifluid sample or a solid sample.

-   237. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said cell is selected from the group consisting of immune     cells, lymphocytes, monocytes, dendritic cells, T-cells, B-cells and     NK cells

-   238. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said cell is a T-cell, such as a T cell selected from the     group consisting of CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, αβ T cells and     invariant γδ T cells.

-   239. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said cell is an antigen-specific T-cell or     antigen-responsive T cell.

-   240. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said cell comprises T-cell receptors.

-   241. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said cell is a cancer cell.

-   242. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein said sample is derived from an organ selected from the group     consisting of lymph nodes, kidney, liver, skin, brain, heart,     muscles, bone marrow, skin, skeleton, lungs, the respiratory tract,     spleen, thymus, pancreas, exocrine glands, bladder, endocrine     glands, reproduction organs including the phallopian tubes, eye,     ear, vascular system, the gastroinstestinal tract including small     intestines, colon, rectum, canalis analis and prostate gland.

-   243. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein the surface of sample cells is coated with proteases capable     of cleaving a peptide label, for example by adding antibody-protease     conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface     structure.

-   244. The detection method according to any of the previous items,     wherein the surface of sample cells is coated with DNA     oligonucletides (“coating DNA”), for example by adding antibody-DNA     conjugates where the antibody recognizes a particular cell surface     structure.

-   245. A method for detecting antigen-specific T cells in a sample,     said method comprising providing a detection molecule and a     detection method according to any of the preceding items.

-   246. A method for detecting specific cells in a sample, said method     comprising providing a detection molecule and a detection method     according to any of the preceding items.

-   247. A method for diagnosing a disease, said method comprising     providing a detection molecule and a detection method according to     any of the preceding items.

-   248. A method for diagnosing a disease according to the previous     items, wherein said disease is selected from the group consisting of     cancer, Cancerous diseases, infectious diseases, Infectious diseases     caused by virus, Infectious diseases caused by bacteria, Infectious     diseases caused by fungus, Parasitic diseases, Allergic diseases,     Transplantation-related diseases and Autoimmune and inflammatory     diseases.

-   249. A method for detecting the presence and/or abundance of a     certain cell or cell type in a sample, said method comprising     providing a detection molecule and a detection method according to     any of the preceding items, wherein said detection molecule     comprises a binding molecule capable of associating specifically     with the cell or cell type in said sample

-   250. A method for investigating the binding characteristics of a     certain cell or cell type in a sample, said method comprising     providing a detection molecule and a detection method according to     any of the preceding items, wherein said detection molecule     comprises a binding molecule capable of associating specifically     with a known target.

-   251. A method for the identification of epitopes comprising     providing a detection molecule and a detection method according to     any of the preceding items

-   252. A method for vaccine development comprising providing a     detection molecule and a detection method according to any of the     preceding items.

-   253. A method for measuring immune reactivity after vaccination     comprising providing a detection molecule and a detection method     according to any of the preceding items.

-   254. A method for development of immune-therapeutics comprising     providing a detection molecule and a detection method according to     any of the preceding items. 

The invention claimed is:
 1. A cell detection method comprising the steps of a. combining a sample comprising cells with a composition comprising two or more different sets of detection molecules to form a mixture; wherein each detection molecule comprises i) at least two binding molecules, wherein each of said binding molecules is a peptide-MHC complex, ii) at least one nucleic acid label, wherein said nucleic acid label comprises a 5′ first primer region (forward), a barcode region, a 3′ second primer region (reverse), and a random nucleotide region between the 5′ first primer region and the 3′ second primer region, wherein said random nucleotide region comprises 7 to 20 nucleotides, and wherein the barcode region is unique to and specific for the binding molecules of a set, and iii) a multimerization domain associated with the at least two binding molecules and the at least one nucleic acid label, optionally via one or more connector molecules, wherein the multimerization domain is selected from the group consisting of a peptide, a protein, streptactin, a polysaccharide, a dextran, an avidin and a streptavidin; wherein said barcode region serves as an identification tag for the at least two binding molecules of a set, wherein said random nucleotide region is unique for each detection molecule, and wherein the primer regions of said nucleic acid label are identical for all detection molecules in the composition; b. incubating the mixture, whereby said detection molecules bind to said cells to form labeled cells; c. isolating the labeled cells from step b and detecting one or more labels bound to the labeled cells, and d. determining an identity of the detected labeled cells of step c.
 2. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein in step c isolating comprises one or more methods selected from the group consisting of flow cytometry, fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS), washing, centrifugation, precipitation, filtration, affinity column, sorting of cell populations based on the functional response to a stimulus, sorting of cell populations based on phenotype, and immobilization of one or more detection molecules and/or cell-detection molecule complexes.
 3. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein said detecting in step c and/or determining the identity in step d comprises one or more steps of amplification of the label, sequencing of the label, DNA sequencing, mass spectrometry, gel electrophoresis, gel filtration, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, column fractionation, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), quantitative polymerase chain reaction (QPCR); adding primary antibodies that bind to the immobilized detection molecule and/or cell-detection molecule complexes and detecting said primary antibodies directly wherein the primary antibody is labelled, or indirectly by adding labelled secondary antibodies; and single-cell sorting and sequencing.
 4. The cell detection method according to claim 2, wherein in step c isolating comprises flow cytometry and/or FACS.
 5. The cell detection method according to claim 3, wherein said detecting in step c and/or determining the identity in step d comprises one or more steps of amplification of the label and sequencing of the label.
 6. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein isolating in step c comprises flow cytometry and/or FACS, wherein detecting in step c comprises one or more steps of amplification of the label by PCR and wherein determining the identity in step d comprises sequencing of the label.
 7. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein isolating in step c comprises flow cytometry and/or FACS, wherein detecting in step c comprises and/or determining the identity in step d comprises QPCR.
 8. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein said detecting in step c and/or determining the identity in step d comprises one or more steps of single-cell sorting and sequencing.
 9. The cell detection method according to claim 1, comprising one or more steps of single-cell T cell sorting and single-cell T cell receptor sequencing.
 10. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein said detection molecules further comprise a fluorescent label.
 11. The cell detection method according to claim 10, wherein the fluorescent label is suitable for use in flow cytometry and/or FACS.
 12. The cell detection method according to claim 10, wherein said fluorescent label is used for the isolating in step c, and wherein the isolating in step c comprises flow cytometry and/or FACS.
 13. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein the binding molecules of at least one of said sets are capable of binding a T cell receptor.
 14. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein the sample is a blood sample, a peripheral blood sample, a blood-derived sample, a tissue biopsy, a body fluid, spinal fluid or saliva.
 15. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein said label comprises more than one random nucleotide region between the 5′ first primer region and the 3′ second primer region.
 16. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein the detection molecules in a set have identical binding molecules and identical barcodes.
 17. The cell detection method according to claim 1, wherein the sample comprises T cells, and T cells are detected in step c and identified in step d. 